Author Archives: paul.fraser@sfmagazines.com

The Best Science-Fiction Stories: 1950 edited by Everett F. Bleiler & T. E. Dikty

ISFDB link

Other reviews:1
Anthony Boucher & J. Francis McComas, The Magazine of Fantasy and Science Fiction, February 1951
Groff Conklin, Galaxy Science Fiction, December 1950
P. Schuyler Miller, Astounding Science Fiction, March 1951
Frederik Pohl, Super Science Stories, January 1951
Uncredited, Authentic Science Fiction, #20 (April) 1952
Uncredited, The Journal of Science Fiction, Fall 1951
Uncredited, Startling Stories, January 1951
Various, Goodreads

_____________________

Editors, Everett F. Bleiler & T. E. Dikty

Fiction:
Private Eye • novelette by Henry Kuttner and C. L. Moore [as by Lewis Padgett] ∗∗∗∗∗
Doomsday Deferred • short story by Murray Leinster [as by Will F. Jenkins]
The Hurkle Is a Happy Beast • short story by Theodore Sturgeon
Eternity Lost • novelette by Clifford D. Simak
Easter Eggs • novelette by Robert S. Carr –
Opening Doors • novelette by Wilmar H. Shiras
Five Years in the Marmalade • short story by Robert W. Krepps +
Dwellers in Silence short story by Ray Bradbury +
Mouse • short story by Fredric Brown
Refuge for Tonight • novelette by Robert Moore Williams +
The Life-Work of Professor Muntz • short story by Murray Leinster
Flaw • short story by John D. MacDonald
The Man • short story by Ray Bradbury

Non-fiction:
Cover
A Sort of Introduction • essay by Vincent Starrett
Preface • essay by Everett F. Bleiler and T. E. Dikty
About the Authors

_____________________

The Best Science-Fiction Stories: 1950 is the second of the ‘Best of the Year’ series that came from Everett F. Bleiler & T. E. Dikty (they began the previous year with the first such volume in the field) and it contains stories first published in 1949. Four of the stories here also appear in The Best SF Stories #11: 1949 by Isaac Asimov & Martin H. Greenberg, which I have previously reviewed (the contributions from MacDonald, Kuttner & Moore, Simak and Sturgeon). I’ve copied and pasted my comments on those stories at the end of the column (if you have skimmed this part, a feeling of déjà vu awaits). I’ll try to be brief here and, if I’ve reviewed the stories at length elsewhere, I’ll add the links below.2

Doomsday Deferred by Murray Leinster is the first of two stories in the volume from The Saturday Evening Post—both from the September 24th issue—and it is a tale of an explorer/butterfly collector deep in the Amazon who is approached by an anxious native with five pounds of gold nuggets. José wants the collector to buy cattle for him in exchange for the gold, but the butterfly collector declines. When Jose then offers to find a specific butterfly for the collector, they strike a deal.
As the story develops the collector takes more of an interest in José, a strange, frightened man, and visits him at his jungle hut. There he sees that José has a wife and son—and that the woman is as scared as her husband. Later, on a second visit, the collector sees a soldier ant emerge from José’s clothing—a swarming insect whose voraciousness is deadly—and grabs the boy to make an escape in the canoe that brought him to the hut. José stops him, stating that the ants are pets. The collector does not believe him, but watches as the ant does a headstand on the palm of José’s hand. At the same time the collector senses a vast mind watching him, so he makes an appropriately admiring response. The rest of the story (spoiler) details how the collector addresses the threat that these uplifted ants pose to all life on the planet.
The story is fairly straightforward, but the setting and the group-consciousness parts of the story are well done and, if you liked Edmond Hamilton’s Alien Earth story in the Asimov/Greenberg volume, you’ll get something out of this one.
Easter Eggs by Robert S. Carr begins at the White House on Easter Sunday, where the narrator and his correspondent friend are admiring secretary Betty’s stenography skills. After a couple of hundred words of them cooing over the “good little girl”, and how marvellous she is, an egg-shaped alien spaceship lands outside on the the White House lawn (they later find that one has landed at the Kremlin too—de rigueur for the stories of the time if I recall correctly).
The ship that lands at the White House gets the usual welcome, i.e., it is shot at by fighter jets, anti-aircraft guns, etc. However, the ship is protected by an invisible force field so, after a certain amount of this, the President, who has meantime decided to take control rather than hide in his bunker, orders a halt. As the men try to figure out how to proceed, Betty communicates telepathically with the visitor, and finds the Martian wants air, water, soil and solar energy.
Meanwhile, the other egg is communicating with the Kremlin, and a bidding war breaks out between the two governments for Martian technology (there is a mini-speech from the President about freedom during this section). This plot line is eventually abandoned, and the Martian hands over the technology before leaving to fight the other ship over the Pacific.
This has crude, cardboard characters, is nonsensical, and is just generally awful. The impression given is of an SF story written by a mainstream writer who was either just (a) not very good or (b) just didn’t care about what he was doing. What on Earth were the editors of this anthology thinking when they selected this stinker?
Opening Doors by Wilmar H. Shiras is a direct sequel to her first ‘Children of the Atom’ story In Hiding, which appeared in the previous anthology in this series. That story had a psychiatrist called Welles take on a child patient called Timothy, who he later discovers is (spoiler) a closeted super-intelligent mutant child with an IQ is off-the scale, and who is making extraordinary efforts to conceal his gifts so as to more easily fit into society. After gaining the child’s trust Dr Welles discovers his parents were at the site of an atomic accident and that his abilities are the result of a mutation. The story closes with Welles and Timothy setting out to discover if there are others like him.
This installment begins with the pair going to the post office to see if there are any replies to a cryptic advertisement placed in a national newspaper. After they return to Welles’ home, they start opening the letters, and find a number of tantalising prospects in among the dross (which includes one from someone who “thinks it must be some sex stuff, because it’s cryptic”!) This section is quite exciting as it hints at what may be the tip of a much larger iceberg.
A couple of days later, while Timothy composes replies to the likely candidates, Welles gets a reply from his detective agency about their other line of inquiry. He learns of nineteen other orphans from the atomic accident, including one called Elsie who is in an asylum. Most of the central section of the story then details Welles urgent trip to the institution to see the girl.
When Welles arrives he meets the Dr Foxwell, presents his credentials, and they discuss Elsie. It turns out that, unlike Timothy, she is a volatile and maladjusted child (Timothy is more super-anorak or super-goody two shoes than superman). Her backstory makes for a compelling read. Welles later meets Elsie, and eventually tells her about Timothy. After Welles takes Fox into his confidence, Elsie is transferred into his care, but only after they subject her to a batch of tests and interviews (to ensure she is sane, among other things). He arranges for her to stay with Miss Page, his former teacher and Timothy’s current one. Elsie eventually meets Tim.
Up to this point the story is very good, but at this point it becomes similar to the first one in that it reverts to a series of endless talking heads: Timothy’s grandmother asks to speak to the two doctors, and offers to give them the land and money to build a school for gifted children. When the two doctors talk to the kids about this proposal, Timothy gives a lengthy description of what the school should contain (it is as if he is giving a room by room description of a set of blueprints).
All that said, this is a pretty good piece, borderline three and a half/four stars but, as I liked it a little more than the previous story, I plumped for the latter.
Five Years in the Marmalade by Robert W. Krepps gets off to an unpromising start with two radium salesmen fresh off the ship from Alpha Centauri. They grab a drink on “Old Terra Spaceport IV” and moan about the trip they have just been on (smelly natives, no home comforts, no sales, etc.) They then notice a Martian dock at the station in one of their unusual “single-trav” spaceships, and go down to talk to him. So far, so bad. Just as it seems we are going to be in for more of the same, it changes into a dull lecture about the thought-controlled ship, and how it adjusts the size of the traveller to that required, and how it can—as it’s thought controlled—travel to imaginary places.
The story then changes from a pulp space tale into something far more intriguing as the Martian tells them about the many imaginary worlds he has visited: Sir Thomas More’s Utopia, Heaven, Erewhon, etc.—apparently belief has brought these worlds into existence and his spaceship can travel there.
After all this (spoiler) one of the men suggests that the Martian visits Marmalade. Intrigued by the description of the world, the Martian sets off. The man then reveals to his partner that Marmalade is a made-up world, and he duped the Martian as it was obvious that the latter was telling them a tall tale. The other man doubts this was a good idea . . . .
The story ends with the Martian in a strange world where there is no light and a strange undulating surface. He discovers he is in the brain of the man who told him about Marmalade’s existence and, when the Martian realises this, he takes his revenge . . . .
This is an atypical story for the time—it rather reminded me of couple of Robert Sheckley’s more metaphysical stories from the 60’s and 70’s—and is certainly not (as I understand it) the kind of thing you’d expect to find in a pulp like Fantastic Adventures. I’m not entirely sure that this works, but it is an interesting piece once it gets going.
Dwellers in Silence by Ray Bradbury is one of his ‘Martian Chronicles’ (it is included in the book under the title The Long Years) and opens with a doctor who is alone on the planet with (it seems) his wife, son, and two daughters. They are the last ones there as all the rockets left when there was a nuclear war on Earth.
When the doctor looks through his telescope at Earth one night he sees a light coming towards the planet. Realising it is a spaceship he sets fire to the deserted American town as a signal. The rocket lands, and the doctor takes the occupants to his house, although they have to treat him along the way for his heart problems. As the crew eat with the family, the captain suspects that the mother and children may not be who they seem to be (there are earlier hints about this in the story). The captain sends a crewman to the graveyard, and when he returns with news of who is buried there, the captain realises (spoiler) that the family are androids that the doctor created after his family died of the plague.
Later on the doctor has a heart attack and dies. After speaking to the “wife”, they bury him in the graveyard alongside his family.
When the men prepare to return to Earth there is a conversation about what to do with the “family,” during which the captain states he will do nothing. He adds that if the men feel differently they can, and gives one of them a gun. He and another crewman go to see the family, but decide to leave the family unmolested.
The story ends with the mother and children acting out a facsimile of human life (this idea of dead things imitating those which are alive appears earlier in the story, when the wife relates to the captain that her husband once wired up the city with loudspeakers to give the impression that it was inhabited).
This is an interesting mood piece that, as well as having this aspect, also foreshadows, to a lesser extent, work by Philip K. Dick (the doctor’s delusions, the androids acting as humans, etc.). An interesting story, and one I’d probably choose for an annual anthology myself.
Mouse by Fredric Brown begins, like the Carr story, with an alien spaceship arriving on Earth. The ship is quite small, and a research biologist called Bill Wheeler watches it land in Central Park from his apartment above. Crowds gather, the authorities arrive, the area is cordoned off. Wheeler watches while he pets his Siamese cat. Eventually, a military messenger arrives at his door, and the biologist is summoned to the site. When he arrives he notes that the dead occupant looks externally similar to a mouse, although there are significant differences when the creature later dissected.
Days later there are a series of major disturbances, e.g. the president and numerous other political leaders are assassinated, an atom bomb store blows up, etc.
The last part of the story has the biologist speculate that the mouse may be a decoy, and the real occupant (spoiler) is a discorporate being—and it has caused all the trouble. As the biologist explains this to the cat, the man also speculates that the alien may have used the nearest animal as a host . . . .
An unconvincing piece, primarily because the writer dumps the above notion into the story at the end without having done any preparation.
Refuge for Tonight by Robert Moore Williams opens with Sam Jones listening to a radio broadcast while driving. The organisation transmitting the program is the European Federation, which has occupied the USA under the pretence of providing relief for an influenza outbreak which has killed millions of Americans. When Jones the sees a crossroads service station he stops to get water for his overheating engine.
Jones sees a hungry looking young woman as he approaches, and tries to win her trust—but she is bait, and three men attack him. They fight and, as the woman is about to shoot Jones, one of three recognises him. The man is Cross, a former military pilot. When both sides talk, they realise they have the common aim of finding an atom bomb site where they can “press the button”, and attack the Federation. Moreover, the woman, Jean Crane, has a map with the location of one of these sites.
Before they can all set off in Jones’ car they are attacked by a Federation helicopter. They hide before it lands, and subsequently kill the helicopter pilot and the troops. Crane then flies them to the location on the map, which turns out to be a mine in the side of a cliff.
A lot happens from this point on: the location is manned, and they find out they have been followed by other Federation helicopters; inside the cave, Jones meets a former colleague called Corless—who seems to have partially lost his mind—from a failed space ship drive project that he was previously employed on. Later, they find there are seventy other people there, including children, and it is not an atomic bomb site but a biowar facility.
Matters become even more convoluted when the Federation attack the mine, and Corless gets past his mental block to remember that the drive failure was a ruse. The installation is actually a front for spaceship project hidden away from the prying eyes of the Federation! In the final scene, the survivors escape to the stars.
Synoptically, this appears to be a story that has too much crammed into too short a space: this is a legitimate criticism—there is quite a lot going on—as is any negative comment about the number of surprise meetings and layers of deception that the piece contains. For all that though, it an engrossing piece, not only for its grim picture of a fallen USA, but also for its realistic mainstream style (I’d suggest that this story would be a good fit for the early-mid 1950’s F&SF). Despite its shortcomings, it is a good choice for this volume, and would be in mine.
The Life-Work of Professor Muntz by Murray Leinster is his second appearance in this volume, and you would struggle to identify that it is by the same author who produced Doomsday Deferred. This story has as its protagonist Mr Grebb, a rough type who drives for the local brewing company. He has a boss called Joe Hallix, who is never off his back.
One morning at breakfast, Grebb’s landlady asks him to look at an electrical device left in the cellar by a deceased lodger, Professor Muntz. Grebb goes down and fiddles about with the machine: multiple/parallel world adventures result. In this other world Grebb gets in trouble for missing deliveries and, as this continues through the week, it looks like he will lose his job. However, because he gets a paper at his lodgings from each of the two worlds (there is some gimmickry that means his work is in one world and his rented room in another), he finds out (spoiler) that Joe Hallix is stealing the missing stock and reselling it.
I’m not sure this makes any sense to be honest—I rather lost track of which world was which—and I couldn’t be bothered rereading the wads of multiple worlds guff at the beginning of the story again to find out. It’s also written in a rather dated pulp style.
The Man by Ray Bradbury begins with a spaceship arriving on a planet (another one) where the human natives ignore it. The captain of the ship becomes impatient and sends Martin, his lieutenant, into town, only to have him return with the news that their landing has been eclipsed by the arrival of a strange man who, among other things, cures the sick. The captain goes into town himself and interrogates the occupants, who describe a Jesus-like figure.
Later, as the spaceship makes ready to leave, Martin decides to stay on the planet, but the captain pressures him to change his mind, stating that it is a ruse started by competing ships. Of course the two ships mentioned promptly arrive on the planet with the crew wounded or dead from a cosmic storm. The captain then realises that his ship was the first one to arrive, and that the stories about the man are true. He goes into town to find him but, when it appears that he has left the planet, the captain determines to leave and search for him. Martin stays behind (spoiler), and the mayor of the city takes him to see the man.
This is an effective mood piece, although I’m not entirely sure what the point of the story is.

Here are the reviews of the three stories I’ve already discussed in Isaac Asimov & Martin H. Greenberg’s The Great Science Fiction Stories #11: 1949:
Flaw by John D. MacDonald concerns a woman and her astronaut boyfriend, who is shortly to leave on a space flight to Mars. Before he goes they agree to marry on his return, and exchange rings. Then he leaves in the Destiny.
A month or so before the ship is due back, a massive meteor lands at the base. The woman goes to the excavation, and sees them eventually recover a ruby the size of a house. She notes (spoiler) that it is similar to the one on the ring that she gave her boyfriend, and later deduces that her boyfriend’s spaceship arrived early because the solar system is shrinking (and the Earth is too).
This is a gimmicky and unbelievable ending to a dull story. Further, there is no explanation as to why the Destiny didn’t shrink as well (other than, “For a little time the Destiny II avoided that influence.”) Pah.
Private Eye by Henry Kuttner and C. L. Moore starts with a forensic psychologist and a “trace” engineer using a time viewer device (it can see up to fifty years in the past by recovering the sound and light impressions from the immediate environment) to watch Sam Clay stab to death a man called Vanderman. The two operatives have been tasked with investigating Clay to see if the killing was premeditated murder (premeditated offences are essentially the only kind which are still punished in this strange, dark future), so most of the first part of the story is in the form of a murder mystery which shows how Clay manages to conceal his premeditation from the investigating pair’s all-seeing temporal eye over an eighteen month period, the beginning of which was when Vanderman stole Clay’s girlfriend, and Clay decided to kill Vanderman.
Mixed through this storyline are details of Clay’s dark psychological makeup, which includes accounts of a childhood where he was locked in a cupboard by his parents. In this cupboard a religious picture of another all-seeing eye looks over him, with “THOU GOD SEEST ME” printed underneath the image.
The murder mystery part is wrapped up around the three-quarter way stage when Clay (spoiler) is found innocent of premeditation. The rest of the story is then a psychological piece which examines who Clay is and why he has acted as he has. The last few lines provide (spoiler) a shockingly violent resolution where Clay transcends the psychological trauma of his childhood (although not in a good way), and the Eye appears as a final image.
This is a remarkable and complex story, and one that recalls, in parts (the future world, the psychologically damaged anti-hero), Alfred Bester’s The Demolished Man or The Stars My Destination.
Eternity Lost by Clifford D. Simak is set in a world hundreds of years in the future where only a few privileged people get life extension treatment, and the story opens with two political operatives telling a Senator Homer Leonard that his next application has been rejected. The rest of the story details his attempts to find fair means or foul to get his next treatment. During his attempts, he notes that various people have gone missing and that their bodies were not recovered, leading him to wonder if the extrasolar research people have finally found the living space required for the treatment to given to all humanity. Meanwhile, he feels the effects of his age.
At the end of the story (spoiler) the senator fails in his efforts to get an extension so he publically denounces the fact that the treatment is only given to politicians and other worthies. He later finds a letter that he hasn’t opened (due to his being old and forgetful and sleepy) which contains news that provides an ironic end to the story.
This has a good start, but the societal setup does not convince (I can’t see the masses letting a politician live 500 year lifespans while they die) and there is some sophomoric philosophising about aging and death: “we may not be able to assess in their true value the things that should be dearest to us; for a thing that has no ending, a thing that goes on forever, must have decreasing value.” Simak was 45 when this was published—I wonder if he felt the same way in his eighties.
Like the Asimov, it is a better quality work than the stories of his from the late1930’s/early-1940s efforts that I’ve recently read.
The Hurkle Is a Happy Beast by Theodore Sturgeon has an unpleasant and lethal alien inadvertently transported to Earth by a matter transmitter. There are no particular plot complications, and the story is told almost like a children’s tale which is (a) irritating and (b) dissonant.
The cutesy tone did not appeal to me, and I am at a loss to fathom this story’s popularity.

The non-fiction in the book comprises a couple of introductory essays. The first is A Sort of Introduction by Vincent Starrett (a mystery writer and bibliophile, etc.—no, me neither3), who contributes a rambling and slightly eccentric piece. This begins with a description of his childhood reading exotic adventure stories, before goes on to have a moan about current detective fiction:

But something has been happening to the detective story of late, in America at least. Perhaps Dashiell Hammett is responsible for the change, or possibly it has been a natural development of our time—the inevitable result of teaching the wrong people to read and write. Hammett, a master, should have remained unique. His successors and imitators in the federal union (with a few honorable exceptions) have been, in my opinion, almost miraculously bad. The classic detective story is still written and sometimes written well, particularly in England; but for the most part the romance of crime and its detection has degenerated as a work of art until it is a misnomer to call it a detective story.
So, at any rate, it seems to me; and in consequence of my waning admiration for the detective story I have been coquetting with an earlier love. I have been reading science-fantasy again, experimentally, and finding it, on its higher levels, as satisfying as any fiction now being written. On its lower levels it is just the same old tripe; but in recent years a new group of little masters has appeared in the field whose work in the short story has been notable to say the least.  p. 10-11

When he gets down off his intellectual high horse (the “wrong type of people” indeed), he discusses SF for a while, muses about hybrids of the two (this comes up in the Bleiler and Dikty piece as well—they seem to think that the two fields are converging) before he moans about detective stories again.
During all this, Starrett comes up with an admirably pragmatic definition of SF:

Science-fiction, I believe, by strict definition, is fiction based on accepted scientific principles—after which gesture to science the accepted principles and the pop-eyed reader are taken for a ride. I suspect that much of science-fiction’s science is as imaginary as the beautiful heroine of the magazine stories; but that is all right with me. A good story is a good story and, as far as I am concerned, it’s all in fun.  p. 12

He finishes on a valedictory note:

These have been the musings of a large North American mammal (male) permanently ambushed behind reading glasses. He has never been in an airplane, let alone a rocket, and he has no desire to visit Mars or the moon or any other unearthly goal postulated by science or science-fiction, except in a book. He is strictly an armchair adventurer. He likes to read stories in which things happen, and then keep on happening. He thinks that reading a good story is more fun than anything—almost. He believes the stories that follow will repay your attention.  p. 15

Whereas the Starrett piece is occasionally entertaining, the Preface by Everett F. Bleiler and T. E. Dikty is rather stuffy, and begins by discussing gothic and detective novels (referencing titles from the eighteenth and nineteenth centuries). It then mentions the decline of the detective story (again with the decline of the detective story), and how those readers and writers are migrating to the SF field. There is nothing, or virtually nothing, in this piece about the modern SF field.
In the second section they introduce the stories, usually by reference to other work, virtually none of which I’ve heard:

Most robots in modern science—fiction have been of two sorts, cheap and efficient labor that may be exploited, or substitutes for humans in emotional life. We all remember Karel Capek’s RUR, which introduced the word “robot,” and made such a stir when it was produced. But the concept of robot workers is really much older in science-fiction, appearing full-blown in Cyrus Cole’s Auroraphone, back in the 1880’s, when robot workers on Saturn were revolting for better working conditions and even before this in Bulwer-Lytton’s Coming Race. But earlier than the working robot is the robot who substitutes for a human being—as old as the Katha Sarit Sagara of India—in modern times appearing back in 1815 in E. T. A. Hoffmann’s clockwork Automatons and The Dancing Doll, and Villiers de L’Isle Adam’s Nouvelle Eve who is more skilled in the amatory arts than is fleshly woman.

The above is the introduction for Ray Bradbury’s Dwellers in Silence. I can’t help but think that a comparison of Bradbury’s robots with those of Isaac Asimov’s would be more profitable—and relevant—to the likely audience than all the literary name-dropping going on above. Don’t get me wrong, I’m all for extra-genre references when there is a genuine connection, but this kind of introduction too often uses general thematic connections as an excuse to drag in a lot of irrelevant baggage (e.g. is whatever appears in the Indian work above something we would identify as a robot, or is it just a metaphor for enslaved humans?)
There is also an About the Authors section, which I haven’t seen.4
Stylish Cover.5

In conclusion, I didn’t think this is as strong an entry as the Asimov and Greenberg volume (here there are fewer very good stories, and more mediocre or bad ones). I probably wouldn’t be alone in that conclusion, as nine out of the thirteen stories have not been reprinted in any other retrospective collection (see the table below).6  ●

_____________________

1. There are a number of reviews of this book: Anthony Boucher & J. Francis McComas, (F&SF, February 1951) say, “These editors continue . . . with a tasteful and representative survey of the field distinguished by a “sort of an introduction” by Vincent Starrett, which is, of course, among the best writing of any year!”

Groff Conklin (Galaxy Science Fiction, December 1950) says that the anthology “is generally a distinguished job”, and all but four of the stories “rate B-plus on my personal scale of merit”—I wonder which four he thought were the lemons.

P. Schuyler Miller (Astounding Science Fiction, March 1951) notes that these anthologies are the best of the Fell’s SF list, and that the current volume contains thirteen stories from eight magazines—wider coverage than the 1949 anthology. He goes on to add:

Few Astounding Science Fiction readers will quarrel with the choices from this magazine: Wilmar Shiras’ “Opening Doors”—“In Hiding” was the pinnacle of the first selection— Henry Kuttner’s “Private Eye,” and Clifford Simak’s “Eternity Lost.” Few will object too bitterly to the awarding of two places to the reliable Murray Leinster and the remarkable Ray Bradbury, and few will want to miss Ted Sturgeon’s impish “The Hurkle Is a Happy Beast.” Of course everyone will have other candidates which he prefers to the editors’ choices: science fiction would he in an unhealthy condition if selection was obvious. But Bleiler and Dikty are well on their way to doing for this field what the O’Brien and O’Henry anthologies have done for short fiction in general.  p. 146

Frederik Pohl (Super Science Stories, January 1951) has a bit of a moan about the title, and the American attitude towards success, before stating:

Nonetheless, and with due recognition to the fact that this book does not contain a single bad story, it is by no means the “best” of anything. Thirteen stories make up the contents, representing eleven authors; Ray Bradbury is represented twice, and so is Will Jenkins-Murray Leinster. Wilmar H. Shiras made last year’s edition with In Hiding, which was an authentic masterpiece; she makes this year’s with Opening Doors, which is not. Theodore Sturgeon, who has contributed to the science-fiction field such powerful and distinguished stories as Killdozer, Thunder and Roses and It, turns up here with The Hurkle Is a Happy Beast—a story which is pleasant and entertaining and handsomely written, but for which the most appropriate adjective of all is “cute”.
It is hard to quarrel with the selection of Henry Kuttner’s tricky and beautifully handled Private Eye, or Clifford Simak’s somber Eternity Lost. But the remainder of the stories—by Robert Spencer Carr, Robert W. Krepps, Robert Moore Williams and John D. MacDonald—are as good as you would expect to find in an average issue of your favorite science-fiction magazine. And—in spite of the fact that they are labeled the “best” of a record-breaking year in the teeming field of science fiction—very little better.  p. 47

An anonymous reviewer in Authentic Science Fiction, #20, April 1952, says that “the stories are all good, most are well above the average, and a few have a delightful vein of humour—even the one that ends: [spoiler] ‘… as he smashed her skull with the decanter’”! The anonymous reviewer has an odd sense of humour if he finds much “delightful” in the Kuttner story.

The anonymous writer(s) in The Journal of Science Fiction, Fall 1951, open(s) their review with this comment:

Trying to find quality in the science-fiction field is a little like digging for gold in a played out mine; it’s there but the time, trouble, and effort in mining it often doesn’t pay. With the exception of an occasional novel, quality is best represented by some of the better-edited anthologies, notably those of August Derleth, Groff Conklin and the yearly selections by Everett Bleiler and T. E. Dikty.
The Best Science-Fiction Stories: 1950 has Just as fine a selection of stories as the 1949 edition, an extraordinarily well received anthology with which Frederick Fell, Inc. launched their—somewhat mediocre—science-fiction library last year. Granting that the editors operate under something of a handicap they must restrict their selections to stories published the preceding year—they still have done a remarkable job.  p. 7

They go on to say that Jenkins’ Doomsday Deferred, “is tops of its type”; and say that Sturgeon’s Hurkle “is the first of the alien-animal stories in Anthony Boucher’s magazine, and we wish it had been the last since subsequent imitations have been nauseatingly cute”. They state that Simak’s Eternity Lost is “our own favorite and one of the best stories that Simak has ever done”; and that Five Years in the Marmalade by Robert Krepps is “an odd story with an odd title that really hit us where we live, a tale that we very likely would have missed in magazine form”. The remaining comments about the stories are mostly synoptic except for the efforts by Robert Spencer Carr, Murray Leinster, Fredric Brown, and John D. MacDonald, which are merely described as “the remaining stories”. I think that probably tells us what they thought of them.
They conclude with general comments:

Some reviewers have carped about the double inclusion of Jenkins and Bradbury. A case might logically be made for Will Jenkins but certainly it would be difficult to lodge a complaint against two stories by Bradbury, who ranks as one of the foremost short story writers in America today. When Bradbury is good—and the two stories by him are very good—he is superb, and it is difficult to think of any story published during 1949 that we would substitute for either one of his. (In all frankness, we might also add that when Bradbury is bad, he is enough to drive this reviewer into dropping a magazine completely. “Rocket Summer”, published in Planet Stories some time ago, was enough to make us give up browsing through that magazine for well over a year).
One danger that the editors run is the unavoidable use of the word “Best” in the title. It’s a challenge to every science-fiction reader and reviewer to land on the editors’ necks when their own favorite story isn’t included. However, the stories in this volume rate very highly in entertainment and literary value and we think the editors have done very well indeed in picking some of the best of the year. The stories mentioned stand head, shoulders, torso, and ankles above the average that saw print in the magazines.  p. 7

Another anonymous reviewer, this time in Startling Stories, January 1951, states that the volume “contains a good deal of interesting and entertaining material”. They add that “the inclusion of Bradbury twice and Jenkins likewise (once as Leinster) actually cuts down the authors picked to eleven, which we feel adds to what must of necessity already be a somewhat arbitrary choice. For fine work was done last year by at least twice that many unpicked authors.” They add that “the volume is a worthwhile stf item, especially since it does in a way present an annual picture of what goes on in the field—at least in part.” Their favourite story was the Jenkins, “the most impressive bit of story telling in the volume although the others were uniformly good.”

2. My longer reviews of stories are here:

Private Eye by Henry Kuttner and C. L. Moore
Private – Keep Out! by Philip MacDonald
The Hurkle Is a Happy Beast by Theodore Sturgeon

3. Vincent Starrett’s Wikipeida page is here; there is more here.

4. I don’t have a copy or scan of the book so, as I didn’t particularly want to shell out thirty or forty quid to a book dealer to get a poor quality copy, I found most of the stories (all bar the Williams) in online magazine scans. Jim Harris was kind enough to provide a copy of the missing story, and the introductions. Hopefully I’ll be able to return the favour when we get to the later volumes.

5. Check out the mint replica covers for the Bleiler & Dikty volumes at Facsimile Dust Jackets LLC.

6. If you want a better idea of how this book measures up against what I might pick for a 1949 ‘Year’s Best’, or learn what other anthologists chose, look at the table below (this is the same one which is at the end of the review of Isaac Asimov and Martin H. Greenberg’s Great SF Stories #11: 1949).

The first to fourth column give the story titles, authors, lengths and place of publication (see below the table for abbreviation legend).
The ‘G’ column lists Asimov and Greenberg’s choices with an ‘x’.
The ‘B’ column lists Bleiler and Dikty’s choices with an ‘x’.
The ‘H’ column shows the story’s 1949 Retro Hugo award placing (not yet awarded).
The ‘C’ column shows how many of the anthologies and/or polls used in the Classics of Science Fiction list included the story in their collections (note that this list is SF only and skews against fantasy), minus the anthology or award citations which have their own column (Greenberg/Asimov and Beliler/Dikty in this case).
The ‘O’ column shows the number of inclusions in other major anthologies or recommendation lists I’ve seen which are not on the CoSF (Classics of SF) list. These are selected by me (usually to include Fantasy Retrospectives that CoSF don’t include) but I may not yet have done this for some/all of the stories.
The ‘S’ shows my choices for a ‘Best of the Year’ with an ‘x’. A dash means read but passed over (I only select stories better than + and above). Blank means unread.
The ‘T’ column shows the total points that each story gets (they get a point for being in each column and for each of the CoSF and other anthology inclusions).

The titles, names, lengths, publications, and overall score columns are sortable.

A good way to sample 1949’s best short fiction may be to start at the top of the table and work down until you get to the last of the 2-point stories. Bear in mind this is all wildly unscientific, but it will give you something to aim at. Enjoy.

na=novella, nv=novelet, ss=short story

ALM, American Legion Magazine; ARK, The Arkham Sampler; ARU, Argosy (UK); AST, Astounding; BLU, Blue Book; FAN, Fantastic Adventures; FSF, Fantasy and Science Fiction; GHE, The Girl With the Hungry Eyes (anth.); PLA, Planet Stories, RET Retort; SEP, Saturday Evening Post; STA, Startling Stories; SUP, Super Science Stories; TAS, the Arkham Sampler; TWS, Thrilling Wonder Stories; UCL, University of Chicago Law Review.

(1) The Naming of Names was reprinted as Dark They Were, and Golden-Eyed. There is a different story titled The Naming of Names in The Martian Chronicles.
(2) The Long Years was reprinted as Dwellers in Silence. This is a 1948 story, not 1949, hence no overall rating.
(3) Action on Azura was reprinted as Contact, Incorporated. ●

rssrss

Tor.com Short Fiction, March-April 2019

Magazine link

Other reviews:
Greg Hullender and Eric Wong, Rocket Stack Rank
Jason McGregor, Featured Futures
Various, Tangent Online

_____________________

Editors, Ellen Datlow (x4), George R. R. Martin, Cory Skerry.

Fiction:
Knowledgeable Creatures • by Christopher Rowe +
One/Zero • by Kathleen Ann Goonan
Blue Morphos in the Garden • by Lis Mitchell
Painless • by Rich Larson
Mama Bruise • by Jonathan Carroll +

March/April stories not included in the collection:
How to Move Spheres and Influence People • by Marko Kloos

Non-fiction:
Interior artwork • by Armando Veve, Keith Negley, Mary Haasdyk, Eli Minaya, John Picacio
About the Authors

_____________________

This is the second outing for Tor’s new short fiction magazine,1 which purports to collect the fiction published on their website for the dates shown. However, the last issue omitted two stories, and this issue misses one. Jason McGregor (from Featured Futures) pointed out to me that there is a vacancy advertised for the person in charge of the magazine’s production; perhaps the situation will improve once it is filled.2

Armando Veve

All of the stories in this issue (bar one from Cory Skerry) are edited by Ellen Datlow, and the first of these is one of two animal fantasies. Knowledgeable Creatures by Christopher Rowe begins with a dog detective called Connolly Marsh, who is approached by a woman seeking help with a man she has killed in self-defence. Marsh first of all goes to consult a former colleague in the police (this seems to refer to a previous story) to ask whether they know about the killing (they don’t), and then he does a background check on the woman. Marsh finds out she is Thomasina Swallow, a professor of history at the Rookery, and that her godfather is the influential and powerful Vicar Coleridge, a mouse.
During the course of the story, Marsh reflects on how this world came to be:

It’s hard not be be fascinated with the creatures who made you.
Maybe made is too strong a word. Enabled your making might be a more accurate phrase. What cannot be denied is that it’s the alchemical processes developed by Isaac Newton and his partner Xerxes, the first publicly acknowledged learned mouse, which led to the so-called Flowering, the world-wide, centuries-long explosion of new knowledgeable creatures, from Nox, the first curious cat awoken by Newton and Xerxes, on down to every philosophical pig and argute [shrewd] crow today. On down to every investigative dog—including, of course, me.
Have learned mice been around forever? Did they awaken humans at some time in the distant past? Are they the secret governors of us all, operating independently of the Imperium, probably controlling it?
These really aren’t the kinds of questions you ask if you want to be taken seriously. They certainly aren’t the kinds of questions you ask if you want to stay a police officer.  p. 13-14

These latter speculations come to the fore when Marsh learns that Swallow has been working on a revolutionary theory about the origins of man, and he later finds that the body has vanished . . . .
Readers’ reaction to this story will probably depend on their tolerance for talking animals, and how intrigued they are by the mice uplifting humans gimmick. I rather liked it.

Keith Negley

One/Zero by Kathleen Ann Goonan has two separate story arcs that intersect towards the end of the story. The first of these concerns a girl called Vida, who we first meet when her family house in Kurdistan is attacked by soldiers:

My brother struggles as I crush him to my side. Aunt Ezo, at the front door, her AK-47 at the ready, yells “Runrunrunrun GO!”
I rush through the back door into air and fall, still holding Azul: The step is gone. Thunderous thuds echo behind me and end with machine gun chatter, which spurs me to my feet. Azul fights like a wild animal. “Let go! My party!”
Drones dart through smoke-filled air. Dodging sparking wires, I gain the pergola and set Azul on his feet. Winter-dry grape leaves ignite. Licked by their flame, twenty helium birthday balloons pop as I drag him behind the stone fireplace.
Two soldiers leap from the back door and sprint toward us. Ezo, silhouetted in the doorway, raises her gun.
The men drop. Then Ezo spins and collapses into the courtyard, clearly dead.
Azul yanks my arm, but I can’t move. In the last five minutes, I was informed that our parents had just died in a souk bombing. At that moment, our house was attacked. Now Ezo, a revolutionary soldier for twenty years, is gone. She came today to plead with my parents to leave. “The battle is coming this way,” she said. But they had heard this before. Their response, as always, was “This is our home,” and it was—the nucleus of our extended family since 1930, nearly a century.
Then they went out for last-minute party supplies.  p. 28

Vida and her brother Azul narrowly manage to escape on an autonomous bus, which takes them four thousand kilometres3 to a refugee camp. When they arrive, Vida is given a slate by one of the workers (this happens amid some SI—superintelligence—and math talk). The slate starts talking to Vida, and asks her to give it a name. She calls the slate Ezo—which we later find out is an extension of a rogue SI—and it starts organising supplies for the camp. Vida slowly takes charge.
The other thread concerns an elderly woman in Washington D. C. called Mai, whose daughter works in the field of tech start-ups (there is SI discussion in this thread too). Mai is suffering from the effects of old age, and her nurse suggests an AI-connected nanotech capsule to improve her health. After some more slice-of-life (a back injury, the institutional routines imposed on her by the nanomedbot, etc.) she eventually gets a unexpected call from Vida’s brother Azul, where he talks about his birthday party. Mai does not know Azul, and cannot phone him back, but she remembers seeing the refugee tents in the background. The two stories dovetail when Mai later tracks the boy down (with the SI’s help) and goes to the children’s refugee camp.
For the most part this is an engrossing read, as both threads give a convincing sense of the near future. However, around the three-quarter mark, it starts becoming rather preachy and slowly turns into a manifesto, e.g., the children in the camp start discussing the UN Declaration of the Rights of the Child, for instance, and there are passages like this:

I wait for my flight in Dulles Airport—one of those futures, an architectural paean to flight and to the exhilaration of the future, built when the United States was strong and had the power to rebuild a ravaged continent wrung dry of hope, and to create new democracies.
It is named after John Foster Dulles, who pioneered NATO as well as our hidden, duplicitous brand of power-wielding around the world. He and his brother Allen, head of the CIA, and their like-minded colleagues, built and toppled governments, sold ever-more-powerful arms, trained and created our future enemies, and sowed life and death as they deemed fit.
The reckoning has come.
The world is no longer theirs, or ours.
It belongs to the children.  p. 56

I found this and similar material rather vacuous, and thought the righteous tone of the ending took the shine off of what was, to that point, a strong piece.

Mary Haasdyk

Blue Morphos in the Garden by Lis Mitchell starts with the narrator’s daughter Lily coming into the kitchen to tell her that grandma is turning into butterflies:

The river is a small one, shallow, gentle, hardly deserving of the name—a tributary branch leading to a larger one. A low rocky embankment leads up the slope towards us, and perched on the largest of those rocks is a withered and naked woman … if you can call the husk before us a woman at all.
Faded blue gingham pools around her feet, and her legs rise like scrawny white aspens above the crumpled fabric. Her arms are open wide, as if to embrace the sun, and her white-gray hair unspools into the morning breeze. A cloud of blue butterflies eddies on this same breeze, shifting around her, exposing and then hiding and exposing again her collapsed breasts, her sagging buttocks, her scarred belly. As I watch, I see dark spores blossom on her skin. One here, one there. They swell slowly into gold-green pods—chrysalides, really, which ripen and split. The butterflies crawl backwards into this life, unfurling crumpled, wet wings. The outer edge of the wing resembles split wood with whorled knots, but each butterfly unfolds itself into a slice of fluttering blue sky and dark stormshadow. Open—sky, closed—wood. Each insect delicately buds. Each one just as delicately extends a proboscis to taste the salt on Gray-Granna’s skin, and then casts itself into the butterfly-cloud.  p. 63

After this scene we find out two things: first, that the narrator’s partner Dash (they are unmarried) is from a family that is “enchanted”, the result of which is that his relatives turn into objects when they die; secondly, we find out that the narrator may be suffering from a terminal disease, and that she doesn’t want this to happen to her. To avoid this outcome she won’t marry Dash, as the enchantment would then apply to her. This causes tension between them.
The final scene is at grandma’s funeral, where (spoiler) the narrator completes the arc of the story by confirming her decision.
The first part of this isn’t bad—it is quite inventive—but the rest just feels like the writer doing some gloomy navel-gazing about their own mortality. It’s all a bit depressing.

Eli Minaya

Painless by Rich Larson is set in a future Africa, and has as its protagonist Mars, a bioengineered soldier who has almost supernatural powers of recovery:

When they go through anti-interrogation, the water filling his lungs is only a tickling ghost. They pull him out of the tank before he drowns, but he is not sure if he can drown anymore. The other members of his unit, sopping wet, breathing ragged, look at him as if he is a god. Then they look at each other.
That night they invite him to drink. He guzzles the ogogoro until he can fool himself into thinking he feels the same crazy happy way they feel. He shows them his own version of their knife game: Instead of stabbing the spaces between his fingers, he drives the point of the blade into each knuckle in turn, moving like a blur, and by the time one circuit is complete he has already healed.  p. 86

The story relates an incident-filled journey to track down his “brother”. Their actual relationship is explained in the final scene.
This is a good read for the most part, but Mars is an emotionally deadened character which gives the story a slightly flat affect. The story is also is somewhat open-ended, and stops with a revelation that begs further development. This should have been the first section of a novella and not, as I suspect, the first in a series.

Mark Smith

Mama Bruise by Jonathan Carroll opens with the female narrator being knocked over by her dog: later, we find she has a bruise down one leg in the form of letters that say “Mama Bruise”. The story then goes on to relate another odd incident, when the narrator made her husband cookies for this birthday, which then vanish and are later found in a hat-box (the birthday present Stetson that was originally inside is later found in the bedroom).
The dog turns out to be at the centre of these events and we see, in a later scene, the woman explain to her husband that she thinks (spoiler) the soul of her dead father is reincarnated in the dog. Other information comes to light—payments into the couple’s joint bank account—which suggests that her father is trying to make amends for his previous actions.
The ending of the story takes a darker turn when other animals start reacting violently towards the dog, apparently because it has revealed what it is to the humans. This twist is rather dumped in at the end of the story, which spoils it a little, and it could have been improved by a slightly longer and more organic ending, not to mention a couple of pointers earlier in the story to set up the final scenes (instead of “Mama Bruise” why not something that indicates the dog is at risk?)
Overall this piece contains a neat idea which is intriguingly developed, and is set against some convincingly described marital tension. Possibly one for the best of the year anthologies.

John Picacio

The story missed out of this issue of the magazine is a ‘Wild Cards’ story (maybe the reason why), How to Move Spheres and Influence People by Marko Kloos. This series is set in an alternate world where certain individuals develop superpowers and become “Aces”, and others develop repulsive physical conditions and become “Jokers”.
The story starts with the narrator T. K., “a skinny fifteen-year-old redhead with freckles and left-side hemiparesis” (she only has full use of one arm), being bullied by two of her classmates in a game of dodgeball, where they are taking advantage of her disability by throwing balls at her on the side she can’t block. After a certain amount of this, T. K. becomes increasingly angry, and then another ball is thrown:

That’s when the thing happens.
Later, she’ll puzzle about what triggered it. She’s hot and sweaty, angry at Brooke and Alison, hurting from the shot to the bare skin of her leg, and the muscles on her left side, the one with the paralysis, are taut enough to snap, which is what happens when she overexerts herself. But she knows that she feels a swell of fresh anger, and something goes snap in her brain. There’s a hot, trickling sensation, like someone just opened the top of her skull and poured a cup of coffee directly on the back side of her brain and down her spinal column. T.K. raises her hand to keep the ball from hitting her in the face, even though she knows it’s too late for that. But then the strangest sensation follows the hot trickle. She can feel the ball not three feet in front of her face—its roundness, the way it displaces the air around it—and she gives it a tiny little shunt with her mind, and it’s the best feeling she’s ever had, like finally scratching an itch you couldn’t get to for an hour, only a hundred times better. The ball—the one that was about to give her a nosebleed—hooks ever so slightly to the left and whizzes past her left side, close enough to her ear that she can hear it whistling through the air.

She goes back to the gym and experiments with her new talent later on, and finds that she has the ability to telekinetically move any spherical object. Her next practice takes place at an abandoned factory where, after some small-scale efforts, she converts bb pellets bought from a hardware store into a devastatingly destructive shrapnel grenade.
At the next gym class she gets her own back on the two girls—they both get a good clout with a dodgeball—but T.K. finds this act of petty revenge sobering, and she resolves not to use her power for such trivial matters in future.
The story then takes T. K. and her family to Edinburgh on holiday. Here (spoiler) she sees a terrorist attack by a Joker unfold (similar to recent real world terrorist attacks, he runs amok with a lorry) and she intervenes decisively in a vivid and exciting scene.
The rest of the piece details the fallout that results from the revelation of her superpower to the world: the authorities subsequently question her, both in the UK and on her arrival back in the US, she is expelled from school, and she has to hide out at home to avoid the media, etc.
The final scenes see another Ace called Snowblind approach her on behalf of a UN agency. The meeting is inconclusive, and Snowblind leaves T. K. her card.
The story ends with T. K. telling her friend that she has chosen “Slapshot” as a superhero name.
I found my reaction to this piece very odd: despite the fact that it has a simple storyline (and one that is probably not that original), comes to a climax just after the midpoint of the piece, and has an anticlimactic back third, I really liked it. I also found it, in parts, inexplicably moving. An engrossing read, if not a perfect one, and one I’d definitely use it in a ‘Year’s Best’.

There is no non-fiction in this issue other than an About the Authors page which, as it manages to omit Lis Mitchell, should probably be retitled About Most of the Authors.
The Interior Artwork in this issue is, overall, more to my taste than last time around. My favourite illustrations were by Armando Veve, Mark Smith, and John Picacio (especially the first two). The others are too abstract and/or sketchy for my taste.

This issue’s fiction is of a much better standard than last time around (although not without niggling flaws) and is closer to the quality level I’d expect from such a well-funded operation. That said, four of the acquisitions come from Ellen Datlow, who I suspect is one of the better of the Tor short fiction editors, and one who would probably manage to produce a good magazine regardless of budget.  ●

_____________________

1. You can find Tor.com’s stories in web-format here, and the bi-monthly ‘newsletter’ sign-up here. The issue above is here.

2. The Tor job advert is here.

3. Four thousand kilometres seems rather a long way to a refugee camp—that’s about the same distance from the West to East coasts of America.  ●

rssrss

The Great SF Stories #11, 1949, edited by Isaac Asimov & Martin H. Greenberg

ISFDB link

Other reviews:
Jim Harris, Classics of Science Fiction
George Kelley, George Kelley.org
Various, Goodreads

_____________________

Editors, Isaac Asimov and Martin H. Greenberg

Fiction:
The Red Queen’s Race • novelette by Isaac Asimov ∗∗∗+
Flaw • short story by John D. MacDonald
Private Eye • novelette by Henry Kuttner and C. L. Moore [as by Lewis Padgett]
Manna • novelette by Peter Phillips
The Prisoner in the Skull • novelette by Henry Kuttner and C. L. Moore [as by Lewis Padgett] +
Alien Earth • novelette by Edmond Hamilton
History Lesson • short story by Arthur C. Clarke +
Eternity Lost • novelette by Clifford D. Simak
The Only Thing We Learn • short story by C. M. Kornbluth
Private – Keep Out! • short story by Philip MacDonald
The Hurkle Is a Happy Beast • short story by Theodore Sturgeon
Kaleidoscope • short story by Ray Bradbury ∗∗
Defense Mechanism • short story by Katherine MacLean
Cold War • novelette by Henry Kuttner and C. L. Moore [as by Henry Kuttner]
The Witches of Karres • novelette by James H. Schmitz

Non-fiction:
Introduction • by Martin H. Greenberg
Story introductions • by Martin H. Greenberg and Isaac Asimov

_____________________

This volume came to my attention on the Great SF Stories 1939-1963 newsgroup when one of its members (Jim Harris, whose name you’ll you have seen in previous comments here) posted a link to a review of the previous volume, #10, and also 1948’s other ‘Year’s Best’, The Best Science Fiction 1949, edited by Everett F. Bleiler and T. E. Dikty (the year on these ‘Year’s Best’ titles is nearly always the year after the stories appeared).1
When I looked at the contents list of both books my heart sank: I recognised only a few titles and, after looking at my notes, realised I probably had read only three stories from each of the volumes.2
I knew that there were holes in my reading, but this reminded me that these were much bigger than the cheese that represented the stories I’d read.3 So, In an effort to address these omissions (and get more cheese), I resolved to start reading some of the ‘Year’s Best’ volumes, beginning with the next in this series.
Before I go any further, here is my standard introduction to this series of books (I’ve previously read #4 & #5):
This collection was the eleventh volume of a retrospective ‘Best of the Year’ series started in 1979 by Isaac Asimov and Martin H. Greenberg. The series, published by DAW books, would continue for a total of twenty-four volumes and would cover the period from 1939 to 1963. NESFA Press would add a twenty-fifth volume in 2001, Robert Silverberg Presents the Great SF Stories: 1964.
I’ll try to be relatively brief here but, if I’ve reviewed the stories at length elsewhere, I’ll add the links below.4

The first story in this volume is from co-editor Isaac Asimov, The Red Queen’s Race, and it starts with an incident at a nuclear power plant where, overnight, the fuel has been depleted by means of an unknown process. There is no explosion or release of gamma rays. A Professor Tywood is found in the reactor, dead from apoplexy, and the strange equipment beside him is a fused mass.
The narrative continues from the point of view of an FBI agent who, after interviewing professors and staff at Tywood’s university, finds out his research was into “micro-temporal translation”—sending material back in time. The agent then reads some of Tywood’s old magazine articles, and finds a passage about the fall of the Roman Empire which suggests that, if they had better scientific knowledge, the collapse could have been avoided, and that today’s world would be a better one. The agent also finds evidence that leads him to suspect that Tywood has sent a translated science book back in time to change the past (this would explain the use of all the reactor’s energy). He tells his boss, and the pair calculate that they have two and a half weeks until any changes “ripple” forward through time. In the meantime they track down the translator of the science book, Professor Boulder.
The final interrogation reveals (spoiler) that Professor Boulder was aware of Tywood’s plan to change the present but he is scathing about the chances of success even if such a book was sent back. There is then an extended conversation/lecture about a variety of subjects—the history of scientific progress, how man progresses, etc.—until Boulder (spoiler) reveals that he only included information that he knew the ancients already had, and that this is the world that resulted from those changes.
Despite the fact that Asimov’s story contains virtually no action or characterisation, and the narrative is dominated by talking heads (it reads like a fictionalised version of one of his later science columns) he nevertheless manages to produce an engrossing tale. If you don’t mind lecture-type stories, and have an interest in the history of scientific progression (with a nod towards atomic state security and the guilt of A-bomb scientists), you should enjoy this one.
Flaw by John D. MacDonald concerns a woman and her astronaut boyfriend, who is shortly to leave on a space flight to Mars. Before he goes they agree to marry on his return, and exchange rings. Then he leaves in the Destiny.
A month or so before the ship is due back, a massive meteor lands at the base. The woman goes to the excavation, and sees them recover a ruby the size of a house. She notes (spoiler) that it is similar to the one on the ring that she gave her boyfriend, and later deduces that her boyfriend’s giant spaceship arrived early because the Universe is shrinking.
This is a gimmicky and unbelievable ending to a dull story. Further, there is no explanation as to why the Destiny didn’t shrink as well (other than, “For a little time the Destiny II avoided that influence”). Pah.
Private Eye by Henry Kuttner and C. L. Moore starts with a forensic psychologist and a “trace” engineer using a time viewer device to watch Sam Clay stab to death a man called Vanderman. The two are investigating Clay to find out if the killing was premeditated (this type of offence is essentially the only kind which is punished in this strange, dark future), so most of the first part of the story is in the form of a murder mystery which shows how Clay manages to conceal his premeditation from the investigating pair’s all-seeing temporal eye. Their research focuses on the  eighteen month period before the killing, the beginning of which has Vanderman steal Clay’s girlfriend, and Clay deciding to kill him.
Mixed through this storyline are glimmers of information which illuminate Clay’s dark psyche, such as incidents from his childhood where he was locked in a cupboard by his parents. Inside, a religious picture of another all-seeing eye watched over him, with “THOU GOD SEEST ME” printed underneath the image.
The murder mystery thread is concluded around the three-quarters mark when Clay (spoiler) is found innocent of premeditation. The rest of the story is a psychodrama which examines who Clay is, and sees him reflect on his actions. The last few lines provide (spoiler) a shockingly violent resolution in which Clay transcends the trauma of his childhood (although not in a good way), and the Eye appears as a final image.
This is a remarkable and complex story—much more than a murder mystery, as it is sometimes described—and one which recalls (the future world, the psychologically damaged anti-hero, etc.), Alfred Bester’s The Demolished Man or The Stars My Destination.
If the Kuttner and Moore story above could have easily appeared in the mid-1950’s Galaxy, then Manna by Peter Phillips would have been equally at home in F&SF—although it initially feels like a Galaxy story too, with a setup that tells of the development and marketing of a new “Miracle Meal”. However, the narrative almost immediately takes a right turn into a conversation between one of the company’s representatives, who wants to set up a discrete factory in a sleepy English village, and the local vicar, who is resistant to change. Then the story changes direction again as it introduces Brother James and Brother Gregory, two ghosts!
The next section describes these two and their relationship in some detail (there is back and forth chatter that fills us in about their characters and background), and also explains their ghostly existence in SFnal terms (their poltergeist activity is telekinesis, etc.). They take an interest in the new factory (which is modelled after the old abbey), and materialise to try the food. Then they decide to cause some mischief . . . .
In the final part of the story the factory’s food production goes missing, and the company sends a man over to investigate. Meanwhile, cans of Miracle Meal start turning up in the kitchen of a monastery in 1136!
This is an impressive piece, not only for its unlikely, original and complex plot (which Phillips pulls off with some verve) but also for its witty and entertaining narrative. Moreover, the writer manages to top it all off with a transcendent ending where (spoiler) the two Brothers manage to “translate” themselves from trapped Earth-bound beings into thoughts, and thereafter freely travel the universe.
This was a delightful discovery.
The second of the three Kuttner & Moore stories in this volume is The Prisoner in the Skull, which sees them use a variation of one of their previously used plot-gimmicks, where technology from the future arrives in the present (The Twonky, Mimsy Were the Borogoves, etc.). This time it isn’t technology but a “blank man”— John Fowler is in his apartment trying to fix a light switch before his girlfriend Veronica calls, when the blank man rings his doorbell and passes out in his arms when Fowler answers. He gives the man a brandy and, to keep him out of the way while he entertains, tells him to fix the light switch. After Veronica leaves, having refused Fowler’s marriage proposal, he finds that the blank man has replaced the light switch with a panel controlled by hand gestures.
These opening pages limn the two arcs of the story. First, Fowler gets Norman (as he later christens him) to invent a number of items, which exhausts the man to the point that he has to rest for two or three days between each invention. Periodically, Norman makes abortive attempts to communicate—he seems partially catatonic—but Fowler, who knows a good thing when he sees one, does not help.
Meanwhile Fowler unsuccessfully pursues Veronica, and she later marries someone else. This arouses Fowler’s ire, and he gets Norman to develop devices that will let him spy on Veronica/and or help him to split the couple apart. During this, Norman makes ever more strenuous attempts to communicate.
The final section sees Fowler instruct Norman to develop a device that will give Fowler the same abilities that Norman has. The ending is (spoiler) an ironic biter-bit ending that has the device—which turns out to be a time-loop device—transport Fowler back to his own front door. He has become the blank man.
I note that that this story, like Private Eye but to a lesser extent, is partly the character study of an anti-hero.
Alien Earth by Edmond Hamilton starts with Farris (a teak forester) and his guide Piang off-trail in the Laotian jungle when they come across a man in a clearing. Piang identifies the man as “hunati,” and urges Farris to leave, but the latter examines the man and finds that everything about him—his pulse, the speed at which he moves or blinks, etc.—is massively slowed down. When Farris sees another man in a similar condition at the edge of the clearing he agrees to leave so as not to upset the local tribe.
The pair continue their journey and later arrive at a research station to hear the brother and sister that live there arguing. Farris introduces himself to Andre, the brother, who reads Farris’s introductory letter from the Saigon Bureau about opening new teak cuttings, and tells him that some of the local forests are unsuitable for logging. When Farris later mentions the hunati Andre drops his glass, but later tells Farris about the drug the natives use and what it does.
Over the following days, Farris finds out that Andre is involved with the hunati, and goes to the clearing to take the drug. Andre does this against his sister’s wishes and, at one point, she and Farris take him back from the clearing while he is under the drug’s influence and keep him at the station. Weeks later, the effects wear off: Andre is not happy.
The rest of the story involves Farris and Lys trying to convince Andre to stop taking the drug, with Farris at one point threatening to release a plant blight that Andre is researching at the station, and which will kill the plant the drug comes from. Andre (spoiler) eventually drugs Farris and Lys, and they experience the slowed-down world. The story comes to a transcendent climax in the clearing.
As well as being a very good story, this is a thematically prescient piece about drugs, altered consciousness, and ecology.
History Lesson by Arthur C. Clarke is the second of three stories (the others are the Asimov and the Bradbury) that I can remember reading. This one begins with a primitive tribe on a far future Earth trying to escape southwards to escape a new ice age and its associated glaciers. Eventually, the tribe fails and they all die, but not before they put the last few treasures, which includes a radio beacon, under a cairn.
The second part of the story takes place thousands of years later, when Venusians arrive and find the cairn and the buried possessions. They take these home and make arrangements to watch the reel of film they have found. While they watch the movie their assumption, and the reader’s, is (spoiler) that they are watching humans but—in one of SF’s classic last lines—the end credits are “A Walt Disney Production.”
It is difficult to score this one as I remembered what the punch line is, so I’ve averaged how I felt at age twelve, and now.
Eternity Lost by Clifford D. Simak is set in a world hundreds of years in the future where only a privileged few get life extension treatment. The story opens with two political operatives telling Senator Homer Leonard that his next application hasn’t been approved. The rest of the story details his attempts to find fair means or foul to get his next treatment. During this he notes that various people have gone missing and that their bodies have not been recovered, leading him to wonder if the extrasolar research people have finally found the living space required for the treatment to given to all humanity. Meanwhile, he feels the effects of his age.
At the end of the story (spoiler) the senator fails in his efforts to get an extension so he publicly denounces that the treatment is only given to politicians and other worthies. He later finds a unopened letter (he is old and forgetful and sleepy) which contains news that provides an ironic end to the story.
This has a good start, but the societal setup does not convince (I can’t see the masses letting a politician live 500 year lifespans while they die, and the society portrayed seems little different from today). There is also some sophomoric philosophising about aging and death: “we may not be able to assess in their true value the things that should be dearest to us; for a thing that has no ending, a thing that goes on forever, must have decreasing value.” Simak was 45 when this first appeared—I wonder if he felt the same way in his eighties.
I note that, like the Asimov, this is a better quality work than his stories from the late-1930’s/early-1940’s. I know it is an obvious point, but not all great writers are great at the start of their careers.
The Only Thing We Learn by C. M. Kornbluth focuses on a martinet wing commander who engages an enemy attacking the solar system and starts losing. A civilian researcher who is present states that history repeats itself, giving a little homily about how the strong always go out to the frontiers . . . and then they return.
This is bookended by a far future professor’s lecture about the battle. In the second part he is interrupted by a messenger from General Slef asking for members of the officer cadet force. It appears that Earth is threatened again, and history is repeating itself once more.
This more cerebral content does not disguise that this is essentially a standard space battle story with cardboard characters.
Private – Keep Out! by Philip MacDonald takes some time to get going with its story of a man investigating another who has “unbecome”. It has a predictable ending, but it is notable for the volume of drinking done by the characters. I suspect this one was written shortly before Happy Hour.
The Hurkle Is a Happy Beast by Theodore Sturgeon has an unpleasant and lethal alien which is inadvertently transported to Earth by a matter transmitter. There are no particular plot complications, and the story is told a cutesy tone that is (a) irritating and (b) dissonant.5
This did not appeal to me, and I am at a loss to fathom this story’s popularity.
Kaleidoscope by Ray Bradbury is the final story that I remember reading, and it starts with an atypical (for Bradbury) action hook of a spaceship exploding and scattering the crew into space “like a dozen wriggling silverfish”. The men move in different directions, some towards the sun, others out to Pluto. The main character, Hollis, ends up drifting towards Earth, and re-entry. While they drift, the men talk to each other (or babble, or scream), and Hollis reflects on his life and imminent death.
I liked this grim piece (it’s a pity Bradbury didn’t keep this edge in his later work) but (minor quibble) I think it would be better without the last line.
Defense Mechanism by Katherine MacLean concerns a family who live out in the sticks because of a new baby which is learning to control its telepathic abilities. After some domestic back and forth the baby lets the father know that a rabbit is in trouble. The father goes out into the garden and finds a hunter has trapped it. After the hunter slits the animal’s throat, the father realises he is psychotic, and knocks him unconscious with a length of wood. The story finishes with a few paragraphs about insanity.
The point of this was lost on me, and it doesn’t help that parts of the story are not entirely clear (the beginning for example).
Cold War by Henry Kuttner and C. L. Moore is the fifth and last story in the ‘Hogben’ series of stories about a group of hillbilly mutants. Told in the vernacular (they call atoms “little critters”, etc.), this story starts with the narrator, Saunk, souring cream for Ma by sending it forward in time and then bringing it back. While he does this his uncle distracts him, which results in Saunk having his thumb stuck in the future. By the time Saunk extricates himself his uncle has done a runner (he is only allowed leave the family home if supervised, due to a previous mishap).
Once free, Saunk follows his uncle to town, where he sees him meet a man called Pugh, and his son, Junior. Both are nasty pieces of work, and the son has the ability to hex people, in his case by giving them splitting headaches.
While the father and son sell their headache cures, Pugh gets into an argument with the uncle: Pugh wants his family line to continue but, as he as his son are plug ugly, he needs the uncle’s help. The uncle refuses and enters a cataleptic stupor. Junior hexes the uncle while he is unconscious, and the latter’s immune system starts turning his body many different colours. A local doctor attends, and then calls for an ambulance. Saunk knows this will mean trouble if his uncle goes to hospital, on account of his double hearts etc., and he asks Pugh to stop the hex. Pugh agrees on condition that Saunk agrees to help. Saunk communicates with Grandpa, who tells him to agree, and to come home.
The story ends (spoiler) with Grandpa altering the Pugh’s genes and sending them far back in time. The Pugh’s descendants mutate, and eventually devolve into . . . cold viruses.
This is a pleasant read for the most part (the plot is nonsense but the fun is in the telling) and it has some nice touches. The ending stretches the suspension of disbelief a bit too far though, even for a humorous piece.
The Witches of Karres by James H. Schmitz has a spaceship captain called Pausert returning to his ship from a bar when he intervenes in an argument between a fat man and a teenage girl, who we later find is his slave. They fight, and then the police arrive. Pausert ends up in court and faces jail time . . . unless he buys the girl, Maleen. He does this but, when he tries to take her back to her home planet Karres, she burst into tears, stating that her two younger sisters are slaves on the planer too.
Pausert subsequently tracks down and buys the two girls, Goth and Leewit, and it becomes apparent that all three have psi powers. This is particularly evident after they take off to return to Karres, when Goth shows him a pile of gemstones stolen from her previous owner. When two cruisers pursue the ship to arrest them, Pausert takes evasive action and tries to outrun the ships. During this he suddenly sees that the ship is in a completely different location. He later finds the three girls in their cabin with a small bundle of glowing wires—they have apparently made a “Sheewash drive,” an FTL device.
The rest of the story recounts further adventures and scrapes until the ship eventually arrives back at the girl’s planet, Karres. This is a verdant, pleasant world and Pausert stays with the girl’s family for some time before leaving to go home and see his girlfriend.
On his return (spoiler) a welcoming committee arrives, and charges him with several crimes. Pausert pulls a gun, kicks them off, and flees, with several ships pursuing him. On the point of capture he feels a Sheewash drive operate, and realises one of the girls is aboard. This turns out to be Goth, who tells him that he will marry her in four years. Meanwhile, they can’t go to Karres, as the people there have used a massive Sheewash drive to move the planet.
This story is a pleasant if somewhat plodding juvenile, albeit one with sparky kids in it; what I found perplexing is how this story made it into the SF Hall of Fame anthologies—it just isn’t that good, or that original.

The non-fiction consists of Martin Greenberg’s usual Introduction, where he gives a summary of world events (the Soviets detonate a nuclear weapon, NATO formed, etc.) before covering what was happening in the SF world:

In the real world it was another outstanding year as a large number of excellent (along with a few not so excellent) science fiction and fantasy novels and collections were published (again, many of these had been serialized years earlier in the magazines), including the titanic 1984 by George Orwell, Lords of Creation by Eando Binder, A Martian Odyssey by Stanley G. Weinbaum, Exiles of Time by Nelson Bond, Skylark of Valeron by E. E. (Doc) Smith, What Mad Universe by Fredric Brown, The Fox Woman by A. Merritt, The Incredible Planet by John W. Campbell, Jr., Sixth Column by Robert A. Heinlein, The Sunken World by Stanton A. Coblentz, and The Star Kings by Edmond Hamilton. Two important anthologies were The Best Science Fiction Stories, 1949, the first annual “Best of” anthology, edited by E. F. Bleiler and T. E. Dikty, and The Girl with the Hungry Eyes and Other Stories, one of the first “original anthologies,” edited by our own Donald A. Wollheim.
Important novels that appeared in magazines in 1949 included Seetee Shock by Jack Williamson, Flight into Yesterday [The Paradox Men] by Charles L. Harness, and Needle by Hal Clement.
Super Science Fiction reappeared on the newsstands, this time edited by Eijer Jacobsson. Other sf magazines that began publication in 1949 were Other Worlds Science Stories, edited by Raymond A. Palmer, and A. Merritt’s Fantasy Magazine. However, all these paled beside the launching in October of The Magazine of Fantasy, published by Mercury Press and edited by Anthony Boucher and J. Francis McComas—with its name changed to The Magazine of Fantasy and Science Fiction, it would soon become a major rival to Astounding and certainly one of the most important sf magazines of all time.
More wondrous things were happening in the real world as five writers made their maiden voyages into reality: in February, John Christopher (Christopher Youd) with “Christmas Tree”; in July, Kris Neville with “The Hand From the Stars”; in the Fall issue of Planet Stories, Roger Dee with “The Wheel is Death”; in October, Katherine MacLean with “Defense Mechanism”; and in the Winter issue of Planet Stories, Jerome Bixby, with “Tubemonkey.”
Gnome Press, under the leadership of David Kyle and Martin Greenberg (the other Marty Greenberg) began publication during 1949. The Captain Video TV series took to the airways. The real people gathered together for the seventh time as the World Science Fiction Convention (Cinvention) was held in Cincinnati. Notable sf films of the year were Mighty Joe Young and The Perfect Woman, the latter based on a play by Wallace Geoffrey and Basil Mitchell.
Death took Arthur Leo Zagat at the age of 54.
But distant wings were beating as Malcolm Edwards was born.  p. 10-11

There are also Story introductions by both Martin H. Greenberg and Isaac Asimov, which are occasionally irritating, occasionally informative. As an example of the former, here is part of Asimov’s introduction for Phillips story, where he not only manages to shoe-horn in a reference to his own ‘Foundation’ series but misdescribes Manna as a story about religion:

It seems to me that science fiction writers tend to avoid religion. Surely, religion has permeated many societies at all times; all Western societies from ancient Sumeria on have had strong religious components. And yet—
Societies depicted in science fiction and fantasy often ignore religion. While the great Manichean battle of good and evil—God and Satan—seems to permeate Tolkien’s “Lord of the Rings,” there is no religious ritual anywhere mentioned. In my own “Foundation” series, the only religious element found is a purely secular fake—and that was put in only at the insistence of John Campbell, to my own enormous unease.
Still, there are exceptions. Religion does appear sometimes, usually informs that appear [to me] to be somewhat Catholic in atmosphere, or else Fundamentalist. “Manna” by Peter Phillips is an example.—I.A.

Just because a story has an abbey, or monks, in it doesn’t make it about religion. Also, see above for their misdescription of Private Eye—one wonders if they bothered rereading the stories before selecting them.
One of the useful introductions is for the MacDonald story:

The late Philip MacDonald was the grandson of the famous Scottish poet George MacDonald and a highly regarded Hollywood screenwriter and detective novelist. Perhaps his most famous film work was his script for Daphne du Maurier’s Rebecca (1940), but he also wrote a number of Mr. Moto and Charlie Chan films. His detective character Anthony Gethryn, introduced in 1924, appeared in some ten novels.—M. H. G.  p. 207

There an interesting comment at the end of Greenberg’s introduction to Schmitz’s story:

John Campbell’s postwar Astounding was a center for “psi” stories of all types, one of several seeming obsessions of this great editor. Astounding began to enter a period of slow decline as the 1940s ended, brought on in no small measure by the magazine boom which saw the creation of powerful competition in the form of Galaxy and The Magazine of Fantasy and Science Fiction. It is also possible that by this time Campbell had done as much for science fiction as he could.
Astounding accounts for less than half of the stories in this book.—M.H.G.  p. 276

It is a pity that Asimov and Greenberg didn’t pick more stories from Astounding (presumably the rights for Heinlein’s Gulf, etc. were too expensive, or were not available) as it might have made for a better collection—the Astounding stories collected here are markedly better than the others, and include the following:

The Red Queen’s Race by Isaac Asimov ∗∗∗+
Private Eye by Henry Kuttner and C. L. Moore
Manna by Peter Phillips
The Prisoner in the Skull by Henry Kuttner and C. L. Moore +
Eternity Lost by Clifford D. Simak
Defense Mechanism by Katherine MacLean
The Witches of Karres by James H. Schmitz

The stories published elsewhere are:

Flaw by John D. MacDonald (Startling Stories)
Alien Earth by Edmond Hamilton (Thrilling Wonder Stories)
History Lesson by Arthur C. Clarke + (Startling Stories)
The Only Thing We Learn by C. M. Kornbluth (Startling Stories)
Private – Keep Out! by Philip MacDonald (F&SF)
The Hurkle Is a Happy Beast by Theodore Sturgeon (F&SF)
Kaleidoscope by Ray Bradbury + (Thrilling Wonder Stories)
Cold War Henry Kuttner and C. L. Moore [as by Henry Kuttner] (Thrilling Wonder Stories)

It’s a small sample size, but I gave the stories in the Astounding group an average star rating of 3.1, the non-Astounding group average star rating is 2.5.

In conclusion, a worthwhile volume—the first half of this book is of a particularly good standard.6  ●

_____________________

1. Jim Harris’s review of the previous volume is here. The Great SF Stories newsgroup is here.

2. I’d read the Bradbury, Merril and van Vogt in the Asimov/Greenberg volume, and the Asimov and two Bradbury’s from the Bleiler/Dikty. Maybe more—I didn’t start keeping track of what I’d read until around 1980 (in my early twenties).

3. This realisation about the holes (or more accurately, endless voids) in my reading were becoming apparent as I read my way through Jo Walton’s An Informal History of the Hugos (a retrospective look at the runners and riders for each year of the award from its inauguration in 1953 up until 2000). My reading coverage wasn’t too bad in the fifties and sixties (although there were holes), and I was well across the subject matter in the mid- to late-seventies (still holes), but as the eighties marched on it became apparent that I must have almost completely stopped reading the magazines. As this period coincided with me entering the world of work this is perhaps no surprise, but I wish I’d had the wit to keep up with the various ‘Year’s Bests’. I doubt I’ll ever catch up now but I’ll make the effort.

4. Longer reviews here:

The Red Queen’s Race by Isaac Asimov
Private Eye by Henry Kuttner and C. L. Moore
Private – Keep Out! by Philip MacDonald
The Hurkle Is a Happy Beast by Theodore Sturgeon

5. In his introduction to Sturgeon’s story, Greenberg states that:

Currently another type of alien appears frequently—the cuddly, cutesy aliens of Close Encounters of the Third Kind and especially E.T. Personally, I like my aliens without many redeeming qualities, but I have an open mind and I know a great cutesy alien story when I read one. So here is [. . .] one of the best of its sub-type.  p. 223

6. If you want a better idea of how this book measures up against what I might pick for a 1949 ‘Year’s Best’, and what other anthologists chose, look at the table below.
The first to fourth column give the story titles, authors, lengths and place of publication (see below the table for abbreviation legend).
The ‘G’ column lists Asimov and Greenberg’s choices with an ‘x’.
The ‘B’ column lists Bleiler and Dikty’s choices with an ‘x’.
The ‘H’ column shows the story’s 1949 Retro Hugo award placing (not yet awarded).
The ‘C’ column shows how many of the anthologies and/or polls used in the Classics of Science Fiction list included the story in their collections (note that this list is SF only and skews against fantasy), minus the anthology or award citations which have their own column (Greenberg/Asimov and Beliler/Dikty in this case).
The ‘O’ column shows the number of inclusions in other major anthologies or recommendation lists I’ve seen which are not on the Classics of SF list. These are selected by me (usually to include Fantasy Retrospectives that CoSF don’t include) but I may not yet have looked into this for some/all of the stories.
The ‘S’ shows my choices for a ‘Best of the Year’ with an ‘x’. A dash means read but passed over (I only select stories better than + and above). Blank means unread.
The ‘T’ column shows the total points that each story gets (they get a point for being in each column and for each of the CoSF and other anthology inclusions).
The titles, names. lengths, publications, and overall score columns are sortable.
A good way to sample 1949’s best short fiction may be to start at the top of the table and work down until you get to the last of the 2-point stories. Bear in mind this is all wildly unscientific, but it will give you something to aim at. Enjoy.

na=novella, nv=novelet, ss=short story

ALM, American Legion Magazine; ARK, The Arkham Sampler; ARU, Argosy (UK); AST, Astounding; BLU, Blue Book; BOY, Boy’s Life; FAN, Fantastic Adventures; FSF, Fantasy and Science Fiction; GHE, The Girl With the Hungry Eyes (anth.); PLA, Planet Stories, RET Retort; SEP, Saturday Evening Post; STA, Startling Stories; SUP, Super Science Stories; TAS, the Arkham Sampler; TWS, Thrilling Wonder Stories; UCL, University of Chicago Law Review.

(1) The Naming of Names was reprinted as Dark They Were, and Golden-Eyed. There is a different story titled The Naming of Names in The Martian Chronicles.
(2) The Long Years was reprinted as Dwellers in Silence. This is a 1948 story, not 1949, hence no overall rating.
(3) Action on Azura was reprinted as Contact, Incorporated. ●

rssrss

Astounding Science-Fiction v42n05, January 1949

ISFDB link
Archive.org link

Other reviews:1
Alva Rogers, A Requiem for Astounding  p. 172

_____________________

Editor, John W. Campbell Jr.; Assistant Editor, Catherine Tarrant

Fiction:
Private Eye • novelette by Henry Kuttner and C. L. Moore [as by Lewis Padgett] ∗∗∗∗∗
Expedition Polychrome • novelette by Joseph A. Winter, M.D.
How Can You Lose? • short story by W. Macfarlane
Death Is the Penalty • short story by Judith Merril
The Red Queen’s Race • novelette by Isaac Asimov +
The Players of Ā (Part 4 of 4) • serial by A. E. van Vogt (unread)

Non-fiction:
Cover • by Hubert Rogers
Interior artwork • by Hubert Rogers (x10), Edd Cartier (x5), Paul Orban (x3)
Gleep and Bepo • editorial by John W. Campbell, Jr.
The Analytical Laboratory: September & October 1948
Modern Calculators • science essay by E. L. Locke
Brass Tacks • letters

_____________________

I ended up reading this issue as I have been working my way through The Great SF Stories 11: 1949 (edited by Marty Greenberg & Isaac Asimov, 1984), and realised that I’d read two of the stories here (the Kuttner/ Moore and the Asimov)—so I thought I may as well finish it off. Apart from that I wanted to talk at greater length about Henry Kuttner and C. L. Moore’s story Private Eye, which is probably the best thing I’ve read in Astounding so far.

In their anthology Asimov and Greenberg both describe Kuttner and Moore’s piece as a murder mystery, but this rather misdescribes the story as it is much a psychological portrait of the main character as anything else. However, that said, it begins with a forensic sociologist and a “tracer” engineer watching Sam Clay kill, perhaps murder, a man called Vanderman:

The tracer engineer twirled a dial and watched the figures on the screen repeat their actions. One—Sam Clay—snatched the letter cutter from a desk and plunged it into the other man’s heart. The victim fell down dead. Clay started back in apparent horror. Then he dropped to his knees beside the twitching body and said wildly that he didn’t mean it. The body drummed its heels upon the rug and was still.
“That last touch was nice,” the engineer said.  p. 8

The pair watch via a device that can see into the past by using the “fingerprints” of light and sound waves imprinted on matter (although the machine can only go back fifty years), and their job is to investigate Clay’s timeline to find out if the killing was premeditated. In this future world only intent enables a charge of murder to be brought, otherwise killers usually go free, or receive some lesser punishment.
One of the first things the pair discover is that Clay was dumped by Bea, his dominating girlfriend, for Vanderman eighteen months earlier. What isn’t apparent from their observations is that Clay has decided to murder Vanderman because of this, and plots how to kill him without leaving any evidence for the all-seeing temporal eye that will examine his historical actions afterwards.
Clay decides to pick a fight with Vanderman:

Anywhere you sat in the Paradise Bar, a competent robot analyzer instantly studied your complexion and facial angles, and switched on lights, in varying tints and intensities, that showed you off to best advantage. The joint was popular for business deals. A swindler could look like an honest man there. It was also popular with women and slightly passé teleo talent. Sam Clay looked rather like an ascetic young saint. Andrew Vanderman looked noble, in a grim way, like Richard Coeur-de-Lion offering Saladin his freedom, though he knew it wasn’t really a bright thing to do. Noblesse oblige, his firm jaw seemed to say, as he picked up the silver decanter and poured. In ordinary light, Vanderman looked slightly more like a handsome bulldog. Also, away from the Paradise Bar, he was redder around the chops, a choleric man.
“As to that deal we were discussing,” Clay said, “you can go to—”
The censoring juke box blared out a covering bar or two.
Vanderman’s reply was unheard as the music got briefly, louder, and the lights shifted rapidly to keep pace with his sudden flush.
“It’s perfectly easy to outwit these censors,” Clay said. “They’re keyed to familiar terms of profane abuse, not to circumlocutions. If I said that the arrangement of your chromosomes would have surprised your father . . . you see?” He was right. The music stayed soft.
Vanderman swallowed nothing. “Take it easy,” he said. “I can see why you’re upset. Let me say first of all—”
Hijo—”
But the censor was proficient in Spanish dialects. Vanderman was spared hearing another insult.
“—that I offered you a job because I think you’re a very capable man. You have potentialities. It’s not a bribe. Our personal affairs should be kept out of this.”
All the same, Bea was engaged to me.”
“Clay, are you drunk?”
“Yes,” Clay said, and threw his drink into Vanderman’s face. The music began to play Wagner very, very loudly. A few minutes later, when the waiters interfered, Clay was supine and bloody, with a mashed nose and a bruised cheek. Vanderman had skinned his knuckles.  p. 11-12

After this Clay buys a gun and threatens Vanderman, but does not follow through. Later he feigns remorse, but is secretly pleased that he has established an alibi against premeditation by giving the impression that his anger has dissipated.
The next section details an elaborate plot that Clay sets in motion, wherein he befriends Vanderman’s personal secretary, Josephine, and later guilts Vanderman into giving him a job. Over the next year and a half he slowly insinuates himself into Vanderman’s good graces, a process helped by the announcement that he intends to marry Josephine. Vanderman and Bea’s relationship eventually hits a rocky patch, and it is then Clay chooses to act: he goes to her and Vanderman’s apartment when the latter isn’t there and breaks the spy camera in the wall so Vanderman will not know what transpires between them.

The murder occurs when Clay next sees Vanderman in his office: the latter toys with the “stingaree” whip that Clay has previously planted (Vanderman habitually fingers objects while at his desk). When Vanderman finally snaps, he lashes out with it, causing Clay immense pain. In a supposedly reflexive retaliation, Clay picks up the scalpel that Vanderman uses as a letter opener and stabs him.
In the subsequent trial the forensic sociologist offers no evidence of premeditation, so the court acquits Clay and he walks free.
I’ll admit that this plot synopsis does not sound convincing, but what it doesn’t fully convey is the length of time that elapses (eighteen months), or the gradualist development of these interlocking plot pieces, or that this is only the first three quarters or so of the story. Moreover, what I’ve described so far is only a skeleton over which much, much more is laid, in particular the evolving psychological portrait of Clay, the submissive role he played in his relationship with Bea and, more pivotally, what happened to him as a child:

The engineer had a free period. He was finally able to investigate Sam Clay’s early childhood. It was purely academic now, but he liked to indulge his curiosity. He traced Clay back to the dark closet, when the boy was four, and used ultraviolet. Sam was huddled in a comer, crying silently, staring up with frightened eyes at a top shelf.
What was on that shelf the engineer could not see.
He kept the beam focused on the closet and cast back rapidly through time. The closet often opened and closed, and sometimes Sam Clay was locked in it as punishment, but the upper shelf held its mystery until—
It was in reverse. A woman reached to that shelf, took down an object, walked backward out of the closet to Sam Clay’s bedroom, and went to the wall by the door. This was unusual, for generally it was Sam’s father who was warden of the closet.
She hung up a framed picture of a single huge staring eye floating in space. There was a legend under it. The letters spelled out: THOU GOD SEEST ME.
The engineer kept on tracing. After a while it was night. The child was in bed, sitting up wide-eyed, afraid. A man’s footsteps sounded on the stair. The scanner told all secrets but those of the inner mind. The man was Sam’s father, coming up to punish him for some childish crime committed earlier. Moonlight fell upon the wall beyond which the footsteps approached showing how the wall quivered a little to the vibrations of the feet, and the Eye in its frame quivered, too. The boy seemed to brace himself. A defiant half-smile showed on his mouth, crooked, unsteady.
This time he’d keep that smile, no matter what happened. When it was over he’d still have it, so his father could see it, and the Eye could see it and they’d know he hadn’t given in. He hadn’t . . . he—
The door opened.
He couldn’t help it. The smile faded and was gone.  p. 27-28

There is much more psychological observation and comment in the story, albeit most of it from the viewpoint of the forensic sociologist and, to a lesser extent, the engineer.
As well as all this there is also some world building going on in the background—we’ve seen the futuristic bar in the passage above, but there are also quirky details like this:

It appeared as though Andrew Vanderman had, during a quarrel, struck Clay across the face with a stingaree whip. Anyone who has been stung by a Portuguese man-of-war can understand that, at this point, Clay could plead temporary insanity and self-defense, as well as undue provocation and possible justification.
Only the curious cult of the Alaskan Flagellantes, who make the stingaree whips for their ceremonials, know how to endure the pain. The Flagellantes even like it, the pre-ritual drug they swallow transmutes pain into pleasure.  p. 9

And the curious upshot of this imbalance came when the act of homicide was declared nonpunishable, unless intent and forethought could be proved. Of course, it was considered at least naughty to fly in a rage and murder someone on impulse, and there was a nominal punishment—imprisonment, for example—but in practice this never worked, because so many defences were possible. Temporary insanity. Undue provocation. Self defense. Manslaughter, second-degree homicide, third degree, fourth degree—it went on like that. It was up to the State to prove that the killer had planned his killing in advance; only then would a jury convict. And the jury, of course, had to waive immunity and take a scop test, to prove the box hadn’t been packed. But no defendant ever waived immunity.  p. 8-9

These glimpses of this dark future, combined with a psychologically driven and flawed character, recall Alfred Bester’s novels The Demolished Man and The Stars My Destination, and more than once it felt like I was reading one of that writer’s better mid-50’s short stories.
All of the plot elements and psychological observations are drawn together in the final section, when Bea and Clay meet after the trial. She wants him back, but he tells her he plans to marry Josephine. She laughs and mocks him, and they argue, and then Clay blurts out that he planned Vanderman’s murder. Almost immediately he realises that this puts him at risk of a retrial and conviction.

Clay reflects on the peril he has put himself in, and also what he was hoping to achieve by murdering Vanderman. From his inner turmoil comes to a pivotal moment of self-realisation: he wasn’t defying the eye after he murdered Vanderman, but has been hiding from it. The last few lines provide (spoiler) a shockingly violent end where Clay transcends the psychological trauma of his childhood (although not in a good way), and the Eye appears as a final image.
It’s hard to overstate how powerful an ending this is—for the most part I thought the story oscillated in quality between good and very good, but those last few sentences pull all the elements into alignment. I can’t remember the last time I finished a story and was left staring at the page open-jawed, and thinking, “Wow.”
An excellent piece, and the best thing of theirs I’ve read.2

Expedition Polychrome by Joseph A. Winter, M.D. is the sequel to an earlier ‘Expedition’ story (Expedition Mercy) which appeared in the November issue. Both stories take place on an alien planet called Minotaur.
The story is breezily told but feels amateurish and clunky, and it is full of talking heads:

No doubt about it—Edwards was feeling quite pleased with himself.
And it was well-deserved. The medical expedition under his direction to the planet Minotaur had just solved a most unusual problem involving the death of all members of Expedition I.
He tilted back in his chair in the control room and continued.
[. . .]
“To give you another example: the body is capable of only certain color changes. The skin might turn brown, due to the presence of melanin, one of the normally found pigments. Or it might turn any one of the colors seen in the degradation of hemoglobin. You know, those fascinating hues which change from dark blue to green to yellow, which we all saw adorning your left eye last year.
“No,” he continued, without giving Tom a chance to explain how he got that shiner, “we could never expect to see a man turn, say, an aquamarine blue. There just isn’t a precursor for that color in the body. So we’ll never see an exotic disease where the skin is aquamarine or we’ll never see a disease where a man reacts outside of the normal limitations of response.”
“So that’s it,” mused Tom. “Yes, what is it ?” He turned around as a knock came at the door.
It was one of the crew members. “Sorry to interrupt, sir, but I’d like to have Dr. Edwards take a look at me. My skin is kind of a funny color.”
Edwards turned around. Like the Bay of Naples on a sunny day, or Lake Superior in July, the man’s skin was a beautiful vivid aquamarine blue.
Bob’s jaw dropped. He had just said that such a color couldn’t possibly occur, yet here it was!  p. 34

After much medical discussion, the patient’s problem (spoiler) is traced to a plant he sniffed while wandering around on the planet’s surface (yes, yet another Darwin Award candidate). When another crew member goes to get a sample of the plants he observes a new alien life form:

Picture a four-legged animal with a body the same size as a St. Bernard dog, with disproportionately short, bowed legs like a dachshund. Give him a hairless, wrinkled graygreen skin, and a long, graceful neck dike a camel, emerging from powerful shoulders. Put a head with long jaws on that neck; large yellow eyes, no external ears and a placid expression, for features. And finally, on the anterior surface of the long neck, imagine a rugose, lobulated mass of flesh reminiscent of the wattles of a turkey. There you will have, at first glance, the dominant inhabitant of the planet Minotaur.
[. . .]
“Look at the color changes in that gadget on his neck! What do you suppose that’s for?” asked Schultz.
And the colors were changing; various shades of red were playing over the surface. A broad, horizontal band of scarlet, followed by a light pink, would travel down the length of the colored area. This would be replaced by a vermilion, which would seem to pulsate, gently, alternately deepening and lightening in shade.  p. 42

The crew attempt to communicate with the aliens and then, just as Slawson, the sick man, looks like he is going to expire from some haemoglobin-bonding syndrome (a bit like carbon monoxide poisoning), the aliens come aboard the ship. They take a particular interest in Slawson; one them then leaves (spoiler), returning with flowers which cure the sick man.
This is pleasant enough but, added to its other shortcomings, the idea that the aliens would have diseases analogous to ours is just not believable.

How Can You Lose? by W. Macfarlane is an epistolary story (a letter this time, not a diary) where the writer discusses fixing a college football team to win bets. The SF gimmick, dropped in towards the end of the story, involves (spoiler) a serum from an unknown dinosaur that makes the players strong and heavy.
A weak squib.

Death Is the Penalty by Judith Merril is about a future couple who meet at a stream when they both go there to swim at the same time. Over the course of the story they fall in love, and the story has a number of mawkish passages such as this:

And then how impossibly perfect it was when he did begin to talk. He listened gravely. He didn’t say anything; he nodded, but in the nod she saw he knew about all the years and all about the men who were just a little silly, a little juvenile, who came running when she smiled, but backed off in fright when she talked.  p. 59

She knew he had understood, from the beginning, so she poured out to him now all the lonely years. She told him how the exams in Secondary had just barely passed her by for Restricted work, how she was left among men who were pleasant, friendly, good at their work. But always, when she met someone, he stayed a little while, then went away.
She was too good—too smart, too quick. A man doesn’t want a woman who is greater than he is.
Janice had subjected them, one by one, to the hot inquiring searchlight of her intellect, probed at their minds, and, when she was not herself discarded, she had discarded them, each in turn. Because a woman doesn’t want a man who is less than she is.  p. 61

Throughout this (and from an initial bookend section) we find out that they work in different areas and are not supposed to meet. At the end of the story (spoiler) security turns up and, while they embrace, they are turned into “dark shapes”:

By the side of the stream, the two black figures have made an island of quiet for themselves. The area inside the unrepaired old fence is filled with the calm inwardness of their tender cold embrace.
The guide will stop here and wait, until everyone is in the clearing, until each face has turned questingly toward the dark mystery. And when he speaks, the guide’s voice will be quiet. Under the great trees he shouts, but in the presence of the black lovers, a man does not speak too loudly.  p. 56

The SF part of the story is never explained, i.e., what ultimately happens to the pair, or what their work is about, and I wasn’t interested in the emotional yearning in the rest of it. I’m somewhat surprised that Campbell bought this, and suspect he only did so as a future investment in the writer who had previously sold him That Only a Mother (Astounding, June 1948).3

The Red Queen’s Race by Isaac Asimov starts with an incident at a nuclear power plant, where all of the fuel has been converted to energy by means of an abnormal process that caused no explosion or released any gamma rays—although the temperature of the immediate surroundings was slightly raised. A Professor called Tywood is found in the reactor, dead from apoplexy, and the strange equipment beside him is a fused mass.
The story continues from the point of view of an agent who is at the university questioning the other staff and students. Initially the agent talks to the other professors but gets nowhere, so he decides to interview the dead man’s research assistants. One of them reveals that Tywood was researching “micro-temporal translation”—sending material back in time.
When the agent then researches the magazine articles that Tywood wrote he discovers something that he takes to his boss:

“The article,” I went on, “is entitled: ‘Man’s First Great Failure!’”
Remember, this was just before the war, when the bitter disappointment at the final failure of the United Nations was at its height. What I will read are some excerpts from the first part of the article. It goes like this:
“ ‘Then Rome came, adopting the culture, but bestowing, and enforcing, peace. To be sure, the Pax Romana lasted only two hundred years, but no like period has existed since . . .
“ ‘War was abolished. Nationalism did not exist. The Roman citizen was Empire-wide. Saul of Tarsus and Flavius Josephus were Roman citizens. Spaniards, North Africans, Illyrians assumed the purple. Slavery existed, but it was an indiscriminate slavery, imposed as a punishment, incurred as the price of economic failure, brought on by the fortunes of war. No man was a natural slave, because of the color of his skin, or the place of his birth.
“ ‘Religious toleration was complete. If an exception was made early in the case of the Christians, it was because they refused to accept the principle of toleration; because they insisted that only they themselves knew truth—a principle abhorrent to the civilized Roman . . .
“ ‘With all of Western culture under a single polis, with the cancer of religious and national particularism and exclusivism absent; with a high civilization in existence—why could not Man hold his gains?
“ ‘It was because technologically, ancient Hellenism remained backward. It was because without a machine civilization, the price of leisure—and hence civilization and culture—for the few, was slavery for the many. Because the civilization could not find the means to bring comfort and ease to all the population.
“ ‘Therefore, the depressed classes turned to the other world, and to religions which spumed the material benefits of this world—so that science was made impossible in any true sense for over a millennium. And further, as the initial impetus of Hellenism waned, the Empire lacked the technological powers to beat back the barbarians. In fact, it was not till after 1500 A.D. that war became sufficiently a function of the industrial resources of a nation to enable the settled people to defeat invading tribesmen and nomads with ease . . .
“ ‘Imagine then, if somehow the ancient Greeks had learned just a hint of modem chemistry and physics. Imagine if the growth of the Empire had been accompanied by the growth of science, technology and industry. Imagine an Empire, in which machinery replaced slaves; in which all men had a decent share of the world’s goods; in which the legion became the armored column, against which no barbarians could stand. Imagine an Empire which would therefore spread all over the world, without religious or national prejudices.
“ ‘An Empire of all men—all brothers—eventually all free . . .
“ ‘If history could be changed. If that first great failure could have been prevented— ’ ”
And I stopped at that point.

The agent says that he suspects that Tywood has sent a translated science book back in time to change the past and improve the present. The pair calculate that, if this is the case, they have two and a half weeks until any change “ripples” forward through time. In the meantime they decide to track down the Ancient Greek translator, Professor Boulder, only to find that he has already come to them, and is outside in the anteroom.

The final interrogation reveals that Professor Boulder was aware of Tywood’s plan to change the present but was scathing about the possibility of success. There is then an extended conversation/lecture about a variety of subjects—the history of scientific progress, how man progresses, etc.—until Boulder (spoiler) reveals a critical piece of information:

“In other words, gentlemen, while you are right that any change in the course of past events, however trifling, would have incalculable consequences, and while I also believe that you are right in supposing that any random change is much more likely to be for the worst than for the better, I must point out that you are nevertheless wrong in your final conclusions.
Because THIS is the world in which the Greek chemistry text was sent back.
“This has been a Red Queen’s race, if you remember your Through the Looking Glass. In the Red Queen’s country, one had to run as fast as one could merely to stay in the same place. And so it was in this case! Tywood may have thought he was creating a new world, but it was I who prepared the translations, and I took care that only such passages as would account for the queer scraps of knowledge the ancients  apparently got from nowhere would be included.
“And my only intention, for all my racing, was to stay in the same place.”

Despite the fact that the story contains virtually no action or characterisation, and the narrative almost entirely involves talking heads (it reads like a fictionalised version of one of the writer’s later science columns) Asimov nevertheless manages to make an engrossing story out of all this. If you don’t mind lecture-type stories, and are interested in the history of scientific progression (with a nod towards atomic state security and the guilt of A-bomb scientists), you should find this of interest.
I note in passing that the general quality of this story is markedly better than some of Asimov’s early-1940’s work.

Normally I wouldn’t leave a magazine unfinished but, at the moment, I didn’t want to read the previous three parts of A. E. van Vogt’s The Players of Ā, or reread the prequel, The World of Null A (Astounding, August-October 1945). I’ll revise this when I’ve eventually done so. Meanwhile, here is some of Rogers’ artwork:

(I hope this idea of posting pictures without any text doesn’t catch on or I’ll be out of a job.)

The Cover by Hubert Rogers is a striking effort for the Kuttner & Moore story, but I don’t know what the skull is doing there. If you ask me, he missed a trick by not replacing the latter with an image of a boy in a cupboard .
Rogers also contributes most (and the best) of the Interior artwork, although I also liked Edd Cartier’s ‘two dinosaurs’ drawing. I don’t think the latter’s light style was a good match for the Merril story. Paul Orban draws some people from the 1940s.
Gleep and Bepo by John W. Campbell, Jr. is an editorial that discusses early atomic piles (these were used for making radioisotopes rather than producing power it seems, primarily plutonium for bombs). He focuses on two British reactors, Gleep and Bepo,4 and ends with this:

In the field of peacetime atomic energy, therefore, the British are doing a first-rate job, and have every reason to do so. They are, in fact, quite apt to establish commercial atomic power plants before we do.
Be it remembered that the United States has unlimited coal reserves, and completely adequate coal production; we don’t need atomic fuel. Britain, on the other hand, is severely pinched by lack of fuel power; they want and need a new source of energy for energy’s sake. The United States wants and needs atomic energy for special purposes, special situations, but not for the sake of simple bulk energy.  p. 6

The Analytical Laboratory: September & October 1948 will be discussed in those issues if and when I read them. Campbell gives explanation of how the AnLab scores are calculated “for those who wonder”.5

Modern Calculators by E. L. Locke is a very dry article about computers (binary and analog) that I struggled to get through. I did learn where “bits” came from though:

Thus, if we wish to express a 12 decimal digit number in the binary notation, we will need forty binary digits. Incidentally, some wag proposed to refer to these as bigits. Happily, this term has been contracted to “bits.”  p. 98

Brass Tacks is rather dull this month, leading off with a letter about the dynamics of the Weissacker Theory (I hadn’t read the original R. S. Richardson article, it was late, and I started skimming). In among the letters there are two half-page adverts for books. I can’t recall seeing these in Astounding before—they are no doubt a result of the burgeoning book market of the late 1940’s.

A must get issue for the Kuttner & Moore story, with the bonus of the Asimov.  ●

_____________________

1. Alva Rogers, in A Requiem for Astounding, concentrates (like Greenberg and Asimov) on the murder mystery aspects of Private Eye but adds that Kuttner and Moore tell their story in “their usual masterful manner and [throw] in a lovely twist at the end.”

2. A straw poll of less than a handful of people on the Great SF Stories group (groups.io) suggests that Kuttner & Moore’s three best stories are: Mimsy Were the Borogoves, Vintage Season, and Private Eye. The general feeling is that Vintage is mostly Moore, and Private Eye is mostly Kuttner, but see the quote below from C. L. Moore’s introduction to Fury (1947):

We collaborated on almost everything we wrote, but in varying degrees. It worked like this. After we’d established through long discussion the basic ideas, the background and the characters, whichever of us felt like it sat down and started. When that one ran down, the other, being fresh to the story, could usually see what ought to come next, and took over. The action developed as we went along. We kept changing off like this until we finished. A story goes very fast that way.
Each of us edited the other’s copy a little when we took over, often going back a line or two and rephrasing to make the styles blend. We never disagreed seriously over the work. The worst clashes of opinion I can remember ended with one of us saying, “Well, I don’t agree, but since you feel more strongly than I do about it, go ahead.” (When the rent is due tomorrow, one tends toward quick, peaceful settlements.)

James Blish adds this in his introduction to the story in The Mirror of Infinity, ed. by Robert Silverberg (Harper & Row, 1970):

Some of the strengths you will find in this story, however, are not actually his. Almost all of his mature work was written in collaboration with his wife, Catherine L. Moore. There seldom seemed to be much foreplanning in this collaboration, especially in its last years; one of them would simply leave a story in the typewriter, so to speak, and return to find that it had been advanced several thousand words by the other. Viewing stories written individually by each of them, one can see what each of them gave the other: Henry by himself had no particular eye for sensory detail, while Catherine had a relatively weak plot sense and could not write clean, pointed dialogue.
The combination was ideal, and resulted in some of the best science fiction ever written by anybody (as well as an excellent suspense novel, Man Drowning). Their productivity was enormous, too; at one time the Kuttners operated so many pen names that almost any new writer was automatically suspected of being another of their masks. I myself in 1948 received a letter which, once out of the envelope, turned out to begin, “Dear Mr. Kuttner.” I forwarded it to him, thus beginning a ten-year correspondence from which I learned more about writing than I have ever learned from any other person.  p. 97-98

The bulk of Blish’s piece focuses on Kuttner’s plotting skills, and has several quote-worthy passages:

The old pulp magazines cared very little for style or characterization, but they absolutely required that their authors know how to plot. This is a craft that is viewed with indifference, if not with outright scorn, by most publishers of the art story, though there is no objection to it in the slick magazines. Even in science fiction, we have today a whole generation of writers which has grown up unexposed to the rigorous plotting demands of the (now extinct) pulps, considerably to their loss, and the readers’.  p. 95

These days it is considered equally unsatisfactory for the omniscient author to lay out the precedent material, a la Trollope. Kuttner, however, never took any of the technicalities of writing for granted, and after close examination of the machinery, he worked out a way of rehabilitating the omniscient author. His method was to start the story not with the usual narrative hook (“Autumn was descending on U.S. Highway 66 when John met the naked princess’’) but with a genuine sub-crisis, and within the space of about a thousand words develop it into a resounding paradox. While the reader is wondering what the answer to the paradox could possibly be, Kuttner drops the story for about a thousand words of straight lecture on the background of the situation, confident that the reader, captured by the paradox, will sit still for it.  p. 96

If you can find a copy this essay it is worth a read (there is currently one at archive.org that you can borrow for 14 days, but you’ll have to join the queue).

3. It appears that Merril never sold to Campbell again, and most of her subsequent two dozen or so stories sold to secondary markets (bar half a dozen, mostly to F&SF). My tentative deduction is that her reputation is mostly based on her editorial and critical work, and not her fiction.

4. There is information about the Bepo (British Experimental Pile) here.

5. The Analytical Laboratory results for this issue appeared in the April 1949 one. It seems that Campbell only took a decade to work out that longer stories get higher marks:

I suspect that Private Eye did not top this poll as it was too complex, too dark. A pity.  ●

rssrss

Astounding Science-Fiction v32n04, December 1943

ISFDB link
Archive.org link

Other reviews:1
Alva Rogers, A Requiem for Astounding  p. 126-127

_____________________

Editor, John W. Campbell Jr.; Assistant Editor, Catherine Tarrant

Fiction:
The Debt • novelette by E. Mayne Hull
Lost Art • novelette by George O. Smith
Fricassee in Four Dimensions • novelette by P. Schuyler Miller
The Iron Standard • novelette by Henry Kuttner and C. L. Moore [as by Lewis Padgett]
We Print the Truth • novella by Anthony Boucher

Non-fiction:
Cover • by William Timmins
Interior artwork • by Paul Orban (x12), Frank Kramer (x3)
Insects Now • by John W. Campbell, Jr.
The Analytical Laboratory: October 1943
In Times to Come
Elementary, of Course—
• science essay
Master Chemist • science essay by John W. Campbell, Jr. [as by Arthur McCann]
Extraterrestrial Bacteria • science essay by Willy Ley
Brass Tacks • letters

_____________________

The Debt by E. Mayne Hull is the third of her ‘Artur Blord’ series, and sees the return of the alien Skal from the previous story. This one starts with Blord coming upon a ravaged spaceship, where all the men are dead and there is only one hidden survivor, Ellen Reith. All the other women have been taken by the Skal’s henchmen to the Castle of Pleasure. Blord realises that they will soon deduce from the manifest that Reith is missing, and that they will return for her. He calls his office to organise a cover up.
Blord and Reith then travel to a night club on Fassor III, one of the Skal’s business fronts, to track down the missing women. During the journey Blord learns about previous unsuccessful attacks on the Castle of Pleasure by the authorities, and the green ray used to defend it. He is then told by his office that the wreck has been found along with the decoy body put on board by his men.

When Blord and Reith arrive at the nightclub they identify one of the attackers, and Blord kidnaps him in an invisible spaceship. Shortly after this the Skal contacts Blord—he has penetrated Blord’s deceptions—and negotiates for the release of his man.
The rest of the story continues this—rather unlikely—game of move and countermove, climaxing with (spoiler) Blord arranging for a corrupt employee to pass information to the Skal which will enable it to target Blord’s ship. The Skal mindspeaks to Blord shortly before attacking with the green ray—which Blord reflects back to the Castle of Pleasure with a mirror. The story finishes with a raid on the Skal’s underlings where, to avoid a battle, Blord negotiates a financial deal with them. The story then cuts to Blord and Reith having breakfast (!) where he cheerfully tells her that he has had them executed!
This is a readable enough piece but it has a rather ramshackle plot and weak ending. I suspect that Hull is emulating her husband A. E. van Vogt’s work in these ‘Blord’ stories, but the problem is that, while they feel like his work on the surface, they don’t have the underlying wild and complex plot structure which makes some of van Vogt’s word so good. The best story I’ve read by Hull so far is one written in her ‘own’ voice, The Ultimate Wish (Unknown Worlds, February 1943).

Lost Art2 by George O. Smith gets off to a confusing start, lashing about between Sargon of Akkad on Earth six thousand years ago, to near future mankind (who know about a dead Martian civilization from Sargon’s era), to a Martian contemporary of the latter called Atlas. As you can see, it is a struggle to coherently synopsise it—the story doesn’t do much better.
Anyway, after an unnecessary page of this, the story gets going with Atlas the Martian and his son setting up a machine. Although the son has read the manual, Atlas suggests that there is more to it than that . . . .
The story then cuts to present day Mars, where Barney Carroll and James Baler are flying across Mars when they see a glint below: they land, and uncover an ancient Martian tower. After salvaging the device they take it back to base with them, where they start repairing and experimenting with it. As well as the device they also find an instruction manual, which they translate. This doesn’t turn out to be as much help as they hoped, and during testing they find the device exhibits several anomalous properties, which include setting a wall on fire, and later fracturing it with a transmitted hammer blow.

The men’s experimentation alternates with short excerpts where Atlas and his son set up the device and, for the most part, this is moderately entertaining—Smith balances the tech talk with banter like this:

“Yeah, and it’s about as lethal as a sun lamp. D’ye suppose the Martians used to artificially assist their crops by synthetic sunshine?”
[. . .]
“I’d believe anything if this darned gadget were found in a populated district,” said Jim. “But we know that the desert was here when the Martians were here, and that it was just as arid as it is now. They wouldn’t try farming in a place where iron oxide abounds.”
“Spinach?”
“You don’t know a lot about farming, do you?” asked Jim.
“I saw a cow once.”
“That does not qualify you as an expert on farming.”
“I know one about the farmer’s daughter, and—”
“Not even an expert on dirt farming,” continued Jim. “Nope, Barney, we aren’t even close.”  p. 41

Eventually, they learn their experiments have caused electrical grid disruption all over Mars and, at the end of the story, find that the tower (spoiler) is a broadcast power station which served the whole planet. The final joke is that a later human instruction manual for the device wouldn’t be any clearer to the Martians then theirs is to humans.
The story is okay overall but it drags on too long, and it is not entirely lucid (Smith, as in his last story, overdoes the technical detail).

Fricassee in Four Dimensions by P. Schuyler Miller3 has the narrator fishing near a “hobo jungle” when he comes across a tramp. After he gives the tramp one of the fish he has caught, he is amazed by the man’s culinary skills:

I handed him the fish. What he did I still don’t know. There was a sort of twist of his wrist, and the trout was inside out. He flicked here and there with a shining little knife and deposited its plumbing in a hole he had dug beside the fire, with a neat stopper of turf beside it. Then twist—zip—and the trout was inside out again. He hung it on a bush, saw that I was watching him bug-eyed, and turned bright red.
“Sorry,” he mumbled. “Little trick I picked up from a feller in Yuma. Indian. It—bothers people.”  p. 56

The narrator then hires the man—Smitty—and he takes him home. When the narrator’s son and daughter—Mike and Pat—arrive, Smitty magics up some cookies straight away, even though the oven is off. This won’t be the first occasion where Smitty appears to conjure meals out of thin air, and the children later tell their father that he can empty eggs and cans without opening them.
The next phase of the story has Smitty phoning the narrator to tell him that his daughter Pat has gone missing, but that he knows where she has gone. Mike greets his father when the latter quickly returns to the house, and he also seems to know where she has gone:

“She’s all right,” he insisted. “Smitty knows. He’ll get her.” He tried to squirm out of my grip.
“Look here, pal,” I told him. “This is no game. Pat’s only three, and a lot can happen to her before anyone catches up with her, I want to know where she is.”
He could tell I meant it, but it came hard for him. He wouldn’t lie and he didn’t want to tell me. “Well.” he finally admitted, “I guess she went over there.”
“Over where?” It meant nothing to me. “Over to the woods?” We’d been on a picnic the Sunday before, across the river in a grove of pines.
Now the ice was broken, Mike was willing enough to talk. “Gee, no,” he scoffed. “Over there—where Smitty goes.” He waved his arm vaguely. “Like this—”
He hitched up his pants and began to count. Then, in time to the count, he began to sway back and forth from one foot to the other. Back and forth, back, and forth—then suddenly he twisted queerly on his heel—and vanished.  p. 62

So far, so Mimsy Were the Borogoves. However, in this story Mike returns from “over there” to teach his father how to do the trick. When they both arrive in the other world they see two tracks going through the grass, and they follow them to find Pat and Smitty. When they all try to go back home the narrator can’t manage the trick (conveniently), so they camp out over the weekend and explore this unusual world.

On one of these nights away the narrator finds his daughter Pat cuddled up with a “wabbit”, which turns out to be part of a 4-dimensional animal. Smitty subsequently provides a related explanation about his own dimensional/time-travelling abilities, with the obligatory tesseract analogy thrown in.
Once they arrive home (Smitty picks up the narrator and carries him back) they find that Pat has a wabbit with her. Her mother Eleanor takes it away and tells Smitty to get rid of it.
At this point the story becomes a different piece altogether: Eleanor gets involved in catering for visiting dignitaries, but the four chickens they plan to have for dinner are killed and spoiled by the dog. Smitty manages to save the day by cooking a splendid meal using part of the wabbit but, after they have eaten, digestive problems ensue as other-dimensional parts of the wabbit are still alive.
The time-travel/4D gimmick isn’t convincing, and the two different parts do not splice together well.

The Iron Standard by Henry Kuttner and C. L. Moore is another of their stories that gets off to a rather confused start (you get the impression the writer started this before the morning coffee had kicked in). This time we have a spaceship crew (which includes, among others, a Native American called Mike Soaring Eagle4) on an inaugural trip to Venus, where they are short of food due to difficulties with the natives. If they had money (the planet is on the “iron standard”) they could buy what they require—but they don’t, so cannot. Moreover, they cannot get jobs as the tarkomars (the native guilds/unions) require a joining fee.
The story tells of the various schemes the Earthmen try to make some money, and the numerous setbacks they experience because of the natives’ ultra-conservative attitude towards change:

Bronson described how watersheds worked. “Suppose you imported Earth plants and trees and forested the mountains. And built dams to retain your water. You’d have power all the time, and you’d need only a few big stations. And they’d be permanent”
Skottery thought that over. “We have all the power we need.”
“But look at the expense!”
“Our rates cover that.”
“You could make more money—difals and sofals—”
“We have made exactly the same profits for three hundred years,” Skottery explained. “Our net remains constant. It works perfectly. You fail to understand our economic system, I see. Since we have everything we need, there’s no use making more money—not even a fal more.”
“Your competitors—”
“We have only three, and they are satisfied with their profits.”
“Suppose I interest them in my plan?”
“But you couldn’t,” Skottery said patiently. “They wouldn’t be interested any more than I am. I’m glad you dropped in. May you be worthy of your father’s name.”
“Ye soulless fish!” Bronson yelled, losing his temper. “Is there no red blood in your green-skinned carcass? Does no one on this world know what fight means?” He hammered a fist into his palm. “I wouldn’t be worthy of the old Seumas Bronson’s name unless I took a poke at that ugly phiz of yours right now—”
Skottery had pressed a button. Two large Venusians appeared. The head of Water Power pointed to Bronson.
“Remove it,” he said.  p. 85-86

Eventually (spoiler) the Earthmen prevail by disrupting the Venusians’ monetary system by selling pep pills, and the takomars are forced to pay them to stop.

This is one of those stories that is probably more interesting for its economic ideas and social attitudes than it is for the story but, while reading it, I found it hard to ignore the implicit assumptions about human exceptionalism and the superiority of the capitalist system. Normally I don’t have much truck with political or social analysis of seventy-odd year old stories through a contemporary lens, but I suspect that current day readers are unlikely to have a sanguine attitude towards the Earthmen’s disruption of a successful non-capitalist system (it’s hard to see how the status quo would persist after the story’s end). How ironic that nowadays we would fall over ourselves to investigate how they make their balanced society work.
For those that don’t want to think about the politics of the story, it is an entertaining enough read.

Completing the issue’s fiction is We Print the Truth by Anthony Boucher, which has this blurb from Campbell:

WARNING—Pure Fantasy. This is a tale of pure fantasy, run as an experiment. If you don’t like an occasional fantasy, the experiment ends right here. But this is a story of a newspaper that always printed the truth—for anything it printed became truth!  p. 125

After Unknown (Astounding’s sister fantasy magazine) folded with the October 1943 issue, Campbell was left with a considerable inventory of unused stories. In an attempt to use this already paid-for work, and perhaps to keep the magazine’s spirit alive until it could be revived after the war, Campbell would slip suitable stories from its inventory into Astounding over the following months, and requested reader feedback. This practice eventually stopped, and I’ll discuss the whys and wherefores in the issues to come.
The story itself starts in newspaper editor John MacVeagh’s office, where he and the local undertaker, chief of police, priest, alcoholic, etc., are having their regular weekly bull session. Their conversations always end in a discussion about God (Jake the undertaker is an atheist), but tonight Phil Rogers bursts in to tell them that his aunt has been murdered. They all quickly disperse to do their jobs, and Molly, MacVeagh’s Girl Friday at the newspaper, manages to convince him to let her get the story as, we find out later, MacVeagh is romantically interested in the murdered woman’s niece, Laura.
After they leave, MacVeagh goes to see his printer to tell him that the weekly paper will produce an extra edition to cover the murder:

“I’m sorry, John,” Whalen said gravely. His voice was the deepest MacVeagh had ever heard in ordinary speech. “I’m leaving tonight.”
“Leaving—” MacVeagh was almost speechless. Granted that tramp printers were unpredictable, still after an announcement such as he’d just made—
“I must, John. No man is master of his own movements. I must go, and tonight. That is why I wished to see you. I want to know your wish.”
“My wish? But look, Whalen: We’ve got work to do. We’ve got to—”
[. . .]
“You never did get my name straight, John,” Whalen went on.
“It was understandable in all that confusion the day you hired me after Luke Sellers had retired. But Whalen is only my first name. I’m really Whalen Smith. And it isn’t quite Whalen—”
“What difference does that make?”
“You still don’t understand? You don’t see how some of us had to take up other trades with the times? When horses went and you still wanted to work with metal, as an individual worker and not an ant on an assembly line— So you don’t believe I can grant your wish, John?”
“Of course not. Wishes—”
“Look at the book, John.”
MacVeagh looked. He read:
.
At this point in the debate his majesty waxed exceeding wroth and smote the great oaken table with a mighty oath. “Nay,” he swore, “all of our powers they shall not take from us. We will sign the compact, but we will not relinquish all. For unto us and our loyal servitors must remain—’’
.
“So what?” he said. “Fairy tales?”
Whalen Smith smiled. “Exactly. The annals of the court of His Majesty King Oberon.”
“Which proves what?”
“You read it, didn’t you? I gave you the eyes to read—”
John MacVeagh looked back at the book. He had no great oaken table to smite, but he swore a mighty oath. For the characters were again strange and illegible.
“I can grant your wish, John,” said Whalen Smith with quiet assurance.  p. 130-131

After this strange encounter, MacVeagh goes back to the office, where Mr Hitchcock, an influential local businessman who is a relative of the murdered woman, confronts MacVeagh, and attempts to pressure mim into soft-peddling the story. MacVeagh is having none of it, and his attitude hardens when he finds out that Hitchcock, Phil Rogers and Laura (Hitchcock’s daughter) were alone in the house when, supposedly, a tramp broke in and killed the aunt. The pair depart on bad terms, and MacVeagh goes back to see Whalen. He know what he wants to wish for:

“Did you ever look at our masthead? Sometimes you can see things so often that you never really see them. But look at that masthead. It’s got a slogan on it, under where it says ‘Grover Sentinel.’ Old Jonathan Minter put that slogan there, and that slogan was the first words he ever spoke to me when he took me on here.
[. . .]
“The Sentinel’s battle cry: We print the truth. So this is my wish, and if anybody had a stack of Bibles handy I’d swear to it on them: May the Sentinel never depart from that slogan. May that slogan itself be true, in the fullest meaning of truth. May there never be lies or suppression or evasions in the Sentinel because always and forever we print the truth.”
It was impossible to see what Whalen Smith did with his hands. They moved too nimbly. For a moment it seemed as though their intricate pattern remained glowing in the air. Then it was gone, and Whalen said, “I have never granted a nobler wish. Nor,” he added, “a more dangerous one.”
He was gone before MacVeagh could ask what he meant.  p. 134

MacVeagh soon realizes the consequences of his wish when he has a testy encounter with Phil and Laura on the way to see the chief of police. Phil makes fun of a typo in the paper saying Old Man Herkimer, who has just died, was 17 (instead of 77). Soon after this Jake the undertaker arrives at the chief’s office raving about Old Man Herkimer’s body. MacVeagh goes with him to the funeral parlour, and sees that the old man looks like a 17-year-old.
MacVeagh tests his theory that this is because of the news story by rehiring Luke, his retired printer, and placing a piece in the next edition about a freak storm and damage to a local statue. When these events come to pass MacVeagh decides to use his power for good. Initially he makes the murderer confess (it was the butler who did it!), and then sorts out a simmering local conflict between Hitchcock and his workers at the local plant. Then there is “news” of a benefactor giving the paper a huge donation so it can go from weekly to daily publication . . . .

At this point the story accelerates through MacVeagh’s subsequent successes in improving the life of the town, before Molly (who is the only other one apart from Luke who knows what is happening at the paper) sounds a note of caution, referencing a E. Nesbit book, and pointing out that wishes always have a catch. This falls on deaf ears as MacVeagh has been seduced by the positive comments he has heard in town (“this burg is just about perfect”).
Things start falling apart when Hitchcock invites MacVeagh to dinner. He attends, hoping to see Laura, and he eventually manages to slip outside with her. They talk about his improved position in the town, and she mentions that he’ll need to think about settling down. Taking his cue from her, MacVeagh says that marriage is a wonderful thing but, before he can profess his love to her, she tells him that she is soon to be married. MacVeagh can’t control himself and blurts out how he feels, but she makes it clear she isn’t interested in him. MacVeagh goes to a local bar and gets drunk, and then goes to the office to set the type for the social notes column: he announces his and Laura’s engagement.
Later on MacVeagh learns that he has stolen Laura from Johannsen, the likeable plant manager, and he also finds out about another problem caused by a review of a local theatre play (the headline is “Rio Rhythm stinks”). Rather than learning the obvious lesson from these two events, MacVeagh doubles down, and decides to use his power to end the war.

The rest of the story develops in a way that is both expected and unexpected. Although the war stops in Grover, it doesn’t elsewhere, and the story later cuts to a distant FBI office where an agent is tasked to investigate the town and why it is not meeting its war commitments. This epistolary (diary) section has the FBI agent travelling to Grover and, on his way there, stopping at a garage where he meets a strange old man working as a blacksmith (although the man adds that he works at “all kind of metal trades, printing mostly”). At one point they talk about the power of the press:

He had a lot of strange ideas, that old boy. Mostly about truth. How truth was relative, which there’s nothing new in that idea, though he dressed it up fancy. And something about truth and spheres of influence—how a newspaper, for instance, aimed at printing The Truth, which there is no such thing as, but actually tried, if it was honest, to print the truth (lower case) for its own sphere of influence. Outside the radius of its circulation, truth might, for another editor, be something quite else again. And then he said, to himself like. “I’d like to hear sometime how that wish came out,” which didn’t mean anything but sort of ended that discussion.  p. 159

This is Whalen, of course, who appears in the story on three or four occasions. During one of these, he grants a wish to a man who wants a jar of beer that never empties. Later we find out that the man dies from this. By the time “Whaling” (as he is now called) makes his final appearance, we realise that he is at best an ambivalent actor, and possibly an evil one.
Meantime MacVeagh feels the strain of writing news that keeps the world at peace (at least inside Grover), and finds out that Johannsen and Laura are seeing each other behind his back. Phil Rogers then turns up at the office to kill him: he has learned what is happening from Luke the printer—who has relapsed into alcoholism—and MacVeagh is only saved when Johannsen arrives unexpectedly.
Things continue to deteriorate until Molly (who has just attempted suicide) convinces MacVeagh to take a break away from the town. When he leaves he finds out the rest of the world is still at war, and is picked up by an FBI man who wants to know what is happening in the town. MacVeagh only just escapes, and eventually arrives back at the office looking like a tramp, having been on the run for some time. He tells Molly he knows what he has to do . . . .
This is an impressive piece, and one that becomes more complex as it progresses: initially it appears to be a linearly told, single point-of-view wish-fulfillment story, but develops into a piece where portions of the story are omitted (“If it’s all right with you, we’ll skip pretty fast over the next part of the story. The days of triumph never make interesting reading”); different points of views emerge; and the story gets much darker. It also addresses a number of issues: the downside of magic wishes; how absolute power corrupts; the limits of free will; and the power of the press/fake news! Interweaved with the latter are numerous biblical quotations, and at least a couple of conversations with the local priest about the power of God.
The story is Boucher’s best since The Compleat Werewolf, and I hope that this time around he gets the Retro-Hugo. (I commend those who nominated this work—I hadn’t read it at the time.)

The Cover by William Timmins attempts to show the invisible spaceship from the Hull story (the black border makes this a very dark cover).
The Interior artwork in this issue is nearly all by Paul Orban (he contributes a dozen illustrations to Frank Kramer’s three) and they all look pretty mundane—there are too many drawings that could have come from any contemporary magazine (see the ones above for the Boucher story), and those that look interesting are squashed into quarter of a page to save space. Kramer’s are better.
Noted in passing: the title page illustration is reduced in size and positioned away from the page edge.5
Insects Now by John W. Campbell, Jr. is a weird editorial that starts with the description of an aircraft bombsight and then over-analogises both:

Save for [the bombardier’s eyes]—the whole system closely resembles a stupendous stinging insect, guiding itself, controlling, leveling, directing its own flight, sighting its prey, and accurately delivering the sting.
The nerves are copper wires, the ganglia electron tubes and the sense-organ gyroscopes, variable capacitors, sensitive metal membranes, the muscles—of two sorts—are motors. There are the great flying muscles, the four main engines, and the more delicate trimming muscles, the electric motors that control the tail surfaces, the wing tabs and ailerons—and release the deadly sting.  p. 6

Campbell goes on to say that systems like this may have their own eyes in the future—he seems to edge towards a description of robotic weapons—but then finishes with this, which telegraphs the appearance of Simak’s forthcoming ‘City’ stories:

Still they’ll be insects, unknowing, stupid things, for all their size. Bees to gather honey or hornets to sting.
But—how long till men make a dog-thing that knows of its own existence, and of its builder, and helps him consciously?  p. 6

The Analytical Laboratory: October 1943 was discussed in the review of that issue.6
In Times to Come trails a new story by Hal Clement called Technical Error, which, intriguingly, will feature elliptical bolts tightened in elliptical holes (well, intriguing if you are engineering/science inclined!) Maybe the magazine should now be described as “the one with elliptical bolts” rather than “the one with rivets”.

Elementary, of Course— is a single page filler that lists all the elements used in aircraft manufacture.

Master Chemist by John W. Campbell, Jr. is a science essay about microbiological production techniques including the use of yeast, which is discussed in some detail. I was surprised to read this:

Recently, a yeast strain has been developed which produces proteins—regular animal-food proteins. This strain has been subdivided, and sub-bred for further specializations, till strains producing a high concentration of protein—higher percentage, in fact, than animal tissues—have been produced which also produce flavor compounds very closely akin to those of beef. The resultant washed, dried yeast tastes like beef, and nourishes like beef! The texture is wrong, naturally—but a yeast-beef stew strongly resembles the true beef stew in flavor, texture and nourishment value. The great difference is that the yeast can be grown in vats in one-ton lots in twelve hours from molasses and ammonia, almost without human labor, while the cow takes months, acres, and much labor.
Since beef flavor has been produced, presumably there is no need of monotony. And, of course, no particular reason why the flavorstrains should be held down to imitations of known meat flavors!  p. 107

There is also discussion of penicillin, which was replacing inferior contemporary drugs like sulfa, but was problematical to produce:

At present, penicillin is produced by an extremely expensive, laborious and slow method, involving the culture of the penicillium mold in separate one-gallon culture bottles, followed by extraction of the active substance from the resultant culture liquor. The production per colony is small, and the mold is sensitive to temperature changes and variations of the culture medium.
The work is being pressed because of the very great value of the penicillin as a therapeutic agent.
There are two lines of attack on the problem of greater production, and both are being followed up vigorously. Efforts to analyze the structure of the penicillin are being made, so that synthesis can be attempted. There is always the possibility that it will turn out to be a substance which, like quinine, cannot be practically assembled chemically. (On the other hand, it may turn out to be actually identical with some, long-known substance, synthesized years ago, but never considered a drug. Nicotinic acid, described by chemists years ago, turned out to be one of the B-complex vitamins.)  p. 194-195

Extraterrestrial Bacteria by Willy Ley is an interesting but short account about (ultimately negative) attempts to find bacteria in meteorites.7

Brass Tacks leads off with a letter from Malcolm Jameson, the writer, about the inaccurate description of the Ainu people in Anthony Boucher’s story, One-Way Trip.
There are a couple of other letters in this short column—the most interesting is Robert Silburn’s (he writes from Aberystwyth in Wales, and we are probably lucky a U-boat didn’t get it). He comments on a number of matters, including the number of new names appearing in the magazine (unlike the bad old days), and that the interior artwork could be better:

Orban is the only artist I really like; Kramer’s originality seems to be running dry, while Fax doesn’t seem ever to have had any. Your new chap, Williams, is indistinguishable from Kolliker, but might come to something. I forgot to mention the Isips. Their slick, streamlined style is a joy to the eye.  p. 124

The beginning of his letter is about Leiber’s Gather, Darkness!:

I want to say it’s one of your best yet. It has the same theme of a scientific-religious feudalism that has cropped up in one or two recent stories, but the idea has never been as fully exploited before. And its a perfect example of the constant mutation that ASF has undergone continually under the “Campbell Regime.” Two years ago, “Gather Darkness” would have gone automatically into Unknown. Nowadays the tales in Astounding are almost all of the “wacky” variety, with a maximum of miracles and a minimum of explanation.  p. 123

An issue worth getting for Boucher’s novella, and to a lesser extent, the Kuttner/Moore.  ●

_____________________

1. Alva Rogers has this to say in A Requiem for Astounding:

December rounded out the tenth full year of Astounding under the Street & Smith label and also marked the end of the most notable years of the so-called Golden Age. The issue, as such, contained nothing outstanding with the possible exception of a long novelette by Anthony Boucher which had been originally intended for the recently deceased and universally mourned Unknown Worlds, “We Print the Truth.”  p. 127

He adds that Miller’s tale is “amusing”, before going on to discuss the “Golden Age” comment above:

Tradition and nostalgia have ineradicably fixed upon the years currently under discussion the designation of the Golden Age, but if we must chop the time-line of Astounding into eras, or ages, or whatever, for the sake of accuracy this period should rightfully be labeled the Second Golden Age. To mark the demarcation line between a Golden Age and the preceeding and following years is an extremely difficult task; actually, almost impossible. A magazine doesn’t change radically from one month to the next in the ordinary course of events. One exception to this is where one publisher or editor takes over from another.
When Street & Smith took over Astounding from the Clayton chain and installed F. Orlin Tremaine as editor, the policy and appearance of the magazine were completely changed from the Clayton Astounding, and the ensuing three or four years constitute what is essentially the first Golden Age of Astounding. Where it ended and the interregnum commenced is hard to say. The last couple of years of Tremaine’s tenure fell off somewhat from the high level at which he had held the magazine during the first two years of his editorship, and John W. Campbell, Jr. took roughly a year and a half to really get a solid grip on things when he became editor. When he finally did get things going the way he wanted them to, the second Golden Age came into being.
It is easy enough to ascribe the beginning of this second Golden Age to the July, 1939 issue; the hazard sets in when you attempt to pinpoint the ending. I’m going to meet this problem head on, and pinpoint it at December, 1943. This brought the richest years of the Golden Age to a close. But to satisfy those who are unwilling to restrict the Golden Age to these few short years, I will concede that the next two years could be considered a Final Phase of the Golden Age, with the magazine settled on a moderately high plateau of competence, from which the outstanding and classic stories reared like isolated mountain peaks.
The features that distinguished the years 1939-1943 were exciting new ideas, talented new authors, refurbished old authors, and a deluge of exceptional stories from their typewriters. This phenomenon was the unique property of these few short years, but the momentum begun then carried the main aspects of the Golden Age onward for a few more years.
There is another aspect of science fiction, particularly the science fiction found in Astounding from 1934 through the middle forties, that will be briefly discussed here; an aspect that materially contributed to both the Golden Ages and the years between. This is the much misunderstood Sense of Wonder. It is true that most of the stories of this period lack the literary polish and sophistication of the contemporary output, but, oh! the Sense of Wonder, the breathless adventure and the boundless imagination they had instead. This was what made so much of the older science fiction so intensely memorable and classic. Today it is virtually impossible to generate the same enthusiasm for a story that could be generated ten, fifteen, or twenty years ago.
In the final analysis a Sense of Wonder is the priceless possession of the youthful discoverer of science fiction; it may last but for a short fleeting instant, or it may stay with him for a number of years. At any rate, it is sooner or later lost, seldom to be recovered.  p. 128

2. This is listed by ISFDB as a ‘Venus Equilateral’ story but the only connection to the main series is a one-line reference to Don Channing, the station director. According to ISFDB it was not included in the original collection, Venus Equilateral, but was added into The Complete Venus Equilateral in the mid-70s, along with two other stories, The External Triangle and Identity.

3. Although Miller’s and “Padgett’s” pieces are listed as short stories, they are approximately 9500 and 9800 words long (by OCR), so we would now consider them novelettes (the Smith story is 9800 words long: I assume that Campbell listed fiction less than 10,000 words long as a short stories—and presume that the Smith rounded up above this by his counting methods).

4. Mike Soaring Eagle is called “Redskin” by the other crew members, but is one of the more prominent characters. It is interesting to note that, at one point in the story, he is the one who describes the Venusians’ ancestor worship and ultra-conservative resistance to change, and explains how minor alterations to a culture can have a major effect. He does this without any reference to what happened to his own people.

5. This issue’s contents page (top) compared with last issue’s (bottom):

6. The Analytical Laboratory results for this issue appeared in the February 1944 issue:

Campbell does not give a coherent account of what the readers have said: his initial comments indicate that the majority don’t want fantasy, but he finishes by saying they do if it is well written. He seems unable to disambiguate that the readers may like Boucher’s story but don’t want fantasy in the magazine.
In The Annotated Guide to Unknown & Unknown Worlds (Starmont House, 1991), p. 154, Stefan Dziemianowicz states that the Boucher story got the highest AnLab score of all the fantasies that were subsequently transferred from Unknown’s inventory to Astounding.

7. The Wikipedia article on Panspermia is here.  ●

rssrss

Tor.com Short Fiction, January-February 2019

Other reviews:
Greg Hullender and Eric Wong, Rocket Stack Rank1
Jason McGregor, Featured Futures (+The Song)

Editors, Ann VanderMeer (x3), Beth Meacham (x2), Marco Palmieri, Lindsey Hall, Ellen Datlow.2

_____________________

Fiction:
Beyond the El • short story by John Chu ∗∗∗
Deriving Life • novelette by Elizabeth Bear
His Footsteps, in Darkness and Light • novelette by Mimi Mondal
Circus Girl, the Hunter, and Mirror Boy • novelette by JY Yang
Articulated Restraint • short story by Mary Robinette Kowal
Old Media • short story by Annalee Newitz

January/February stories not included in the collection:
The Last Voyage of Skidbladnir • short story by Karin Tidbeck
The Song • short story Erinn L. Kemper +

Non-fiction:
Interior artwork • by Dadu Shin, Mary Haasdyk (x2), Kashmira Sarode, Ashley Mackenzie, Jasu Hu, Soufiane Mengad, Victor Mosquera

_____________________

For some years now the publisher Tor has spent a chunk of their marketing budget providing online fiction and non-fiction content.3 The stories (which come from different editors) usually appear every week or two on the company website, and have featured heavily in recent years’ awards ballots and Year’s Bests (unsurprising as the stories are free, and their payment rate is far above Asimov’s, F&SF, and the other magazines.)
Notwithstanding their award success I could never get into the habit of reading the stories as I don’t like fiction that is only available as web pages (I want PDFs),4 and am not organised enough to visit the site regularly. Fortunately, some bright spark at Tor thought it would be a good idea to periodically collect the stories and issue them as a free ebook (and also send subscribers a notification email and download link for future issues)—give that person a raise.
The first ‘issue’ covers January and February 2019, or at least that is what it says on the cover. The problem is that there were eight stories published on Tor.Com in the first two months of this year but the collection only has six of them, missing out the Tidbeck and Kemper stories listed above. I don’t know why they did this, and note that the March-April issue is also missing a story. Not a good start.
The ebook contains only the stories and a a single page of artwork for each.

Dadu Shin

The first story is Beyond the El by John Chu, which is about Connor, a “food crafter” in, presumably, some futuristic restaurant. One evening a diner (his estranged sister) requests that he prepare the most expensive and complicated dish on the menu:

The Chrysler Building is a deconstructed paella composed of discrete floors that become ever lighter and more delicate as they approach the building’s crystalline spire. Garlic and saffron perfume the air as he prepares all the layers from the grouper at the bottom to the clear tomato distillate at the top at once. Various proteins transform from raw to poached as a deft gesture of his hand lifts them off their plates. At a glance, a pot of water begins to simmer and the water is infused with flavors from fish bones and shrimp shells. Within minutes, the water is transformed into savory stock. Grains of rice swirl about an invisible center. They swell and congeal as they absorb the stock that he makes rain down on them. Meanwhile, with another deft gesture, tomatoes dissolve then evaporate. Their clear condensate drips into a gelatin that Connor has crafted in the meantime.  p. 13

Against the background of Connor’s work and personal lives, a family drama plays out which involves him trying to recreate his dead mother’s dumplings (she didn’t leave the recipe), while dealing with his unpleasant sister and their mother’s estate.
At the end, Connor (whose hopes are temporarily raised when his sister gives him what appears to be his mother’s recipe book) learns to let go.
This is technically well done, generally polished (although “simultaneously prepared” in the passage above would avoid the dangling “at once” at the end of the sentence), and I enjoyed it—but this is essentially a mainstream work dressed up as SF (or fantasy if you like).

Mary Haasdyk

Deriving Life by Elizabeth Bear has as its protagonist Marq, whose partner Tamar is dying in hospital. We later find out (spoiler) that Tamar is a “host” for Atticus who is, we find later (there is a lot of back end data dumping in this one) a “Tenant”:

“I have a sense of the Tenants’ history.”
It had been before I was born: The lead paleoanthropologist and two others working on several intact Homo neanderthalensis cadavers that had been discovered in a melting glacier had all developed the same kind of slow-growing cancer. That had been weird enough, though by then we knew about contagious forms of cancer—in humans, in wolves, in Tasmanian devils. It got weirder when the cancers had begun, the researchers said, to talk to them.
Which probably would have been dismissed as crackpottery, except the cancer also cured that one paleobotanist’s diabetes, and suddenly they all seemed to have a lot of really good, coherent ideas about how that particular Neanderthal culture operated.
What a weird, archaic word, glacier.  p. 40

After this discovery humans volunteered to host the Tenants in exchange for having their chronic health problems managed, or life spans extended—which is what Tamar did before he met Marq.
This all, as I’ve said already, comes late on in the story, and up until this point the tale is overwhelmingly about Marq’s struggle to come to terms with his partner’s impending death: there are scenes that flashback to how he and Tamar met (Tamar confesses to being a “zombie, a podling, a puppethead”); a trip they take to an undiscovered waterfall (“There were rainbows, though, shifting when you turned your head”), etc.
The scenes in the present describe (a) Marq’s visits to Tamar in the hospital (who eventually refuses him admission), (b) his conversations with his own “transition specialist” (Marq has also applied to be a host), and (c) his meetings with his other partner Robin.
Most of this, I am afraid to say, is mawkish, self-pitying fare:

“You’re healthy, Marq.” Tamar says.
I know. I know how lucky I am. How few people at my age, in this world we made, are as lucky as I am. How amazing that this gift of health was wasted on somebody as busted as me.
What if Tamar had been healthy? What if Tamar were outliving me?
Tamar deserved to live, and Tamar deserved to be happy.
I was just taking up space somebody lovable could have been using. The air I was breathing, the carbon for my food . . . those could have benefited somebody else.
“You make me worthy of being loved.” I take a breath. “You make me want to make myself worthy of you.”
“You were always lovable, Marq.” Their hand moves softly against mine.
“I don’t know how to be me without you,” I say.
“I can’t handle that for you right now,” Tamar says. “I have to die.”
“I keep thinking I can . . . figure this out. Solve it somehow.”
“You can’t derive people the way you derive functions, Marq.”
I laugh, shakily. I can’t do this. I have to do this.  p. 35

I’m already trying to change myself so somebody will love me better.
So that I will love me better.
Evangeline [the transition specialist] says, “We need what we need. Judging ourselves doesn’t change it. Sometimes a hug and a cookie right now mean more than a grand gesture at some indeterminate point in the future.”
“What if we make an irrevocable decision to get that hug and that cookie?”
Evangeline lifts her shoulders, lets them fall. “My job is to make sure that you’re making an educated decision about the costs and benefits of the cookie. Not to tell you how much you should be willing to pay for it.”  p. 46

Basically, if you are up for twenty-five pages of someone not coping with their partner dying, and generally wandering around with a sucking chest wound, then this will be right up your street. It wasn’t up mine.
I should mention that there are other things I didn’t like, such as the clunky and telegraphic prose at the start of the story:

Tamar avoiding thinking about that is the same as Tamar thinking that I should go away. Stop taking my drugs. Maybe file for divorce. Tamar wants to think there’s a way this could hurt me less. They’re thinking of me, really.  p. 29

There are also four “think” or “thinkings” in that passage, which is about two too many. I could have also done without the foody details: “I start a pot of tea, and though I usually drink it plain, today I put milk and sugar in”, “To a background of white wine and pistachio and chickpea salad”, “Everything about the salad is perfect and perfectly dressed. Robin did the chickpeas themselves”, all of which, along with the endless navel gazing and emotional incontinence, makes this feel even more affected.
Only the weird but interesting concept of a sentient cancer saved this one from null points (Eurovision tonight).5

Kashmira Sarode

His Footsteps, in Darkness and Light by Mimi Mondal is set in India, and has as its narrator Binu, a trapeze artist who also acts in an Aladdin play at the Majestic Oriental Circus. The play is directed by another character, Shehzad:

[As] Alladin, all I had to do was to put on a pair of satin pants and a skullcap, and parrot a series of memorized lines. I had never met an Arab street urchin, nor had an inkling what all the words meant, but neither had anyone in the audience. I bellowed, “Ya Allah!” and “Shukr hai!” and “Dafa ho ja, shaitaan!” at my cues. The girl who trained the parakeets doubled as the princess in a shiny ghagra and choli, adorned with tawdry sequins. Johuree, our proprietor and ringmaster, completed the cast as the villainous Zafar, dressed in a moth-eaten velvet cloak.
It was an almost ridiculous performance, but it turned into the most renowned act of the Majestic Oriental Circus, all at the touch of Shehzad Marid. As the three of us hemmed and hawed through our scripted gibberish, the jinni would emerge from his lamp in clouds of curling smoke. Illuminated by our cheap stage lights, the clouds would take the shape of a magnificent palace, the gaping maw of a cave, raging armies on horseback that crashed into the audience until our entire circus tent would erupt with gasps, applause, and cries of horror and disbelief. A small child could hold open his palm and receive a dancing houree, crafted immaculately of ice as the clouds condensed. Then they billowed up again—into monsters never heard of; swooping rocs; clerics whose voices soared in prayer across minarets that pierced the sky above a faraway, mythical city; hundreds of jinn, and back to the only one. It was a show unlike anything offered by any rival circus company in our land.  p. 61-62

After the show, the circus continues on its travels to perform at a raja’s daughter’s wedding. Here, the narrator Binu sees the divine dancers, the devadasis, and one of them catches his eye. More or less concurrently, we also find out that (spoiler) Shehzad is really a jinni who lives in the lamp used in the play:

From the stories people tell, even those in our own hack show, the lamp sounds like a prison. The listener imagines himself being suffocated, neck twisted, limbs folded at painful angles, squeezed into a box too small to contain his body and left there to wait for decades. But the listener of the tale is human—imprisoned already in his withering flesh and bone, the measured years that are given to him. The human mind can barely fathom the bond between its own body and soul. What would it grasp of the relationship between a jinni and his lamp? What could I—hardly a philosopher, never having read a book, barely literate enough to scribble my own name—grasp of it?
In our two years of friendship, I had learned every detail of Shehzad Marid’s humanity. There was no man, or woman, that I knew better. I could read each of his smiles, each raised eyebrow, each cryptic comment for exactly what it was. But I had also learned that his humanity was mere performance. He was relieved to shed it, as I was to remove my circus costumes and makeup.  p. 67

The rest of the story (spoiler) revolves around a slight plot where the devadasis who caught Binu’s eye comes to him asking for help to escape. When Shehzad comes out of his lamp and discovers this he is not impressed, stating there are worse things than being a slave—and worse masters. The climax occurs when the caravan leaves the palace and is beset by a terrible dust storm caused by a goddess angry at the theft. She only agrees to spare the caravan if Binu will give her the jinn, and he eventually makes a deal where they will both serve her for half of his remaining lifetime.
This is a pleasant enough tale with good local colour but it is slight, and needs a more substantial plot.

Ashley Mackenzie

Circus Girl, the Hunter, and Mirror Boy by JY Yang opens with the Lynette in the bathroom where, instead of her reflection in the mirror, she sees a young boy. Later on there is some backstory (is there a prequel?) about how “Mirror Boy” appeared at a critical point in her life but how, after she left her job as an escape artist in a circus and moved on, he disappeared. Now he is back.
When Lynette rejoins her roommate for breakfast there is news:

All was quiet except for the chittering of the newsprinter, spooling its thin scroll onto the dining table. When it stopped, Shane tore off the printout and scanned its fuss-less, tiny text. “Great squid. There’s been another murder.”
“Murder?” I said, not really processing the words.
“Yes. In Darlingfort. Probably that same serial killer that’s been going around.” She turned the chit towards me. “Here, look. Seem like anyone you know?  p. 86

When Mirror Boy next speaks to Lynette he tells her that all the other victims of the killer were, like her, his “refuges”. She is the last one left, and he urges her to run because, if she dies, so does he.
Lynette, in an effort to find out what is going on, takes a trip by gondola to a flooded building (this world is a drowned one) where she meets a witch called Chrissa. She deduces that Lynette is infected with a wraith, and forces it to appear:

I looked at the lines and glyphs spread across the floor. “Is it going to hurt him? I don’t want to hurt him.”
“Oh, honey.” Chrissa shook her head. “It won’t hurt him. It’s for me to see him and talk to him. If he wants to talk.”
I gingerly tiptoed into the circle, careful not to disturb the still-wet lines.
Mirror Boy stood in front of me, fully clad in a shabby red t-shirt and jeans.
I’d never seen him like this, and it sent a trill of sadness and betrayal through me.
“I’m sorry,” he said. He was just a child, scuffing the toe of one beat-up shoe against the heel of the other.
“Why didn’t you tell me any of this?”
“I’m sorry,” he repeated.
Chrissa knelt and chanted softly over the charm circle, invoking Kraken, invoking Leviathan. “Neither spine nor ribcage, neither collarbones nor hips, the eyes that see in the watery dark, the mouths that open in the deep.” Her handiwork slid from glistening black to iridescent silver, and the lines sang as they came to life, each circular glyph ringing a different note. The chorus of bell tones raised my flesh in tingling waves.
“Alright,” Chrissa said, matter-of-factly. She stood and struck gray dust from her hands as the charm circle hummed. “Let’s see what we got.”
She stepped in, looked into the mirror, and melted. “Oh, honey. Look at him. He’s just a baby.”
“Yeah,” I said, mouth dry. He was a baby. I’d been a baby back then, too.
Neither of us knew what we were doing, flailing through this world.
Chrissa and her marshmallow heart were already gone. I should have known this would happen. Her voice was bright and airy like she was talking to a small, soft animal. “Hello. What’s your name?”
“I don’t have one.” He looked to me for reassurance. “She calls me Mirror Boy.”  p. 97-98

After Chrissa questions Mirror Boy (spoiler), she identifies the killer as Mirror Boy’s twin brother, and that Mirror Boy was someone who died by drowning, the point of near similarity he has with all his refuges.
At this point the story switches to the killer’s point of view and we find out why he is hunting his brother, before it changes back to Lynette for the climactic chase scene.
There are some nice touches in this fantasy (the drowned world setting, the mentions of Kraken and Leviathan, etc.) but the background is a little weak (this isn’t helped by the odd newsprinter at breakfast, one of the few obvious differences in this world). More importantly, the story’s structure is a mess, with far too much of the story’s plot coming at the back end of the story, not to mention the very late introduction of other points of view. Perhaps the twin brother should have made an earlier appearance, which would also have improved the low energy start (the first eight pages are ploddingly mundane). Nevertheless, I’d be interested to see further stories in this world.

Jasa Hu

Articulated Restraint by Mary Robinette Kowal has astronaut doctor Ruby Donaldson turn up at a lunar neutral buoyancy lab (a big water tank on the Moon where astronauts practice EVA procedures) to find out that there has been an accident involving an orbiting platform and a docking rocket which misfired. The team now have sixteen hours to work out how to get the crew off, and are about to test a procedure in the tank. There are two complicating factors: (a) Ruby has a badly twisted ankle from last night’s dancing, and (b) the EVA suits take hours to reconfigure for other crew members. Because of the latter factor Ruby decides to continue with the planned EVA rehearsal, but as she suits up she realises her leg is in worse shape than she thought. She doesn’t tell anyone, and then one of the other four astronauts can’t get a seal.
The rest of the story (not much of a spoiler) is an absorbing enough account of the tricky procedure and the difficulties the team have to overcome. Ruby successfully completes the dummy run, but when she comes out of the pool the rest of the team discover she is badly injured and they have to cut off part of her suit. Ruby resolves to do better in the future.
This is, I guess, an okay story, but why would anyone want to read about rehearsal of a rescue mission rather than the real thing? And the fact that she injured herself dancing and then concealed her injury is, by turns, banal and unforgiveable (who wants to work with an injured and deceitful crewmember in space?)
I suspect this isn’t a standalone story but an extract from a longer work.1 (Oh, and it is set in an alternate timeline where Earth has been hit by a meteor.)

Soufiane Mengad

Old Media by Annalee Newitz is a story about John, an ex-slave in 2145, which begins with him making out with another man in the employees only area of his work while a female co-worker makes sarcastic comments. After this there is a scene in John’s home, which he shares with Med, a robot, and then one where John goes to the library. The story concludes with John and Med together again in their apartment. John wants to have sex with Med: she declines, but agrees to sleep with him. This involves an unusual powering down of her systems.
This supposedly futuristic slice-of-life is not remotely convincing because all the characters sound and behave like they would today:

“How’s [the?] job going?” Med divided her attention between John and whatever she was previewing.
“Pretty good. I keep hooking up with Michael, but he’s starting to annoy me.”
“I can’t even keep track of your hookups. Which one is Michael, again?”
“Dinosaur hair guy.”
“Oh yeah!” Med stopped streaming and took her hand off the charging pad. “He sounded nice?”
“He’s nice but he’s just . . . I dunno. He asks too many boring questions.”
“Like what?”
John tried to come up with a good way to explain it. “He asked about my [slave] brand. Which—why would you ask somebody about that after fucking them? So rude.”
Med didn’t pick up on his sarcasm, or she chose to ignore it. “I can see why he might be curious. Why do you keep it if you don’t want to talk about it?”
“Why do you tell people that you’re a bot if you don’t want them to make snotty comments about it?” His voice rose in anger he hadn’t intended to express.
“You know why. Because fuck those fuckers.” Delivered utterly without sarcasm. John had to laugh.  p. 144

This is supposed to be a conversation between a human and a robot a hundred and twenty odd years in the future (there is also a reference to a “super good friend” later on). I know that most contemporary SF is really about the present, but give me a break.1

Victor Mosquera

As I mentioned above, there are two stories published on Tor.com during the period covered by the collection which are not included in it. The first of these is The Last Voyage of Skidbladnir by Karin Tidbeck, which features a strange part-organic spaceship—essentially an alien space crab which has for its shell a huge building that houses the human crew and passengers:

Saga had seen Skidbladnir arrive, once, when she had first gone into service. First it wasn’t there, and then it was, heavy and solid, as if it had always been. From the outside, the ship looked like a tall and slender office building. The concrete was pitted and streaked, and all of the windows were covered with steel plates. Through the roof, Skidbladnir’s claws and legs protruded like a plant, swaying gently in some unseen breeze. The building had no openings save the front gates, through which everyone passed. From the airlock in the lobby, one climbed a series of stairs to get to the passenger deck. Or, if you were Saga, climbed the spiral staircase that led up to the engine room and custodial services.
Novik took a few steps back and scanned the hull. A tall, bearded man in rumpled blue overalls, he looked only slightly less imposing outside than he did in the bowels of the ship. He turned to Saga. In daylight, his gray eyes were almost translucent.
“There,” he said, and pointed to a spot two stories up the side. “We need to make a quick patch.”
Saga helped Novik set up the lift that was attached to the side of the building, and turned the winch until they reached the point of damage. It was just a small crack, but deep enough that Saga could see something underneath—something that looked like skin. Novik took a look inside, grunted and had Saga hold the pail while he slathered putty over the crack.
“What was that inside?” Saga asked.
Novik patted the concrete. “There,” he said. “You’re safe again, my dear.”
He turned to Saga. “She’s always growing. It’s going to be a problem soon.”

Saga is one of the maintenance crew, and later discovers that the problem is worse than Novik realises when she discovers the ship is growing into sections of the building where it shouldn’t. When there is a subsequent discussion with the captain about this, he states he will sell the ship for meat rather than have to bear the cost and disruption of a new and bigger building. Saga and Novik (spoiler) are not happy about this and steal the ship the next time they make planetfall.
The rest of the story tells of their subsequent journey through space, and eventual arrival at a deserted city:

At dusk, Skidbladnir’s walls cracked open. Saga understood why Novik had positioned them so far away from the building; great lumps of concrete and steel fell down and shook the ground as the building shrugged and shuddered. The tendrils that waved from the building’s cracked roof stiffened and trembled. They seemed to lengthen. Walls fell down, steel windows sloughed off, as Skidbladnir slowly extricated herself from her shell. She crawled out from the top, taking great lumps of concrete with her. Saga had expected her to land on the ground with an almighty thud. But she made no noise at all.
Free of her house, Skidbladnir was a terror and wonder to behold. Her body was long and curled; her multitude of eyes gleamed in the starlight. Her tendrils waved in the warm air as if testing it. Some of the tendrils looked shrunken and unusable. Saga also saw that patches of Skidbladnir’s body weren’t as smooth as the rest of her; they were dried and crusted. Here and there, fluid oozed from long scratches in her skin.
Next to Saga, Novik made a muted noise. He was crying.
“Go, my love,” he whispered. “Find yourself a new home.”
Skidbladnir’s tendrils felt the buildings around the plaza. Finally, they wrapped themselves around the tallest building, a gleaming thing with a spiraled roof, and Skidbladnir pulled herself up the wall.
Glass tumbled to the ground as Skidbladnir’s tendrils shot through windows to pull herself up. She tore through the roof with a thunderous noise. There was a moment when she supported her whole body on her tendrils, suspended in the air; she almost toppled over the side. Then, with what sounded like a sigh, she lowered herself into the building. Saga heard the noise of collapsing concrete as Skidbladnir’s body worked to make room for itself. Eventually, the noise subsided.
Skidbladnir’s arms hung down the building’s side like a crawling plant.

This is a quirky piece with some nice scenes, but it has a slight plot.

Mary Haasdyk

Last, and most definitely not least, is The Song by Erinn L. Kemper, which has as its central character Dan, a widowed deep sea diver who works on a future oil rig converted to become a whale meat production facility. After some establishing narrative—vaguely melancholy stuff about his personal life, and mentions of save-the-whale extremists/bombers—he meets a biologist called Suzanne who has just arrived on the rig. She is investigating the changes in the whales’ songs, and their increasingly abnormal behaviour.
As the story develops, we learn more about these two, and the rig they work on:

On the deck below, a door squealed open and two women in lurched out onto the walkway. They wore carver-staff coveralls—purple to camouflage blood-splatter without being morbid. Arm in arm they staggered along, singing a slurred version of an old song, repeating only the words they knew, over and over, to the familiar melody.
“Oh Danny Boy, oh Danny Boy, oh Da-ah-ny…”
Suzanne waved down at them, but the women didn’t notice.
She gazed back over the sea, her smile touched by sadness. “We were seeing some of that at the research station I came over from, too. People feeling the stress. Drinking to blow off steam. That and people taking permanent leave, you know. Must be worse here.”
“I guess. Can’t fire those two, even though they’re ignoring the rules. Eventually they’ll run out of booze, and then we’ll have a worse problem.” Statistically, carvers were most likely to take a header over the rail or hang themselves from the pipes, according to the shrinks.
Suzanne nodded. “Seen that, too.”

The struts that supported the hydraulic lift on the kill floor showed some minor cracking in the welds. Dan did a full inspection and made the call. Shut it down. Give the butchers a break. Everyone was supposed to call them carvers, but Dan didn’t think of them that way.
[. . .]
Maintenance was supposed to back him up, but everyone avoided working the kill floor if they could, with its massive adjustable saws and their diamond-honed blades, the long-handled traditional knives clipped to the wall, gleaming, ready for custom orders.
Marge sniffed the air and wrinkled her nose. “Man, I wish tech would come up with some kind of cleaning product that gets rid of the stink, you know? Forget about new butchering techniques. Who cares about cost-effective ways to debone a whale? Those people have a shit-ton of money to spare.”
Rumor was one of those TV chefs had designed an enormous fryer. He would cook a narwhal inside an orca inside a minke. Tables were priced at something like a hundred thousand a head. Proceeds were supposedly going to the plastic filtration project. A worthy cause. Dan pictured a crystal-chandeliered dining stadium. Massive steaks delivered to the linen-draped tables by forklift. CEOs, celebrities, and socialites carving delicate mouthfuls from dripping chunks of perfectly seasoned meat. His stomach lurched.

Dan spends more and more time with Suzanne, who plays him whale songs, and shows him optical representations of their changing brain activity. She also explains what she thinks the animals are saying to each other.
Time passes, and a week later he sees her again on deck:

Suzanne stepped out onto the deck near the kill floor loading bay. Dan joined her. She didn’t notice him at first, as she leaned over the railing to look at the sea under the rig. Below them, a small pod of bowhead whales schooled around the rig legs. Suzanne put her hand over her mouth and shook her head, then looked up at Dan, her eyes wide and empty.
“What’s going on?” Dan had never seen whales behave this way.
“A special rush order came in. For meat prepared the traditional Inuit way. The pod followed the harvesters here. Attacked the boat and tried to capsize them, from what I heard.” She stalked down the hall to the kill floor.
“Hey, c’mon. Let’s go to the cafeteria—or to your lab to see what the song’s doing. If there’s any new chatter.”
“I know what the song is doing, with this pod anyway.” She tapped the headphones. “They’ve stopped singing. One or two of them had taken it up, but then the cowboys rode in and ’pooned a female. That’s why I came to check it out. No chatter at all. But their brains are flaring like a fireworks show.”
She shoved open the double doors and stepped onto the kill floor.
The flensing had already begun. Four carvers stood atop the whale, with long knives like curved hockey sticks, slicing deep into the whale’s side, the blades sliding through in long lines a few inches apart.
“She’s dead. But look at them.” Suzanne pointed down.
Through the metal grate he could see the pod that had followed the harvesting boat surge and strain for the kill floor, mouths open, before they slipped back under. Their bodies collided, stirring great spumes gone pink with blood.
As the carvers pried long slabs free and wrestled them into the shed-sized cooler containers, the whales below calmed, then dove from sight.

This is not only a chilling story but a sad, elegiac one too—even more mournful than the whale song it describes in the story—and it culminates with an ending that is particularly bleak, in more ways than one. I found it rather good, and wouldn’t be surprised if it ends up in one or more of the ‘Year’s Bests’.
That said, there are a couple of things that aren’t entirely convincing. First, the psychological problems caused to the crew: were that the case, most abattoirs, etc., would have closed by now. Second, the idea of a future whale meat industry isn’t particularly convincing given we are on the verge of more cheaply producing meat and meat substitutes by artificial means—but the story probably isn’t about the future but about today, and Japan’s recent decision to commence commercial whale hunting in July 2019.6

The interior artwork is more typical of modern web design than traditional SF illustration: Dadu Shin’s illustration for the Chu story is fine but doesn’t have any connection with it; Mary Haasdyk’s two illustrations for the Bear and Kemper are weird abstract stuff I didn’t particularly care for and, in the case of the Kemper, is not a good match, whereas Sarode’s Indian-themed picture suits the Mondal; Mackenzie and Hu’s artwork for the Yang and Kowal look like Japanese animation—again, not a particularly good match for either story, particularly the Kowal, although I rather liked both pieces; I didn’t care for the Mengad (the central figure looks at best odd, and at worst poorly executed, although I realise this latter is probably an ‘art’ thing). My favourite is the Mosquera, a SFnal illustration for Tidbeck’s SFnal story, even if it does look more suited to War of the Worlds.

Noted in passing: there are three reversed double apostrophes/speech quotes on p. 96-97.

In conclusion, a rather disappointing issue for such a well-funded operation: I expected something better than the equivalent of an average issue of Asimov’s SF.  ●

_____________________

1. Rocket Stack Rank states that Kowal’s Articulated Restraint “can serve as an introduction to the author’s “Lady Astronaut” series”, and that Newitz’s Old Media “isn’t a story so much as a “taster” to introduce you to the world of the author’s Autonomous series”.

2. There are a number of editors responsible for the January to February content: how did they do?
Top of the pile this time around is Ellen Datlow (who provides the Kemper, the best of the lot). Next comes Marco Palmieri (again only one story, the good but minor Mondal), followed by Ann VanderMeer, (the Chu, Yang, and Tidbek stories, two good but minor, and one average), and then Beth Meacham (one average and one borderline poor). Last is Lindsey Hall with the Newitz story. This doesn’t really provide any useful statistical information, but I note that there isn’t a bad story among VanderMeer’s three choices.

3. You can find Tor.com’s stories in web-format here, and the bi-monthly ‘newsletter’ here.

4. Yes, I know you can save web pages as PDFs, but Apple’s Safari bowser truncates them at a certain length (at least on my iPad), and the page layout can sometimes be a little odd. As I had to get hold of the two missing stories, I ended up getting iBooks to make the PDF and then transferred it to Goodreader. This is a two-stage process though, and a bit of a faff. And a random privacy notice appeared and blocked a line or two of the introductions.

5. I was surprised to find out that Bear is a double Hugo winner (I should get out more).

6. There is a short news article about the Japanese decision to resume whaling here.  ●

rssrss

Astounding Science-Fiction v32n03, November 1943

ISFDB link
Archive.org link

Other reviews:1
Alva Rogers, A Requiem for Astounding  p. 126-127

_____________________

Editor, John W. Campbell Jr.; Assistant Editor, Catherine Tarrant

Fiction:
Recoil • novelette by George O. Smith ∗∗
Death Sentence • short story by Isaac Asimov
The Beast • novelette by A. E. van Vogt
Gallegher Plus • novelette by Henry Kuttner [as by Lewis Padgett]
“… If You Can Get It” • short story by Murray Leinster

Non-fiction:
Cover • by William Timmins
Interior artwork • by Paul Orban (x9), Elton Fax (x2), Alfred (x3)
Arithmetic and Empire • by John W. Campbell, Jr.
The Analytical Laboratory: September 1943
In Times to Come
“Those Giant Tubes …”
• science photos
“Turn On the Moon—Make It Hotter!”
• science essay by R. S. Richardson
Keep ’Em Under
• science essay by Malcolm Jameson
Brass Tacks • letters

_____________________

In 1943 Astounding went through two format changes because of wartime restrictions, changing from a large bedsheet magazine to the smaller pulp size in May, and shrinking further to digest size now. The magazine also drops all advertising with this issue.

The fiction leads off with Recoil by George O. Smith, the third of his ‘Venus Equilateral’ series about a future space station cum communications hub. The opening establishes that Channing, the station director, is on honeymoon, and Walter Franks is in charge:

Walter Franks sat in the director’s office; his feet on the director’s desk. He was smoking one of the director’s cigarettes. He was drinking the director’s liquor, filched shamelessly from the director’s private filing cabinet where it reposed in the drawer marked “S.” Drawer “B” would have given beer, but Walt preferred Scotch.
He leaned forward and tossed the director’s cigarette into the director’s wastebasket and then he pressed the button on the desk and looked up.
But it was not the director’s secretary who entered. It was his own, but that did not disturb Franks. He knew that the director’s secretary was off on Mars enjoying a honeymoon with the director.
Jeanne entered and smiled. “Must you call me in here to witness you wasting the company’s time?” she asked in mock anger.
“Now look, Jeanne, this is what Channing does.”
“No dice. You can’t behave as Don Channing behaves. The reason is my husband.”
“I didn’t call to have you sit on my lap. I want to know if the mail is in.”
“I thought so,” she said. “And so I brought it in with me. Anything more?”
“Not until you get a divorce,” laughed Franks.
“You should live so long,” she said with a smile. She stuck her tongue out at him.
Walt thumbed his way through the mail, making notations on some, and setting others aside for closer reading. He came to one and tossed it across the desk at Jeanne.
She took the message and read:
.
Dear Acting Director:
Having a wonderful honeymoon; glad you aren’t here!
Don and Arden.
.
“Wonderful stuff, love,” smiled Franks.
“It is,” agreed Jeanne. A dreamy look came into her eyes.
“Scram, Jeanne. There are times when you can’t work worth a damn. Usually when you’re thinking of that  husband of yours. What’s he got that I haven’t?”
“Me,” said Jeanne slyly. She arose and started for the door.  p. 5-6

One would hope that she goes straight to HR to file a sexual harassment complaint, but what actually happens is that she stays to listen to a data dump lecture. Franks is developing an electron gun to be fitted to spaceships, to move obstructions out of their path (the station struggles to maintain contact with the ships when they manoeuvre rapidly to avoid meteorites, etc.).
A later first test is unsuccessful, even when they use the full power of the station on a passing meteor.

The story then cuts to Channing (the director) and Arden, who are on their honeymoon, and where a reporter interrupts them with a question about a missing spaceship. After some (unconvincing) hand-wavium from Channing, he tells the reporter that piracy is the most likely cause. Sure enough, as the couple go the spaceport to talk to its boss, a ransom demand arrives, and the couple leave immediately for Venus Equilateral. After a long flight they have to take evasive action to avoid pirates—who have recently surrounded the station—before making a rough landing.
The rest of the story is about how the Venus Equilateral team (spoiler) sort out the technical problems with the gun and defeat the space pirates.
If all this talk of interstellar swashbuckling sounds dead exciting, be warned that some of the story is aimed at an Astounding audience and not a Planet Stories one:

“But in the betatron, the thing is run differently. The magnet is built for A. C. and the electron gun runs off the same. As your current starts up from zero, the electron gun squirts a bouquet of electrons into a chamber built like a pair of pie plates set rim to rim. The magnet’s field begins to build up at the same time, and the resulting increase in field strength accelerates the electrons and at the same time, its increasing field keeps the little devils running in the same orbit. Shoot it with two-hundred cycle current, and in the half cycle your electrons are made to run around the center a few million times. That builds up a terrific velocity—measured in six figures, believe it or not. Then the current begins to level off at the top of the sine wave, and the magnet loses its increasing phase. The electrons, still in acceleration, begin to whirl outward. The current levels off for sure and begins to slide down—and the electrons roll off at a tangent to their course. This stream can be collected and used. In fact, we have a two-hundred-cycle beam of electrons at a couple of billion volts. That, brother, ain’t hay!”  p. 25

—little surprise that Astounding/Analog is sometimes described as “the science fiction magazine with rivets”.
There are about six pages of this—my eyes glazed over—which is a pity, as the story was fairly good up until this point. That said, this will appeal to some readers, and you can see why these stories of optimistic, flirty, can-do engineers were popular at the time, even if they are now rather dated (and I’m mostly referring to the science here).

Death Sentence by Issac Asimov is one of his robot stories but, even though it involves United Robots and positronics, it doesn’t seem, for reasons that will become apparent, to be a tale that fits into that universe.
The story begins with Theor Realo approaching Brand Gorla, an old college classmate, for help. Realo describes to Gorla the ancient science of psychological engineering, and tells him about a planet of positronic robots that was set up to conduct experiments in this subject. Realo then reveals that the experiment has been running on its own for tens of thousands of years, and that he has been there for the last five! Gorla agrees to present the information to the Federation’s Board Master, and an expedition is organised.

The rest of the story takes place on the planet, and details the accompanying Under Secretary’s increasing concern about the threat the robots pose to the stability and peace of the Federation. After they discuss the matter, the team agree to blockade the planet if the money can be found, and not to do anything further unless the robots develop interstellar travel.
What then happens is that (spoiler), during a conversation between the Board Master and Realo, the latter reveals hitherto unknown information about his arrival on the planet. The robots closely examined his ship, and Realo realised that they would eventually develop the technology themselves. When the Board Master states that this means a death sentence for the robots, Realo runs off to warn them. There is a lame twist ending where (spoiler) one of the robot cities is revealed as . . . New York! This ridiculous final twist drags down a okay-ish story to mediocre.
I note that, although there are some memorable Asimov stories from this period (the ‘Foundation’ stories, Nightfall, some of the ‘Robot’ tales), he was still capable of producing poor work at this stage of his career (I wasn’t that impressed with last year’s Runaround either, although it’s not as bad as this). And what is it with the weird names?
I guess this one got on to this year’s Retro Hugo final ballot because of name recognition.

The Beast by A. E. van Vogt is the second of the ‘Pendrake’ series, which opens with a mini-data dump about the previous story The Great Engine (Astounding, July 1943):

Slightly more than two years had passed since that day in August, when he had found an atomic engine in the hillside near Crescentville, slightly less than two years since he had traced the marvellous machine to these turreted towers and to a group of scientists who were secretly operating spaceships to Venus, carrying emigrants to that fantastically lovely and fertile planet under an idealistic plan of their own.  p. 48

For “idealistic plan” read “with press gangs”.
The story starts with Pendrake (a one-armed man of unusual strength) again visiting the Lambton Settlement Project building, which was the scientists’ front operation. Here he finds that Germans have taken over the building, and is held at gunpoint before being put on a spacecraft into orbit.
Before his story continues there are two other sub-plots set running. The first of these involves Pendrake’s Air Force buddy, Major Hoskins, who is questioned by his bosses about his friendship with the Pendrake, and the kidnapping, murders, and propeller-less plane he witnessed at his home (part of the previous story). The second sub-plot has a henchman called Birdman meet his boss, where they drink a toast to Hitler.

Pendrake meanwhile wakes up on the moon near a crashed spacecraft. He remembers a fight on board that led to the accident. He realizes, while examining the site, that he cannot keep warm in the shade, and cannot work out how to use the suit controls to turn the heater on. Night starts falling, and with it the possibility he may freeze to death, so he periodically buries himself in the dust to warm himself up as he treks across the Moon. He eventually descends deep into a cave, stumbles on a radiant ore, and then an artificial corridor. Eventually he finds a stream, where spacesuit-less men attack him.

Back on Earth the two sub-plots merge when Birdman is told the FBI are investigating, and that he is to kill Hoskins, who has been examining Pendrake’s home. The assassination attempt on Hoskins occurs at a public meeting, but his bullet proof vest saves him. As the Feds arrive, Birdman escapes in his car:

The gray car slowed, hesitated, and for the first time Hoskins grew aware that its engine was making no noise. With a hiss of indrawn breath he realized what was going to happen.
The gray sedan rose, like a thistledown it rose into the air and climbed straight up like a shooting star in reverse.
It became a dot in the sky and headed into the blue mists of immense heights. Just before it vanished, Hoskins had the curious impression that a long torpedo-shaped structure was waiting up there.
It was there; and then it wasn’t.
Gone, too, was the car. Hoskins shook his head, thinking hazily: It could have been a trick of his vision.
But he knew better. A torpedoshaped spaceship was not at all out of place in the tremendous game that was being played here.  p. 63

A short data dump then sets out the general situation, revealing that the government know about a number of missing scientists and the atomic engine. Meanwhile, Birdman’s boss tells him about Pendrake’s arrival on the Moon, and that they will need to deal with him and the cave-dwellers.
Up until this point the story is a rather uneven, kitchen-sink piece but it subsequently develops a propulsiveness that propels the reader through the remainder of the far-fetched plot: to wit, Pendrake awakes to find a man called Morrison tending him, and is told that he will be taken to see Big Oaf—a near-immortal Neanderthal. There is also mention of the “devil beast in the pit”.
When Pendrake finally gets to his feet in this lunar chamber he sees an almost impossible scene:

Below him was a town set in a garden of trees and flowers. There were broad streets, and he could see men and—queer!—uniformed women.
He forgot the people of the town.
His gaze soared from horizon, to horizon. There was a green meadow on the far side of the town where cattle grazed. Beyond, the ceiling of the cave swept down to a junction with the ground at some point below the cliff, a point invisible from where he sat.
It held him for a moment, that line where a radiant cave sky met a cave horizon.
Then his gaze came back to the town, to the gorgeous town. A hundred yards away it began. First there was a line of tall trees heavily laden with large, gray fruit. The trees sheltered the nearest of many buildings. The structure was small, delicate-looking. It seemed to have been built of some shell-like substance.
It glowed as if light was inside it, shining through its translucent walls. Its design was more that of a shapely bee’s nest than of a sea shell, but the resemblance to the shell was there, too.
The other buildings that glinted tantalizingly through the trees differed widely in details, but the central architectural motif, and the basic glow-material was ever present.  p. 68-69

Pendrake goes to see Big Oaf, and notices on the journey there that the people in the town are from various periods and locales: German Army women, Neanderthals, and a number of men from the Wild West, etc. Pendrake later finds out that this strange mix has been gathered either from raids on German bases on the Moon, or from a time portal that Big Oaf keeps guarded.
Most of the rest of the story concerns Pendrake’s attempts to undermine Big Oaf’s rule in the town, during which further (!) fantastic elements are introduced:

Pendrake approached the edge of the abyss cautiously, and peered over. He found himself staring down a wall of cliff that descended smooth and straight for a distance of about five hundred feet. There was brush at the bottom and a grassy plain and—
Pendrake gasped. Then he felt faint. He swayed dizzily— and then with a terrible effort caught his whirling mind. And looked again, trembling.
The yellow-green-blue-red beast in the pit was sitting on its haunches. It looked as big as a horse. Its head was tilted, its baleful eyes glaring up at the two men. And the hideously long teeth that protruded from its jowls confirmed Pendrake’s first mind-shaking comprehension:
The devil-beast was a sabretoothed tiger.  p. 76-77

Various things happen: Big Oaf tries to recruit Pendrake to shut down the portal (so that they cannot be invaded from other time periods), and also to go on a raid of a German lunar base. He also tells Pendrake that men with silver suits and laser guns appeared out of the portal hundreds of thousands of years ago, but he left them to die of hunger and thirst inside the stockade in case they proved a threat.
Back on Earth, meanwhile, Hoskins and Lipton go to occupied Germany to be briefed on two “murder centres”, which appear to be linked with spaceship activity. This section produces some predictive (although wrong) post-occupation comment:

As you know, Hitler’s method was to put a party man into every conceivable controlling position in every community.
“Naturally, we deposed all these petty fuehrers, replacing them with the stanchest pre-war democrats we could find. At this point we ran into a difficulty.
“The Nazis had anticipated us. In every district a secret Nazi cell had been built up with a secret leader under whose command were young, stone-hearted men specially trained to commit murder and to defeat all attempts to reconstitute democracy. The leaders we appointed hardly dare to make a move for fear of displeasing these hidden Nazi zone chiefs.
“It will straighten out in time, of course. As the Nazi youth go into their thirties, get married, their zest for danger will fade; and the new, younger generation is being trained our way.
“Nevertheless, political creeds like pretensions to thrones, die hard. And right now these people are  committing about a thousand murders a week in Germany itself; about eight hundred more in the rest of Europe.”  p. 86

The climax involves (spoiler) a fight between Pendrake and Big Oaf, which the former loses, but Big Oaf is the one who ends up in the pit with hungry sabre-tooth tiger. We learn that Birdman’s boss is Hitler, who shoots himself when the Americans arrive on the Moon. The sabre-tooth tiger (amusingly) ends up in a cage in an unsuspecting zoo (presumably the RSPCA/ASPCA et al ducked that call).
Van Vogt does a good job at melding these disparate and unlikely elements: show me another writer who could put together a one-armed superman, anti-gravity drives, caves on the Moon, time portals, immortal Neanderthals and sabre-toothed tigers, lunar Nazi holdouts, etc., and produce an entertaining potboiler.2

Gallegher Plus by Henry Kuttner is the fourth of the ‘Gallegher’ stories, and the last that would appear until a final story in 1948 (Ex Machina in the June Astounding). This one starts, as usual, with Gallegher waking up with a hangover to find he has built another machine:

Gallegher uncoiled his lanky body and wandered across to the machine, examining it curiously. It was not in operation. Through the open window extended some pale, limber cables as thick as his thumb; they dangled a foot or so over the edge of the pit where the back yard should have been. They ended in—
Hm-m-m! Gallegher pulled one up and peered at it. They ended in metal-rimmed holes, and were hollow. Odd.
The machine’s over-all length was approximately two yards, and it looked like an animated junk heap.
Gallegher had a habit of using makeshifts. If he couldn’t find the right sort of connection, he’d snatch the nearest suitable object—a buttonhook, perhaps, or a coat hanger—and use that. Which meant that a qualitative analysis of an already assembled machine was none too easy. What, for example, was that fibroid duck doing wrapped around with wires and nestling contentedly on an antique waffle iron?  p. 122

Joe (the “Proud Robot” from the last story) tells Gallegher a cop is waiting, and Gallegher gets served a summons. He also finds that he needs to deliver on three paid-for contracts, and that his recently bought shares in Devices Unlimited have tanked.
He contacts the man who served the summons after talking to his lawyer, and the former says he’ll come over. Gallegher meanwhile turns on the machine, which uses its tubes to hoover up material from the hole, plays the tune St James infirmary, and produces nothing.

The rest of the story (again, as usual) weaves together a number of strands until (spoiler) Gallegher finally discovers the purpose of the machine, which is (a) to get rid of the spoil from a building site excavation, (b) produce a wire for spaceship control runs and (c) stereoscopic screens. The fourth function is to sing a duet with Gallegher while he is drunk.
This is a pleasant enough story with some amusing elements: the exchanges with Joe the robot, for instance, or the drinking game that Gallegher undertakes:

Unfortunately an alphabetical pub-crawl, with its fantastic mixtures, proved none too easy. Gallegher already had a hangover. And Cuff’s thirst was insatiable.
“L? What’s L?”
“Lachrymae Christi. Or Liebfraumilch.”
“Oh, boy!”
It was a relief to get back to a Martini. After the Orange Blossom Gallegher began to feel dizzy. For R he suggested root beer, but Cuff would have none of that.
“Well, rice wine.”
“Yeah. Rice— hey! We missed N! We gotta start over now from A!”
Gallegher dissuaded the alderman with some trouble, and succeeded only after fascinating Cuff with the exotic name ng ga po. They worked on, through sazeracs, tailspins, undergrounds, and vodka. W meant whiskey.
“X?”
They looked at each other through alcoholic fogs. Gallegher shrugged and stared around. How had they got into this swanky, well-furnished private clubroom, he wondered. It wasn’t the Uplift, that was certain.
Oh, well—
“X?” Cuff insisted. “Don’t fail me now, pal.”
“Extra whiskey,” Gallegher said brilliantly.  p. 137

Nevertheless, the story feels too similar to the previous three, and has more of a deux ex machina ending. Although I enjoyed this one I’m glad he stopped the series here (until adding one final story in 1948).

“… If You Can Get It” by Murray Leinster has the narrator go to a show where he sees an old college acquaintance called “Stinky” doing sensational magic tricks. Afterwards he goes to see Stinky and discovers that he isn’t doing conventional tricks at all, but knows how to imagine things into reality.
As the story progresses we find out that there is one drawback, which is that if someone does not believe he is capable of doing something he can’t do it. The major downside of this is that he can’t get back to Llanvabon, a created world where they believe he can do anything (the narrator wants to go there because of the large number of pretty young women).
Ultimately (spoiler), the problem isn’t resolved, and the ending—an appeal to the readership for help—does not disguise that:

SOS! R.S.V.P.! Help! Aid! Assistance! Any bright mind in call, work out a solution for Stinky Selden and me, and write your own ticket! Anything you like, from a couple of hogsheads of jewelry to King Chosroe’s harem, is yours if you figure out a way to get back the knack that Stinky had a little while ago. It’s life and death! It’s patriotism! Write, wire, or telephone. Put your brains to work! I’m dizzy with trying to figure it out, but it’s bound to be simple!
SOS! R.S.V.P.! Help!  p. 165

The month’s Cover by William Timmins is a particularly dreary, almost monochromatic affair, and shows us the wrong end of the action (there is a tiny spaceship at the other end of the electron beam).
The Interior artwork is mostly by Paul Orban, who provides the best of it (his work for the van Vogt story). That said, some of his other illustrations are mediocre, as are the ones from Elton Fax (disappointingly, after his near-Schoenherr quality effort in a previous issue) and Alfred. There is also a new illustration on the redesigned contents page:

Arithmetic and Empire by John W. Campbell, Jr. follows on from his Galactic Empire editorial in the last issue with speculation about the huge number of government employees required to run it.
The Analytical Laboratory: September 1943 was discussed in the review of that issue.3
In Times to Come plugs a new E. Mayne Hull ‘Artur Blord’ story, and talks a little (see above) about the Timmins cover to go with it, and the problems in painting an invisible spaceship. Most of the rest of the space concerns George O. Smith’s new story (you can tell that Smith was one of the first to press Cambell’s buttons):

George O. Smith is a radio designing engineer; he’s got a yarn coming up next month that comes from the heart. Any technician who’s tried to work from a “complete” instruction manual knows with a bitter  certainty that such texts invariably leave out all the important data. In “Lost Art,” Smith discusses the ancient Martian technique of—something or other. Like most manuals, the “complete” manual found in the Martian ruin neglected to explain what the purpose of the technology was.
(Ever see a standard manual that explained what radio was intended for? RCA’s excellent and elaborate “Receiving Tube Manual.” for instance, doesn’t so much as hint that a transmitting station somewhere is a great help to proper operation of a radio!) The discoverers of the manual—and the necessary tube to go with it—know it’s a vastly important science. Only—what the heck is it?  p. 154

Pages 99 to 114 are the sixteen special pages (I presume) that Campbell mentioned last issue, the ones done in rotogravure printing, and which allow the reproduction of photographs. To squeeze in “Those Giant Tubes …” and the two science articles that carry photographs into that space, the first article by Richardson is truncated and completed at the end of the issue.

The first of those articles, “Turn On the Moon—Make It Hotter!”, tells of Richardson’s time as an astronomical adviser on a Hollywood film, The Heavenly Body.

There are some interesting sections in the article:

In addition to having an astronomer present to supervise the observatory scenes, the studio also employed an astrologer to handle the astrological sequences. The two of us never met, the studio evidently fearing that we would immediately start to tear each other apart upon sight. I always had the greatest curiosity to meet this individual, with the idea of asking some of the questions that people are continually asking me about astrology. Half of an astronomer’s social time is spent in explaining that he doesn’t know how to cast a horoscope.  p. 105

In addition to catching astronomical errors, the technical adviser is also called upon for lines that have an authentic ring to them. I was asked for a line in Bill’s speech to the effect that if he hadn’t made a mistake in his calculations, the comet was sure to hit the moon. One that sounded really powerful and dramatic.
After pondering the matter for several minutes, I finally came through with the following:
.
BILL (DICTATING TO HIS ASSISTANT):
“And should there be no error in my calculations, these two heavenly bodies are sure to intersect in their orbits.”
.
To my amazement, everyone in the room, from the director to the stenographer, burst into laughter. They assured me that under no circumstances would the Hays [censors] office allow a line like that one to get by. I never realized what the moving picture industry was up against before.  p. 106

The second article has little to do with SF—it would be a good fit for Reader’s Digest—but is one which, having just finished watching the WWII U-boat series Das Boat, I found fascinating. Keep ’Em Under by Malcolm Jameson is about submarine warfare, and it also has a number of interesting passages:

The submarine carries no armor beyond light splinter plating on the conning tower. Any hit on it may well prove fatal, however small the caliber of the shell, for the greatest of all the sub’s weaknesses is its lack of reserve buoyancy. Where even the rustiest of old cargo ships could receive hit after hit and ship tons of water and still stay afloat on a reasonably even keel, the submarine is mortally injured by the slightest puncture of its skin. The sub is always in a state of delicate trim, and the admission of unwanted salt water not only tends to destroy the small store of spare buoyancy, but may send the sub reeling at crazy angles and out of control.
Buoyancy and trim are the key words to submarine performance.  p. 108

Correcting trim is a tricky job.
There are two reasons for this. One is inherent in submersibles, the other is due to human frailty. A submarine has two conditions of stability—one when light and on the surface, the other when completely under. When the Main Ballasts are flooded there is a sickening moment of uncertainty as the boat tremblingly shifts from one condition to the other. It may have been in apparently perfect trim above, yet assume a disconcerting slant the moment it is under. This can be forestalled by thorough knowledge of the characteristics of the particular boat and painstaking care in compensation. Human frailty enters in that things are sometimes overlooked, or go unreported, or errors may be made in computation.
Even veteran submarine men undergo a moment of anxiety when diving after a long period on the surface, for they can never be sure until they get under and see how the boat behaves.  p. 112

Submarines usually will submerge at the first sight of hostile aircraft, and deeply, for subs can be seen from the air in certain lights even when at considerable depths.  p. 116

Altogether, the lot of the submariner is not a happy one, despite the scare he sometimes throws into us and the undeniable damage he does. Every man’s hand is against him, including those of his own people, for submarines are shot at first and challenged afterward. He works alone and every move he makes is attended by the threat of sudden death. When he dies in action—and he often does—the world does not know when or how. His death may be swift, or again by slow asphyxiation in the dark of the ocean bed. While he lives he is always in discomfort, cooped up under artificial light in cramped quarters and breathing smelly air. In the winter he is always cold, for he is immersed in icy brine and energy for heating is too precious to be expended. Yet there are plenty of men who like it.  p. 117-118

The first two letters in Brass Tacks are both from Paul Carter, but the first has a Idaho address, and the second a Massachusetts one. The first mentions the July issue and praises Leiber’s Gather Darkness; the second discusses C. L. Moore’s Judgement Night, Hal Clement’s Attitude, and van Vogt’s Concealment. Given the non-overlap I presume they are from the same person.
There follows a short letter from George O. Smith (in reply to Caleb Northrup’s comments in an earlier issue about, I think, the problems of scientific development), and then a very long letter from Walter A. Carrithers Jr. of Fresno, CA, who has gone through all the Brass Tacks letters to develop a reader score for all stories published to date:

This, unfortunately, is one of those garbage in, garbage out analyses—the author himself points to the varying numbers of letters in Brass Tacks over the years (the column didn’t appear for a while in 1938, so there are no letters from that period), as well as their varying content (some early 1930’s columns were mostly concerned with fan feuds, etc.). This perhaps explains the poor showing from Golden Age stories in the list—that, and the small sample size, which may not reflect the views of the wider readership.
The last letter is from a regular, Chad Oliver, who didn’t like Bradbury’s Doodad, “because he tried to suit his style to Astounding [. . .] I prefer the old style—the serious, even beautiful writing to the clever stuff in Doodad.”
Finally, the column has a new title design:

An okay issue.  ●

_____________________

1. Rogers says that “the magazine was 5½ x 7¾ inches in size, [and] had 176 pages” and that fan reaction to the new size was “in the main favourable”. He adds that “the best story in the issue was Padgett’s Gallegher Plus”. The Asimov and Leinster stories are not mentioned.

2. The Pendrake stories were fixed up into one of the earliest paperback novels I bought, Moonbeast (originally The Beast). I didn’t particularly like it as, if I recall correctly, it was too kitchen sink. Although van Vogt’s wild plots work over the course of a novelette or novella, they just seem a jumble when you strap three or four of them together and call the result a “novel”.

The ISFDB page for the ‘Pendrake’ series is here. The notes for The Beast/Moonbeast tell us that, according to Icshi,* chapters 1-5 are The Great Engine; chapters 5-11, are The Changeling (not a ‘Pendrake’ story according to Ischi); chapters 12-13 are linking material; and chapters 14-31 & Epilogue are The Beast.
*Ischi’s van Vogt site is here.

3. The Analytical Laboratory results for this issue appeared in the January 1944 issue:

I would have put the van Vogt and Kuttner together at the top, followed by the Smith, and then the Asimov and Leinster a long way behind . . . but as Campbell says, there was a small sample size.  ●

rssrss

Science Fiction Monthly v03n04, April 1976

ISFDB link
Archive.org link

_____________________

Editor, Julie Davis; Executive Editor, Pat Hornsey

Fiction:
To Lay the Piper • reprint short fiction by Robert Holdstock
Spaceout • short fiction by Philip Boast
Scoop • short fiction by R. M. Lamming [as by Robin Douglas]

Non-fiction:
Cover • by Tim White
Interior artwork • by Tony Roberts (x3), Christos Kondeatis, Chris Foss (x2), Robin Bath, Tim White, David Bergen, Tony Masero (2)
Introduction
News • by Julie Davis
The SF Novels of D. G. Compton • essay by Peter Linnett
Letters
The Query Box • by Walter Gillings [as by Thomas Sheridan]
An Interview with D. G. Compton • by Peter Linnett

_____________________

This issue’s News column has an important announcement:

Yes, dear readers, we’ve come to the end of the road and this will be the last issue of Science Fiction Monthly. However, do not despair, all is not lost: in a matter of a few weeks you’ll be able to buy an even better science fiction magazine called SF Digest. The first issue will appear in mid-May and regularly from then on at three monthly intervals. It will contain all that’s good about SFM and avoid all that’s bad. For a start it will be half of SFM’s page size, so you won’t find it difficult to handle, but there will be many more pages. The fiction will be of a very high standard—for instance, the first issue includes stories by Brian Aldiss, Robert Silverberg and Michael Coney—and there won’t be so much emphasis on factual articles, although there will always be one in every issue. The amount of colour artwork will be much reduced, but there will be a full-colour, pull-out poster free with every issue. All the stories will be illustrated and great pains have been, and will be, taken to make sure that all the illustrations fit the stories they accompany.
John Brunner has written an editorial and there are consumer guides to Heinlein, Van Vogt and Asimov as well as a quiz. SF Digest will be available at newsagents and bookstalls from mid-May and will cost 50p.

The mid-seventies were a difficult time economically, with rampant inflation causing three price rises for the magazine in the previous year (from 30p to 50p), so perhaps this outcome was no surprise. And perhaps the novelty of all that poster size artwork had worn off.

The stories in this issue are the usual middling efforts. To Lay the Piper by Robert Holdstock (Sfinx #7, January 1973) has four men go back in time to investigate the Pied Piper legend. This one takes ages to get going—the team spend forever arguing about various issues before they interview a survivor. Eventually they go further back to the event itself. The finale feels anti-climactic (spoiler: the story has a natural, horrific, and medically obscure explanation), and is confused by the impression that spirits of the dead appear during the final events (this is later ignored by the team).
I remember not much liking this when I first read it, and I haven’t changed my mind. Although Holdstock later won acclaim for his ‘Mythago’ series, his earlier work was of a much lower standard.

Best of the three stories is Spaceout by Philip Boast. This one begins with an astronaut called Kelloran who, after servicing an orbital bomb, suffers from a stuck propellant valve. This leaves him too far away from his ship for his crewmate to rescue him.
The rest of the story alternates between his time in orbit and scenes on Earth where the mission managers discover he has a mistress. This is apparently (and unconvincingly) a problem in this particular future, and lead to conversations like this with his wife:

‘This is all most unfortunate,’ said Carey.
‘I cannot help but agree,’ said Mrs Kelloran.
‘You had no suspicion of the existence of the woman, Elvira?’
‘None.’
‘Your sexual relations with Mr Kelloran were normal?’
‘Perfectly. We made love in the attic bedroom after the religious programmes every Sunday.’
‘So you had no reason to suspect another woman.’
‘That’s right. I never imagined.’
‘Naturally she will be escorted from the base immediately.’
‘How kind.’
Carey said delicately, ‘And if your husband survives, will you take him back?’
‘Naturally. Of course I shall impose certain conditions. The woman Elvira must go, also a certain old armchair he keeps by the fire to snore in during the evenings, and I will insist he have his moth-eaten old dog put to sleep.’
‘You realise it is an offence for a serving astronaut to have an emotional-sexual relationship with anyone but his or her wife or husband. Will you require us to take disciplinary action in this matter?’
Mrs Kelloran stood up. ‘No,’ she said. ‘I will be doing that myself.’  p. 11

This is all very odd—which is a pity as the rest of the story is pretty good, such as when Kelloran re-enters the atmosphere in his armoured spacesuit:

The ice on his faceplate cleared and the sea was a smooth blue sheet, impossible to say how far below, but he could no longer see Africa. He could hear the muted roaring of the wind; he was the first true skydiver.
Carey: Rate of descent six hundred twenty-five. . .
In front of his face a red light was flashing beside the faceplate. He was on oxygen reserve. It gave him half an hour.
Driver: Assuming a spreadeagle position, his terminal speed at sea level in that suit is one hundred seventeen miles per hour. Survival?
Carey: Negative.
Across the sea a silver delta was crawling, towing a long white vapour trail. He recognised it for a plane.
For the first time he felt a faint hope.
Driver: SST7 moving into position. They’re ready now. Fifty thousand feet.
In his faceplate the aeroplane grew and grew as he fell towards it, then suddenly it was gone and he had only a momentary impression of a succession of black dots leaping through the rear doors. So that was how they were going to do it.
Carey: The operation is still proceeding according to plan.
The black dots resolved into orange-suited men as they swooped head first towards him, lessening their air resistance so as to catch him up as quickly as possible. He smiled at them, but their faces were expressionless. One of them grabbed his arm.
Driver: They have contact with him. The suit’s in bad shape but Kelloran’s alive. They’re attaching the flotation ring now.
Carey: That suit weighs two hundred pounds in Earth gravity, Mrs Kelloran. Without the flotation ring he would sink immediately on hitting the sea.
The flotation ring was a long empty bladder that flapped and lashed in the airstream like a mad thing.
Somehow they got it round his shoulders, stretching it around the bulky systems unit on his back. The orange men were clustered about him now like moths around a light. They had a parachute for him and tried to strap it to his front but someone’s shoulder hit the compressed air switch and the flotation ring inflated with a bang. Increased air resistance snatched Kelloran up; the orange men fell impotently away below him and disappeared.
Carey: Damn that man to hell.
Driver: It’s up to SST 12 now, and they won’t have much time. He’ll be under thirty thousand any moment.
Though hope had been snatched from him, hope was born again. With icy nerve the pilot in the supersonic transport passed only a few hundred yards from him and Kelloran again saw the black dots pour from the rear doors and resolve into orange men. He glanced down: he was close enough to see the ocean wrinkled and flecked with white.

A promising first story, but there wasn’t any more short SF from this writer.1

Scoop by R. M. Lamming opens with an alien specimen collector on a prehistoric Earth who is making his way back to his craft. After successfully avoiding the primitives, he arrives at his ship, but senses something is wrong.
The story then cuts to the current day, where two men are in the process of gathering various objects together to take to an old woman who is a psychic. After she proves she is genuine, by successfully identifying the provenance of several objects, she eventually handles a strange scoop they have brought. This connects her across time to the alien, who realises that he has mislaid the tool, and that someone is watching him . . . .
I’m not sure this entirely works, but it’s an okay story, and the scene where the alien and the woman connect is convincingly spooky.

This issue’s Cover is by Tim White, who has another piece of artwork inside the issue, the impressive double page centre spread:

The Interior artwork is a mixture of colour paperback paintings and black and white story and article illustrations by Tony Roberts, Christos Kondeatis, Chris Foss, Robin Bath, Tim White, David Bergen, and Tony Masero.
The Introduction is a few paragraphs of blurb for the stories and the Compton article. They might as well not have bothered and, judging by one comment, you get the impression the writer feels the same way:

Now I’ve given away the plot of nearly all the stories in this issue, we’d better move on to the author interview.  p. 1

The News column by Julie Davis leads off with John Brosnan’s negative review of The Man Who Fell to Earth (I didn’t much care for the film myself, although I haven’t watched it recently):

If somebody wanted to be really nasty about The Man Who Fell to Earth he could describe it as the ‘thinking man’s Space 1999’. This is because both of them have absolutely nothing to do with science fiction but pretend they do; they exploit the themes and devices of sf for reasons entirely their own. In the case of Space 1999 the reason is to make money for Sir Lew Grade and Gerry Anderson; in the case of The Man Who Fell to Earth it’s to add fuel to Nicolas Roeg’s reputation as an important film-maker.
Now Roeg has made a number of fine films, such as Performance, Walkabout and Don’t Look Now, all of which have been rather solid, ie highly symbolic, full of artistic and literary allusions, multi-layered and rich to the eye. These descriptions equally apply to The Man . . . but with this film Roeg seems to have reached a kind of artistic dead end, as too much of it is self-indulgent and inbred. At times it even seems like a parody of his earlier films, particularly Performance with which it shares many similarities. The sex scenes, for example, employ the same device that was used to such good effect in Performance and Don’t Look Now; that of intercutting the writhing bodies with flashes back and forwards … but because of this repetition it’s now lost its effectiveness and become merely a Roeg cliche. Other similarities include the sequence where David Bowie and the girl (Candy Clark) play with a revolver full of blanks; a direct reference to the scene in Performance where James Fox shoots Mick Jagger. And, as in Performance, a painting provides the symbolic key to the whole film (in Performance it was a portrait of the writer Borges; in The Man . . . it’s a painting showing the fall of Icarus).

The rest of his review takes up most of the News space; the rest contains the closure announcement discussed above and some other news snippets.

The SF Novels of D. G. Compton by Peter Linnett starts with this introduction to the writer:

D G Compton is a new kind of sf writer. His concerns are new to sf, he owes nothing to the pulp tradition, and the outlook which informs his work is shared by few other sf writers. Here, I believe, lies a clue to the paradox surrounding his work. In my opinion, and that of a good many critics, Compton is one of the best sf novelists writing today, yet, for all the attention his work has received, he might as well not be writing at all. Happily, the situation seems to be improving, but until now his novels have not been widely reviewed, and have sold poorly, with the result that many sf readers seem not even to have heard of him. All this despite the fact that he’s maintained a steady, tremendously good output ranging from The Quality of Mercy (1965) to The Continuous Katherine Mortenhoe (1974)—eight novels in which he has succeeded in both creating a clearly delineated, recognisable world of his own and establishing a sharply-flavoured, individual style. Most important, he possesses a mastery of characterisation far in advance of most other sf writers I can think of. Why the neglect? Certainly Compton is at the opposite pole to the writer of hardcore sf, in style, approach and technique. His main concerns are with his characters, which are among the most credible in sf, and with the working out of the moral problems arising from the situations in which they find themselves. As Mark Adlard, writing in Vector 66, said: ‘At the most basic level he is perhaps the first sf writer to continue that tradition of moral seriousness which runs from Austen to James.’
It’s easy to see why traditionally-minded readers, reared on sf containing indestructible heroes with no scruples whatever, are repelled by Compton’s novels: they bring them too close to the real world which much sf ignores. The fact that Compton’s moral seriousness is always contained within the framework of a good story well told, and never becomes obtrusive or didactic, is a tribute to his skill as a novelist. The combination makes him a writer of considerable importance.
The first point to make itself obvious on reading his work is that he uses the themes, trappings and symbols of sf because they happen to suit the expression of his personal vision, and aid the statement he wants to make, not because he grew up with the genre or has any great love for it. His first sf novel, The Quality of Mercy (1965; revised 1970), was written with little knowledge of previous work in the genre and, indeed, with no awareness that he was writing sf at all.  p. 17

It is a comprehensive and interesting article about the writer’s work.2

Letters consists of one long letter of complaint from Bill Little, Stoke-on-Trent. It starts with the familiar lament that the magazine isn’t New Worlds:

As a sf magazine the above mentioned issue [SFM v03n02] was an utter waste of money! I buy the magazine in the (apparently vain) hope that it will change and adapt. But it seems that my hard-earned pennies are being wasted. There can surely be no doubt now that SFM is not a vehicle for literature of a speculative nature, never has been, and never will be. With 50% plus devoted to decorative trappings—no matter how nice the trappings are—the fiction must of necessity take the back seat. I find myself caught in a vicious circle: the price of paperbacks rocketing, one hopes SFM would present more fiction and of a more original nature; no such luck!

He goes on to make several specific criticisms of the fiction and articles:

Thanks to Sandra Miesel, I sleep so much easier now that I know that Kelly Freas gets his lovely effects ‘by swirling, splotching’ (such an artistic word, that) ‘or crackling the paint’. Crackling for God’s sake? Such minutiae are of interest only to the most feverent Freas-ians, not the majority of fiction-loving readers.
[. . .]
Congratulations, Mr Brosnan! You bore in the most expert way. Tell me pray, why you are a traditionalist when it comes to cinematic effects? And why do you prefer film to videotape? I’m so, so interested, along with, I bet, two others! Your analysis of The Invisible Man was bloated, padded and all but concealed by in-crowd technological gobbledygook making sense to you, yourself, and nobody else! Delete all but the first two, and the final paragraphs (and of course, the photo) and you have a concise criticism of the show, with half a page, free for something else.

He concludes with this prediction:

I’ll continue to buy the magazine, dedicated idiot that I am, but I don’t for one solitary moment suppose my letter will make the slightest difference to the style and format of SFM. Believe it or not, however, there is nothing I would like more than for SFM to succeed, but the way it’s going it will be dead before the end of 1976.  p. 25

I think Little’s problem is that he wants a completely different magazine. I wonder if SF Digest was more to his taste.
The Query Box by Walter Gillings has a couple of interesting queries this month, including this one:

COMPUTER POET
At the beginning of Brian Aldiss’ Earthworks are some lines of poetry which are accredited to ‘RCA 301 Computer’. Is this a joke of his or did a computer actually write them?
Owen F Ransen, Biggleswade, Beds.
.
To make sure, I put your question to author Aldiss, who replied: ‘The quotation is genuine; an RCA computer did write it. I seem to remember I got the quotation from Time in 1964.’.3 I remember it, too, and the bother it caused among human poets at the time. I can’t accede to your request for some more lines, though I kept them by me for several years, but I can offer you this Japanese product of ‘Cybernetic
Serendipity’ exhibited at the Institute of Contemporary Arts, London, in 1968. It is mercifully brief:
.
eons deep in the ice
I paint all time in a whorl
bang the sludge has cracked

An Interview with D. G. Compton by Peter Linnett follows on from the article. It’s another interesting piece (partially because Compton is a forthcoming, almost garrulous, subject), and it yields a number of interesting snippets:

I was writing very symbolic radio comedies—all those great meanings somewhere. They didn’t sell,
I’d run out of money and was on National Assistance, so I thought I had better try one of those awful long things, a book. I wrote a crime novel, which sold immediately for £75. It was almost the first money I’d ever earned from my writing. I wrote six of those, in fairly quick succession. During this time I’d got myself an agent for my plays, who discovered the German market for me, and all those earnest, culture-filled comedies, which the BBC hadn’t been able to make anything of at all, Germany lapped up.
[. . .]
I tried to write [the crime novels] as well as I could. I wish they had been better; they’re not at all good and are best forgotten. I was certainly learning about putting together a book and, I hoped, getting some overwriting out of my system. At the end of six of those, we hadn’t made the breakthrough that my publisher and I had hoped for and we didn’t see much point in going on. I didn’t mind very much because I’d just had an idea for a novel. I was very concerned at the time about overpopulation. I was interested in its control, had an idea about how it could be done and wrote The Quality of Mercy. I sent it off to Hodder & Stoughton, who accepted it at once and said it was science fiction. I wasn’t at all happy about it being called sf because I knew nothing about it at all. I imagined it was still Amazing Stories, of which I’d seen the jackets and hadn’t even read—how vulgar and tasteless, I thought, I don’t want anything to do with that. However, one doesn’t argue; what is in effect one’s first book is sold to a publisher.  p. 26

At first I couldn’t comprehend why my books were selling to anybody at all, because if they were sf, what the hell was this other thing which was also sf—Amazing Stories and so forth? I still do not comprehend the enormous span of what is called sf; I do not know if the same people read the entire spectrum. I’ve never had any idea for whom I am writing. I once addressed a group of sf enthusiasts in Cambridge and it was a disaster, because I’m not an addresser of enthusiasts—I’m not an addresser of anybody. I suddenly realised how young the readership was, in that they were referring to books of mine which were six years old, which they had read when they first came out. They were only about 20 at this time, so they had been reading my books at the age of 15. That astonished me; I hadn’t imagined that sort of readership at all.  p. 26

One of the things that comes out of Compton’s interview is that a mid-list writer could survive in the mid-70s even though they didn’t necessarily have a huge readership. Most hardbacks would sell hundreds of copies (or more) into the library system, and then end up with a subsequent paperback edition. Changed days.

In conclusion, this isn’t a bad issue of the magazine: there are a couple of okay short stories, and the Compton material is an interesting look at a not much examined writer.
I was sorry to see the magazine fold (I was a reader at the time, and it was the first SF magazine I bought). It was a fairly lightweight and mixed quality publication for sure, but it was nice having something like this to pick up each month at the newsstands—at an absolute minimum (and there was always more than that) there were some lovely pictures to look at. In any event, I obtained the July 1976 issues of Analog and F&SF 4 a couple of months later (if SFM hadn’t folded, I wonder if I would have bothered asking my newsagent to order these elusive American digests) and after that it was down the rabbit hole for good.  ●

_____________________

1. If this is the same Philip Boast, the writer would have been in his early twenties when this appeared. His ISFDB page is here.

2. Compton has always exerted a strange fascination for me, possibly because of his extra-genre origins, but most probably because at school I based my Sixth Year Studies English* essay/dissertation, in part, on Farewell Earth’s Bliss (I think Ballard’s Concentration City and Stewart’s Earth Abides were the other two—God knows what the link was). I didn’t like the novel much, or The Continuous Katherine Mortenhoe later, and I suspect I read them when I was too young. Probably time for another go.
* I liked the subject but wasn’t much good at it.

3. Aldiss’s Earthworks contains the following stanza:

While life reached evilly through empty faces
While space flowed slowly o’er over idle bodies
And stars flowed evilly upon vast men
No passion smiled . . .

There is a short news clipping with what I presume (they have a similar style) are more RCA 301 poems here:

Our bloom flayed evilly through ugly bodies
And water loomed evilly o’er inhuman loves
Your dream blazed freely ’round ugly hovels
A foe itched
.
The stars flayed slowly upon furtive bodies
And light flayed blindly o’er crowded faces
While gloom blazed foully from broken loves
Our genes giggled.

I’ve read worse from humans.

4. I reviewed the July 1976 issue of Fantasy and Science Fiction here.  ●

rssrss

Astounding Science-Fiction v32n02, October 1943

ISFDB link
Archive.org link

Other reviews:
Alva Rogers, A Requiem for Astounding p. 125-126

_____________________

Editor, John W. Campbell Jr.; Assistant Editor, Catherine Tarrant

Fiction:
The Storm • novelette by A. E. van Vogt ∗∗∗+
Fifty Million Monkeys • novella by Raymond F. Jones
Paradox Lost • short story by Fredric Brown
The Proud Robot • novelette by Henry Kuttner [as by Lewis Padgett] +
Willie • short story by Frank Belknap Long
Symbiotica • novelette by Eric Frank Russell

Non-fiction:
Cover • by William Timmins
Interior artwork • by Paul Orban (x10), Hall (x2), Frank Kramer (x5), Alfred (x1),
Concentration • by John W. Campbell, Jr.
Tidal Waves • essay by Malcolm Jameson
The Analytical Laboratory: August 1943
In Times to Come

_____________________

This issue has three stories (by van Vogt, Kuttner and Russell) that are not only 1944 Retro-Hugo nominees but also appear in Asimov and Greenberg’s Great Science Fiction Stories #5: 1943.1 I imagine, therefore, that many would rate this the best issue of the year: let’s come back to that at the end of the review.
The fiction leads off with The Storm by A. E. van Vogt, the second of his ‘Mixed Men’ series. This follows on from last issue’s story, Concealment, where the human spaceship Discovery (commanded by the imperious Grand Captain Lady Laurr) discovers an outpost of Dellian civilization, android robots who fled humanity after a massacre thousands of years before.
After a short introduction that describes a ferocious galactic storm, the story opens on one of the robot planets, with Laurr’s ship about to go back to Earth with news of their discovery. The Dellians do not want Earth to learn of their existence, so they send Captain Maltby, one of their navigators, to the ship to supposedly guide the Earthmen through the nearby storm: their secret plan is to get Maltby to steer the ship into the storm’s fringes, so they can disable and capture it.

In light of the problematic history between the humans and robots, Laurr prepares her crew for Maltby’s arrival:

“There’s no doubt, Captain Turgess,” she commented once, savagely, “that we’re being lied to on a vast scale. But let it be so. We can use psychological tests to verify all the vital details.
“For the time being it is important that you relieve the fears of everyone you find it necessary to question. We must convince these people that Earth will accept them on an equal basis without bias or prejudice of any kind because of their robot orig—”
She bit her lip. “That’s an ugly word, the worst kind of propaganda. We must eliminate it from our thoughts.”
“I’m afraid,” the officer shrugged, “not from our thoughts.”
She stared at him, narrow-eyed, then cut him off angrily. A moment later she was talking into the general transmitter: “The word robot must not be used—by any of our personnel—under pain of fine—”
Switching off, she put a busy signal on her spare receiver, and called Psychology House. Lieutenant Neslor’s face appeared on the plate. “I heard your order just now, noble lady,” the woman psychologist said. “I’m afraid, however, that we’re dealing with the deepest instincts of the human animal—hatred or fear of the stranger, the alien.
“Excellency, we come from a long line of ancestors who, in their time, have felt superior to others because of some slight variation in the pigmentation of the skin. It is even recorded that the color of the eyes has influenced the egoistic in historical decisions. We have sailed into very deep waters, and it will be the crowning achievement of our life if we sail out in a satisfactory fashion.”  p. 11-12

The central section of the story takes place after Maltby joins the ship, and involves the probing of Maltby by Laurr and her crew. They learn, after psychologically surprising him on launch with a scene that makes it seem as if he is floating over the planet, that Maltby is a mixture of both Dellian and non-Dellian robot, a “Mixed Man”. Later, when Laurr suspects he may there for nefarious reasons, we see his ability to switch between his dual minds to evade human probing and interrogation:

These people might be more dangerous than she had thought. She said with unnatural sharpness for her: “As you know, we have to question you. We would prefer that you do not take offense. You have told us that Cassidor VII, the chief planet of the Fifty Suns, is twenty-five hundred lightyears from here. Normally, we would spend more than sixty years feeling our way across such an immense gap of uncharted, star-filled space. But you have given us a choice of orbits.
“We must make sure those orbits are honest, offered without guile or harmful purpose. To that end we have to ask you to open your mind and answer our questions under the strictest psychological surveillance.”
“I have orders,” said Maltby, “to cooperate with you in every way.”
He had wondered how he would feel, now that the hour of decision was upon him. But there was nothing abnormal. His body was a little stiffer, but his minds—
He withdrew his self into the background and left his Dellian mind to confront all the questions that came. His Dellian mind that he had deliberately kept apart from his thoughts.
That curious mind, which had no will of its own, but which, by remote control, reacted with the full power of an I. Q. of 191.
Sometimes, he marveled himself at that second mind of his. It had no creative ability, but its memory was machinelike, and its resistance to outside pressure was, as the woman psychologist had so swiftly analyzed, over nine hundred. To be exact, the equivalent of I. Q. 917.

Maltby answers all Laurr’s questions satisfactorily, and he has dinner with her later that evening—the same time that the course he has plotted will cause the ship will hit the storm’s edges! During the meal one of Laurr’s psychologists interrupts them: she has worked out that Maltby’s Mixed Man heritage means he has two brains, and that he may have used them to conceal his intentions. Laurr orders an emergency course change, and Maltby is taken away to be interrogated. This latter process involves breaking down his resistance by conditioning him to love Grand Captain Laurr.
Despite the course change, the ship hits the storm:

If she had had time to slow, the storm would have meant nothing.
Striking that mass of gas at half a light-year a minute was like running into an unending solid wall. The great ship shuddered in every plate as the deceleration tore at her gigantic strength.
In seconds she had run the gamut of all the recoil systems her designers had planned for her as a unit.
She began to break up.
And still everything was according to the original purpose of the superb engineering firm that had built her. The limit of unit strain reached, she dissolved into her nine thousand separate sections.
Streamlined needles of metal were those sections, four hundred feet long, forty feet wide; sliverlike shapes that sinuated cunningly through the gases, letting the pressure of them slide off their smooth hides.
But it wasn’t enough. Metal groaned from the torture of deceleration. In the deceleration chambers, men and women lay at the bare edge of consciousness, enduring agony that seemed on the verge of being beyond endurance.
Hundreds of the sections careened into each other in spite of automatic screens, and instantaneously fused into whitehot coffins.
And still, in spite of the hideously maintained velocity, that mass of gases was not bridged; light-years of thickness had still to be covered.
For those sections that remained, once more all the limits of human strength were reached. The final action was chemical, directly on the human bodies that remained of the original thirty thousand. Those bodies for whose sole benefit all the marvelous safety devices had been conceived and constructed, the poor, fragile, human beings who through all the ages had persisted in dying under normal conditions from a pressure of something less than fifteen gravities.
The prompt reaction of the automatics in rolling back every floor, and plunging every person into the deceleration chambers of each section—that saving reaction was abruptly augmented as the deceleration chamber was flooded by a special type of gas.
Wet was that gas, and clinging. It settled thickly on the clothes of the humans, soaked through to the skin and through the skin, into every part of the body.
Sleep came gently, and with it a wonderful relaxation. The blood grew immune to shock; muscles that, in a minute before, had been drawn with anguish—loosened; the brain impregnated with life-giving chemicals that relieved it of all shortages remained untroubled even by dreams.
Everybody grew enormously flexible to gravitation pressures—a hundred—a hundred and fifty gravities of deceleration; and still the life force clung. The great heart of the universe beat on. The storm roared along its inescapable artery, creating the radiance of life, purging the dark of its poisons—and at last the tiny ships in their separate courses burst its great bounds.
They began to come together, to seek each other, as if among them there was an irresistible passion that demanded intimacy of union.
Automatically, they slid into their old positions; the battleship Star Cluster began again to take form—but there were gaps. Segments destroyed, and segments lost.

Perhaps the story’s best passage, and the, “They began to come together, to seek each other, as if among them there was an irresistible passion that demanded intimacy of union” phrase telegraphs the final section of the story.

Maltby and Laurr end up shipwrecked together on a nearby planet, where they are out of touch with the partially reconstituted ship, and have to work together against a group of hostile aliens. During this Maltby’s love conditioning becomes apparent. We later find out that Laurr is, if they are not rescued, under a legal compulsion to reproduce with Maltby and populate the planet! This narrative arc means that the story changes from an excellent superscience space opera into more of a boy-gets-girl piece which, while not badly done, is not as good as what preceded it (some of the relationship material is a little dated and corny). The pair are (spoiler) eventually rescued by the ship, by which time Laurr is carrying Maltby’s child.
Notwithstanding the weaker last part, the story is still an impressive piece.2
Fifty Million Monkeys by Raymond F. Jones starts off on a future Earth, in the offices of Jamieson & Son, a firm of “Consulting Physicists” who apparently have a world-wide monopoly on “brain-teaming” (science has become too complicated for individual specialists and they now work together in psychologically matched teams). Craig, the son of the owner, is greeted one morning by Carlotta, the Director of Psychological Engineering, with the news that she has cancelled his appointments. She tells him that Team Thirty Four are cracking under the burden of “some knowledge which is causing them tremendous fear”. We learn the team were working on a problem involving Maitland Company spaceships and their navigational errors during long flights.

Craig orders the team’s psychological tapes and the pair put on their headsets:

The first wave of near-paralyzing fear threw a giddy, shimmering cloak about him. He groped blindly amid darkness for a chair. Carlotta helped him to one.
Surging, mounting—that fear filled the Universe and had nothing to do with personal security. It was fear that existence itself would cease to be existence and become a black and nameless nothingness.
He tore off the headset and sat in momentary trembling. Impassively, Carlotta stood beside him. Her eyes were closed but the cap was still on her head.
No expression showed on her face as she let that terrible sensation flow over her mind and rebuffed it calmly.
In wonderment, Craig watched her.
He knew that such ability was the result of her long years of training in peering into the dark, mysterious, amplified depths of men’s mind. Yet still he wondered how she could do it day after day and remain sane. He glanced down at the headset in his hands and let her go on.
After a moment, she opened her eyes. “Here’s the part you should know. I’ll turn it down a bit.”
He refitted the cap to his skull once more and the subdued impulses throbbed in his mind again. He sensed something more definite than the blinding fear. He sensed a conflict. And he sensed the cause of it. There was the impression of a vast, overwhelming curtain that hung threateningly over all creation, like a wrap of night about to fall forever.
Then it was over. The spools had run to the end.
He wiped his brow. “They must have sent up the wrong spools. That could only come out of a psychopathic ward.”  p. 41

After this they decide to give the “Maitland Problem” to Team Sixty Eight and monitor their progress while they investigate what has happened to Team Thirty Four.
We then get some backstory about the origin of these science teams before Team Thirty Four turn up in Craig’s office asking to be disbanded. During this conversation, Craig finds out what the problem is: the Stillson drives powering Maitland’s spaceships are creating regions of polarised space which, when it eventually meets its opposite, will cancel out and result in the immediate extinction of the universe. According to the team, who have already looked into the problem, there is no solution.
After Craig’s initial attempts to find a cure with another team fail, he becomes personally involved and forms a super-team. He also follows up a hunch that the problem is solvable by extracting the answer from “randomness”. This concept is initially not very convincing, or clear. Moreover, it results in an obsession with the idea of a group of monkeys randomly typing all the books in the British Museum, to the point that he actually orders a batch of monkeys and sets them to work in the basement.

This experiment is soon discontinued, and instead they set up several machines producing random English and maths, later adding a selector that prints only the coherent parts. Eventually one of the machines produces a math theorem that lets the teams manipulate time, which speeds up the process even further. Meanwhile, the English machine produces an alternate history of a human world, which they think may be in another existence:

One page near the middle told of the beginnings of the horrors.
“After the days of the hungry ones came the Paralytic Year. It was first observed in the Great City on the fourteen of four of thirty eleven. During the morning of that day several persons were found standing upon the streets, entirely unmoving and unable to move. They stared ahead with a look of despair upon their unchanging faces. They could not be persuaded to move or make any intelligent sign and when they were moved to hospitals they responded to no stimulus whatever.
“Through that night and during the next day the condition spread to other cities and by nightfall of the second day a million of the paralytics were stone rigid.
“It was, of course, impossible to locate all or even a small part of the unfortunates, especially in isolated districts. The majority of them remained where they were stricken, and as the days passed, they simply starved to death. They toppled where they stood, dying in an agony that could not express. Their corpses were everywhere. During that one terrible year over three hundred million died in that fashion.
“What it was or where it came from, no one ever knew. It was only another of the results of the Broken Law. Again the Light Master appeared in all the stricken cities throughout the world, and men hid their faces from the being. It touched the dead and stricken and a new plague of horrors swept over the world. Some were winged creatures that were seen to fly only against the Moon in the great cities. Others became crawling things that oozed into the sea and were drowned. Still others slunk about the street, mere rotting corpses that seemed possessed of some unknown, unholy mobility.”
When Craig finished the History, it was morning and the night was gone.  p. 68-69

As you would expect (spoiler) they finally discover a solution, but the minor plot complications aren’t over yet, and Craig has to sort out a personal dispute between his father and Maitland’s owner over a “chessmath” game before they can get access to the Stillson drives. This is a minor and unnecessary twist in the plot on the way to the big transcendent ending, which has the final random machine (amid warnings of its self-awareness from the team) giving birth to a “being of light”, who sorts out the problem and infuses Craig with god-like Powers. The being shows him another plane of existence and says he can go there and take Earth too—and that Craig can become the Light Master. When Craig hears this he heeds the warning in what he has previously read and goes back to Earth, putting his energy back into the machines and blowing the roof off the company building in the process.
Initially I wasn’t looking forward to reading this one—I haven’t been a big fan of Jones’ work so far—and it took me a long time to get through this as I could only read it in ten page chunks (it is a 26,000 word novella). The reason for my inability to read much more in a single sitting is that the story is generally clunky and expository, and uses several odd or unlikely concepts against the background of an unconvincing future world. However, around the halfway point it developed a momentum of its own and I warmed to it a little, although not to the point that I actually liked it particularly—but enough to concede that this ambitious piece is not entirely without interest.
If you are up for a story that involves pulp metaphysics (maybe if you are a fan of Barrington Bayley’s early work) you may find this worth a look.
Paradox Lost by Fredric Brown gets off to a lovely start:

A bluebottle fly had got in through the screen, somehow, and it droned in monotonous circles around the ceiling of the classroom. Even as Professor Dolohan droned in monotonous circles of logic up at the front of the class. Shorty McCabe, seated in the back row, glanced from one to another of them and finally settled on the bluebottle fly as the more interesting of the two.
“The negative absolute,” said the professor, “is, in a manner of speaking, not absolutely negative, this is only seemingly contradictory. Reversed in order, the two words acquire new connotations. Therefore—”
Shorty McCabe sighed inaudibly and watched the bluebottle fly, and wished that he could fly around in circles like that, and with such a soul-satisfying buzz. In comparative sizes and decibels, a fly made more noise than an airplane.
More noise, in comparison to size, than a buzz saw. Would a buzz saw saw metal? Say, a saw. Then one could say he saw a buzz saw saw a saw. Or leave out the buzz and that would be better : I saw a saw saw a saw. Or better yet; Sue saw a saw saw a saw.  p. 83

McCabe then sees the bluebottle disappear, apparently in mid-air, and when he explores the same space with his fingers they disappear too. He eventually finds himself in a dark void talking to another man who later takes him back in time (the hole in space is a time warp) to hunt dinosaurs.
After the captivating opening this eventually deteriorates into a talking heads story about how the dinosaurs died out. It is an unconvincing explanation.

The Proud Robot by Henry Kuttner is the third and best of the ‘Gallegher’ stories I’ve read so far. In this one the scientist, who can only invent things when drunk and invariably forgets what the inventions are for when he sobers up, has to contend with both a disobedient, narcissistic robot called Joe, and a disgruntled client called Brock, whose VoxView cinema business faces ruin because of pirated material. While Brock is berating Gallegher for not having completed the job he has been paid for (developing a content protection system for Brock’s tri-dimensional movies), Joe the robot introduces himself:

“No,” the robot said suddenly, “it’s no use. No use at all, Brock.”
“What the—”
Gallegher sighed wearily. “I forget the damned thing’s alive. Mr. Brock, meet Joe. Joe, meet Mr. Brock—of VoxView.”
Joe turned, gears meshing within his transparent skull. “I am glad to meet you, Mr. Brock. Allow me to congratulate you on your good fortune in hearing my lovely voice.”
“Ugh,” said the magnate inarticulately. “Hello.”
“Vanity of vanities, all is vanity,” Gallegher put in, sotto voce. “Joe’s like that. A peacock. No use arguing with him either.”
The robot ignored this aside. “But it’s no use, Mr. Brock,” he went on squeakily. “I’m not interested in money. I realize it would bring happiness to many if I consented to appear in your pictures, but fame means nothing to me. Nothing. Consciousness of beauty is enough.”
Brock began to chew his lips. “Look,” he said savagely, “I didn’t come here to offer you a picture job. See? Am I offering you a contract? Such colossal nerve— Pah! You’re crazy.”
“Your schemes are perfectly transparent,” the robot remarked coldly. “I can see that you’re overwhelmed by my beauty and the loveliness of my voice—its grand tonal qualities. You needn’t pretend you don’t want me, just so you can get me at a lower price. I said I wasn’t interested.”
“You’re cr-r-razy!” Brock howled, badgered beyond endurance, and Joe calmly turned back to his mirror.
“Don’t talk so loudly,” the robot warned. “The discordance is deafening. Besides you’re ugly and I don’t like to look at you.” Wheels and cogs buzzed inside the transplastic shell.
Joe extended his eyes on stalks and regarded himself with every appearance of appreciation.  p. 97

The story continues in the series’ usual rambling way (Gallegher goes to one of the pirate cinemas, and later meets some movie types before ending up in court) but it improves as it goes along, building to a reveal about the robot’s function that is a mini-tour de force. In this scene Gallegher simultaneously regains control of Joe, and (spoiler) finds out what the robot is for (it is a can-opener cum content protection device!) I know that this may not seem impressive in summary, but in the context of the story this is both amusing and ingenious.
Noted in passing is the story’s prescience about the idea of home TV putting cinemas out of business, and the latter’s later revival.
Willie by Frank Belknap starts with Monitor 236 looking at domed cities in a valley before realising he is wearing an animal skin around his loins. He doesn’t know why he is standing there but, before he can process the situation, he hears a noise behind him and sees a Prowler, which prompts him to throw his axe. After the Prowler dies, Monitor 236 cannot remember how he got into his current situation, so he decides to go to the city and find Willie, his robot.
As he approaches the city he gets on one of the moving sidewalks. When he gets there he finds it is deserted—apart from a young woman, who is also wearing animal skins. Together they go to meet the rest of her tribe and, when they arrive, they discuss the threat of the Prowlers. Throughout all this, Monitor 236 intermittently says things that don’t make any sense to the rest of them.

The story climaxes with a battle when the Prowlers attack. The city’s robots join in to vanquish the threat, and Monitor 236 is finally reunited with Willie the robot. We find that Monitor 236 has accidentally time-travelled a million years into the future, and that Willie has been dutifully waiting.
This story is little more than a series of random events and, as I mentioned last issue, I’m not a big fan of stories where men wake up in bodies/rooms/situations/etc. wondering how they got there.
Symbiotica by Eric Frank Russell is the third of the ‘Jay Score/Marathon’ stories about a robot that is part of a spaceship crew. Score plays a minor part in this one (I haven’t recently read the others so do not know how prominent he is in those), and the story mostly concerns itself with the kidnap of the crew by the natives of an alien planet. The crew’s subsequent problems with the native flora and fauna—which is all interdependent3— is initially a pretty good read (Russell writes crisp, fast-paced and absorbing prose):

Reaching the monstrous growth, we made a circle just beyond the sweep of its treacherous leaves, had a look to see where [our Martian crewmate] was wrapped in glue. He wasn’t wrapped in glue. We found him forty feet up the trunk, five of his powerful tentacles clamped around its girth, the other five embracing the green native we’d pursued. His captive was struggling wildly and futilely, all the time yelling a highpitched stream of gibberish.
Carefully, Kli Yang edged down the trunk. The way he looked and moved made him resemble an impossible cross between a college professor and an educated octopus. His eyes rolling with terror, the native battered at Kli’s glassite helmet. Kli blandly ignored the hostility, reached the branch that had caught Jepson, didn’t descend any farther. Still grasping the furiously objecting green one, he crept along the whipping limb until he reached its leafless end. At that point, he and the native were being waved up and down in twenty five-feet sweeps.
Timing himself, he cast off at the lowermost point of one beat, scuttled from reach before another eager branch could swat him.  p. 138

That said, you will need to ignore some idiotic behaviour on the part of the crew (who appear to be practising for the role of short-lived extras in the Alien movies), and the inordinate amount of back-biting that goes on between them. The story also goes on for too long (there is seemingly endless trailing about on the planet’s surface) and it ultimately descends into one of those ‘humans-slaughter-aliens’ tales, or more accurately, ‘dumb-humans-who-don’t-get-on-with-each-other-slaughtering-aliens’ tales. A more likely ending is that they would all have collected their Darwin Awards.
It is okay overall, I guess, but I’m a bit surprised that this made the Retro Hugo final ballot.

This issue’s Cover by William Timmins is a bit drab, and it isn’t helped by the text box used for the lead story title—a rather thoughtless piece of cover design
Around two-thirds of this issue’s Interior artwork comes from Paul Orban (ten illustrations), most of which seem competent if uninspired (although it’s hard to tell from the poor scan I was reading). My favourite of his is probably the drawing of the alien tree from Symbiotica. Hall’s two line drawings for the Jameson aren’t bad, as is Alfred’s single contribution. I liked Frank Kramer’s can opener/robot illustration best of all, I think.
In Concentration, Campbell uses his editorial to tell readers that, having just changed from bedsheet to the smaller pulp size format, they are changing again to a smaller digest size:

Beginning with the November issue next month, Astounding goes into a yet smaller size—the smallest it has ever attained. The reason should be obvious by now—paper shortage. There’s plenty of wood for wood pulp, plenty of machinery for production of the paper, and plenty of all the necessary chemicals—except chlorine, used for paper bleaching but needed more urgently for war-products processing; it’s an extremely useful general reagent—but there is a decided shortage of two sine qua non’s—manpower and transportation. So we use less paper.
But there will be surprisingly little reduction in content, because we will omit all advertising material; every page of the magazine will be a page of editorial material. The size will be somewhat larger than the “pocket” size books, but smaller than the present standard; there will be one hundred sixty pages of regular newsprint paper, plus sixteen pages of special material—a total of one hundred seventy-six pages. The sixteen special pages will be done in rotogravure, making it possible to print a number of articles which have absolutely required photographic articles and which, because of that, have been impossible heretofore.
The regular text will not be printed on the usual high-speed rotary press, either; we’ll be using a slower, older, but definitely cleaner letterpress-type press. The letterpress type has never attained the speed of production required for the enormous runs needed for a chain of magazines as voluminous as the Street & Smith Publications, or for a modern major newspaper. But the high-speed rotary press has never succeeded in producing the clean, sharp, and really black type impression the older, slower method did. Since only two of the Street & Smith magazines will be using the small size, it will be practicable to run them on the slower letterpress.  p. 6

Tidal Waves by Malcolm Jameson is a science article about tides that isn’t entirely clear in places—it could have done with some diagrams—but I learnt that the moon overtakes the tides it creates, and what with varying local geography, etc., it makes them quite complex events. I also learned fleetingly what “perigee”, “perihelion”, “meridian”, and “ephemerides” meant. Gone now.4

The Analytical Laboratory: August 1943 was commented on in that issue’s review.5
In Times to Come mostly plugs a new ‘Venus Equilateral’ story from George O. Smith:

The lead yarn is another of George O. Smith’s Venus Equilateral stories. George Smith is—as you might conceivably have guessed from the tone of familiarity with which his characters handle radio and electronic work—a radio engineer, research division in particular. Most of the gadgetry of Venus Equilateral exists as a fairly coherent reality in his mind. I imagine—the type of tubes, physical size of coils needed, etcetera. And some of the sour experiments he’s personally encountered, I suspect, led him to the basic idea of “Recoil.” the novelette coming up in November.  p. 162

There is no Brass Tacks in this issue.
Returning to my original comment at the start of this review, I’m not sure I’d say that this is the best issue of the year (that’s probably February) but it’s certainly worth getting for the van Vogt and the Kuttner.  ●

_____________________

1. My review of Great SF Stories #5, 1943 edited by Isaac Asimov & Martin H. Greenberg is here.

2. The Storm is one of the stories that Brian W. Aldiss talks about in detail in Trillion Year Spree (his history of science fiction which he expanded from his earlier Billion Year Spree in collaboration with David Wingrove):

A. E. van Vogt was talking confidently of interstellar winds back in 1943, and dropping in casual word of large dollops of space—as when a survey ship reports that a small system of stars “comprises two hundred sixty billion cubic light-years, and contains fifty million suns.” Van Vogt was the ideal practitioner of “Doc” Smiths billion year spree. He was not hard and cold and unemotional, in the manner of Clement, Asimov, and Heinlein. He could balance his cubic light-years and the paraphernalia of super-science with moments of tenderness and pure loony joy. Intimations of humanity surfaced now and again among all his frenetic mental powers and titanic alien effects.
Van Vogt is not seen at his best in longer work (he becomes as hopelessly snarled up as his readers in World of Null-A). Among his short stories, one of the best—because it exhibits all his talents in dynamic balance—is “The Storm” (1943), which contains some moments of love between Maltby and the Lady Laurr (Van Vogt was a sucker for a title). Indeed, there’s a hint that the story’s title is intended to refer also to an internal storm of emotion. Very sophisticated! But, of course, it was the intergalactic storm which interested readers, and that was what they got:
.
In those minutes before disaster struck, the battleship Star Cluster glowed like an immense and brilliant jewel. The warning glare from the Nova set off an incredible roar of emergency clamor through all of her hundred and twenty decks.
From end to end her lights flicked on. They burned row by row straight across her four thousand feet of length with the hard tinkle of cut gems. In the reflection of that light, the black mountain that was her hull looked like the fabulous planet of Cassidor, her destination, a sun at night from a far darkness, sown with diamond shining cities. Silent as a ghost, grand and wonderful beyond all imagination, glorious in her power, the great ship slid through the blackness along the special river of time and space which was her plotted course.
Even as she rode into the storm there was nothing visible. The space ahead looked as clear as any vacuum. So tenuous were the gases that made up the storm that the ship would not even have been aware of them if it had been travelling at atomic speeds.
Violent the disintegration of matter in that storm might be, and the sole source of cosmic rays, the hardest energy in the known universe. But the immense, the cataclysmic danger to the Star Cluster was a direct result of her own terrible velocity. If she had had time to slow, the storm would have meant nothing.
Striking that mass of gas at half a light year a minute was like running into an unending solid wall. The great ship shuddered in every plate as the deceleration tore at her gigantic strength.
In seconds she had run the gamut of all the recoil system her designers had planned for her as a unit.
She began to break up.
.
The writing has clarity and brevity, ably conveying Van Vogt’s excitement at his immense drama. Later, and beyond the pages of Campbell’s magazine, Van Vogt was never to recapture his first fine careless rapture. Nor that mixture of kookie science—half a light-year per minute, indeed!—with lyric excitement.  p. 236-237

3. Martin Greenberg says this about Symbiotica in the Great SF Stories #5: 1943:

Although the concept of symbiosis (the idea that species are linked together in mutually beneficial ways in nature) had long existed in biology, it did not receive widespread attention until the ecological concerns of the 1960s. “Symbiotica” beautifully illustrates the concept, and is a fine story besides.  p. 306

4. “Perigee” is the point in the orbit of a satellite, moon, planet, etc. at which it comes closest to the object it is orbiting; “perihelion” is the point in the orbit of a planet or other astronomical body at which it comes closest to the sun; “meridian” has various meanings, but here I think it was referring to a line of longitude (I should have known that one); “ephemerides” are tables listing the positions of the planets.

5. The Analytical Laboratory results for this issue appeared in December:

As usual the longest story tops the poll. I’ve come to the conclusion that the only way that you could get any sense out of these results is if you adjusted each set depending on its length (novella, novelette, etc.), how many stories are in the issue, etc. It would be a massive job, and I suspect it would still be garbage in, garbage out.
Campbell’s comments about Brass Tacks being taxed by the Post Office are interesting—why one Earth would they insist that reader’s letters are advertising matter? Bonkers.  ●

rssrss

David Redd, Collected Stories

 

David Redd, Collected Stories (Gostak Publishing, 2018, 444 pp.). The book is available in hardback (£25+p&p) or paperback (£15+p&p) from Lulu.com, and in electronic format from Lulu.com (£4), Amazon.co.uk (£3.66)/Amazon.com ($4.78), and iBooks.

_____________________

When one looks back at British magazine science fiction over the last seventy years or so, the period from 1964 to 1966 stands out as an obvious example of this sub-genre’s Golden Age, a time when many notable stories appeared and many new writers began their careers—and it almost didn’t happen.1
Early in 1964, the field2 consisted of two magazines published by Nova Publications (New Worlds, a monthly SF magazine, and Science Fantasy, a bimonthly fantasy magazine) and the business was struggling due to falling circulation. Nova Publications was making plans to wind up both of the magazines when, almost at the last moment, another publisher called Roberts & Vinter Ltd. acquired them.
By the start of 1966, the two 128 page bimonthly paperback format magazines that the new publisher produced in mid-1964 had grown to 160 page monthlies. Both magazines had different editors (John Carnell had edited both magazines for Nova), Michael Moorcock for New Worlds, and Kyril Bonfiglioli for Science Fantasy, and each magazine used all lengths of fiction up to and including serialised novels. As well as these two markets, Carnell had gone on to publish a quarterly anthology called New Writings in SF for Corgi Books, so British writers had an almost unprecedented number of home markets to pitch their new stories to. Many new voices emerged.
This last brings us neatly to David Redd, a Welsh writer who started publishing during this period with two sales to Moorcock’s New Worlds in 1966. Although Redd later contributed stories to other professional magazines over the following three decades (New Worlds, F&SF, Worlds of If, Interzone, Asimov’s SF, etc.), he never published any short story collections or novels (he wrote several of the latter during this period but none were published). This volume, a retrospective collection from Greg Pickersgill at new publisher Gostak Publishing, collects nearly all Redd’s work and rectifies that omission.
The book itself is a substantial volume (over four hundred pages), and the cover illustration is a painting done by Redd’s mother, E. C. K. Redd, for his story Sunbeam Caress. Inside the volume, as well as the thirty stories, are story notes by Redd (these overlap with the interview that appeared here recently but there is much new information), and an afterword by Greg Pickersgill.3

When it comes to the stories, I’d read nearly all of them a couple of months or so before the book appeared as research for the interview mentioned above. The ones that appealed to me most were the ‘Senechi’ and ‘Green England’ series stories.
The first of these two involves a future post-collapse Earth ruled by aliens, the centaur-like Senechi.4 The opening story, The Frozen Summer, has two Senechi going to the Arctic in a human-manned airship to find a “Summer Goddess” who, it materialises, is keeping her son in suspended animation until the ice age passes. The advanced technology (from an earlier pre-collapse period) that protects her and the valley proves difficult to overcome, and the story is mostly about how the airship party do this. I liked the vivid, economical style used in this piece and enjoyed the story until its rather baffling ending.
The second story in the series is Brother Ape, perhaps my favourite Redd story. This skips forward in time to when the advanced tech from the valley (now called the “Ludquist Anomaly”) is being investigated by a human called Blanchard at the behest of a Senechi called Ven Gonnel. The rest of the story is a fast paced and expansive adventure that involves, among other things, an assassination attempt on Blanchard, and his wife’s sister’s involvement with a group of intelligent apes she is trying to save from the Senechi. At times it feels a little like an extract from a longer work—although that is a good thing in this case as it lets the story hint at much more than is actually dealt with. That said, the narrative has a clear arc, and a transcendent last image that hints at something bigger to come in future stories.
The third story, Moon Pearls, is more of a mixed bag and, although I liked it well enough, it could have done with some more background or other development (I could tell you more if I could read my handwritten notes!)

There are two stories in the book from Redd’s ‘Green England’ series.5 Both are set in a totalitarian England that bears some resemblance to a future “green” version of Cambodia’s Year Zero. I thought this idea of a deeply dystopian green future quite novel, and it has not dated.
The first story is Green and Pleasant Land, a blackly amusing piece about paramilitary Greenshirts who go to rescue a family from an area that is scheduled to be razed:

Our target neighbourhood today is full of criminals, drug addicts, dole scroungers, heavy metal fans, general disposable scumbags. All of them hopelessly unecological in every cell of their useless bodies. In a few hours the main Greenshirt force will roll in and blast them all to pieces. We’ll enjoy that. But first, undercover teams like us here must sneak in and pull out the few decent clean-living families from there. We have a responsibility to rescue the good citizens and give them a better future. Perhaps they’ll be able to return later, after the area’s been recycled into grassland or farms…

As the home of a thousand people gets demolished before our eyes, and the last few refugees get gunned down, I remember some wise words from a famous ecological philosopher. He says that nuclear power stations can never be replaced by windmills unless somehow there a terrific population crash to reduce the demand for electricity. Well, if we go on weeding out all the irresponsible people from society, all the greedy and the wasteful and the just plain thoughtless, that population crash will work out just right.
We’ll eliminate all the salesmen, the shareholders, industrialists, polluters, muggers, cocaine pushers, drunkards, the selfish and the inefficient. Our numbers will be small enough to be self-supporting, needing only self-renewing resources, living in harmony with each other and with the environment. And if any people are irresponsible enough not to live in harmony with the environment, we’ll nuke the bastards.

The other series story (and one I bought for Spectrum SF #7), Green England, has two Americans, Mizta Shagga and Miz Bina, arriving in Green England ostensibly to negotiate a trade deal—but they really there for espionage, and hope to eventually turn the country into a capitalist one like their own. The rest of the story is an account of their intelligence gathering, which mostly occurs against the backdrop of a number of culture clash set pieces.
All of this is, unusually, told in the dialect of the visiting Americans:

No easy for he finding answer, what happening is man making too much vegetables growings. No finding until Day Seven. Then Mizta Shagga checking England police force population control. Now he seeing potential good market, seeing need good American products.
Seeing how Green police force already studying foreign progress useful areas like Public Repression like Irreversible Negative Feedback. Also he finding Day Seven interpreter no Mister John Smith but young specialist police equipment advisor.
Mizta Shagga talking ordinary trade with Superintendent Random Civilian Bombings. He needing excuse start real talking, so pointing finger official title plate on desk. “By the way, Superintendent, do you still actually carry out “random bombings” of civilians to maintain order?”
“No longer, I fear.” (Young interpreter slow, young interpreter careful.) “Our country has been quiet for many years now. All our people are happy in the Green lifestyle.”
“And if they are not happy?”
“They are eliminated.”

Towards the end of the story there are interesting revelations about the true nature of both societies.

A third series comprises his ‘Nancy’ time-travel stories. The first story, The Way to London Town, introduces Nancy, a precocious eleven year old girl and time traveller, a mutant caused by the Tuesday war, who travels a hundred years into the future and becomes involved in a fire raising/protection racket. This is competently plotted, but it’s an uncomfortable mix of sf and the mundane (the fire-raising, etc.) told in an almost tongue-in-cheek style that didn’t really engage me. I also didn’t have much luck with the prequel Nancy, a fragmentary origin story.
Perhaps the best of the three stories with Nancy in them (there is a fourth associated story I’ll get to in a minute) is Eternity Magic, (I should add that I published this one in Spectrum SF #6). In this Nancy uses her time-travel and paranormal powers to save a future king from an attempted coup. It has a clever and complex plot but, in spite of this, the outcome always seems a tad inevitable. That said, it is told with a light touch—it almost has the feel of a far-eastern fantasy in places—and has a number of nice parts, such as this description from a sea voyage Nancy has to make with her daughter Alana:

Moonlight over a darkened sea, with stars above and glistening reflections below. A moonpath to guide the ship southward. A mother and daughter standing content under ghostly white sails that whisper above them. Little streaks of water-fire skipping from wave to wave, as silvery fish outpace the ship by leaping like stones thrown in play through the warm, gentle night. This is the moment that should last forever, this is the moment that eternity-magic should bring.

Related to this series is The Mammoth Hunters, which doesn’t have Nancy in it but does feature one of the previous story’s characters, and is a short and grim piece about a time-travel safari to shoot mammoths. It has an entirely different tone from the previous three tales, and has a neat penultimate line that refocuses the story to show the true quarry. This had a big impact on me when I first read it many years ago, and it remains one of the better entries in this volume.

These three series are all what I would call “conventional” SF and there are several other stories in the volume that could be similarly described (and a few that are not, but I’ll come to those in a moment): The Dinosaurs of London is pretty much self-explanatory, an enjoyable post-apocalypse light adventure story that should have gone (spoiler) for the bleaker ending it sets up. You can see how this could have been the first story in a series if Redd had access to a receptive market at the time of writing (I’d probably have taken it for Spectrum SF if it has still been going, and nudged his elbow for more). Sundown, another of the volume’s best pieces, tells the story of a man invading a snowy, northern wilderness (a not uncommon locale in Redd’s work) defended by a White Lady and her sprites and dryads, etc. Although the story uses fantasy language, it has SF underpinnings, and (spoiler) an unexpectedly brutal ending. Also set in a northern landscape is A Quiet Kind of Madness, which involves a young woman and a “Snowfriend” who tells her of a tunnel to a land where men do not exist. This last is perhaps more an allegory than ordinary narrative by the time it finishes.
Sunbeam Caress is, perhaps, the polar opposite of the last story. In this tale we have a piece that, even though Redd was encouraged by Michael Moorcock to write it in the middle of the New Wave, harks back to the 1930s with its almost complete lack of human characters and relentless ideation. In this one we find ourselves on a far-future Earth dominated by a race-mind that controls several species (fruit bats, humans, etc.), and where alien columns of light are seen interacting with ambulatory crystals. There is a lot going on in this story (the longest piece in the book), perhaps too much so, but this is compensated for by the sheer volume of invention (you can see why Pohl said he’d take a chance on it rather than “let go of the imagination it represents . . .”).

Other stories in the book, which also tend to fall, more or less, into the “conventional” category, include (these are mostly novelettes): Warship (piracy in a post-atomic war society), The House on Hollow Mountain (aliens give two men the chance of a different life), When Jesus Came to the Moon for Christmas (self-explanatory, and perhaps the only one of the writer’s stories that touches on his faith), The Old Man of Munington (immortals in Wales), and Trout Fishing in Leytonstone (a slightly gonzo tale about a future poet with problems), and Yuhuna Am (an interesting future dystopia that shows Redd updating the style and content of his stories for the new millennium—only to run into a permanent writer’s block afterwards).
All of the above account for around three-quarters of the book’s length.
Most of the rest of the material, about eight or so stories, are of a distinctly different type, generally shorter material that has a literary or surreal feel, is a mood piece, or is a fantasy (while I was reading through all of this writer’s work and came across these, it became clear that he is probably two or more writers rolled into one). This material is generally shorter in length than the group above and, as a result, sometimes slighter.

Two of this group that are worthy of mention are On the Deck of the Flying Bomb, and The Wounded Dragon. On the Deck of the Flying Bomb is a perplexing story about a stowaway on a flying bomb who spends his time learning about how the craft operates and how the crew interact:

As a stowaway, hidden like an unseen parasite, I can use the lifeboat cameras to observe the workings of the Flying Bomb and its crew. My lifeboat is one bead in the necklace of three hundred lifeboats strung along the rim of the upper deck: no inquiring crewman will think to examine my little hermit cell until I lift it from the deck and glide away. This is a strange behemoth that I shall be leaving: a creature so vast that on its deck there is no sensation of motion. The Flying Bomb is four miles long and two miles wide, and its curving underbelly is over a mile deep. On its upper deck the buildings form a large town where the crewmen live and work. On the lower deck the maintenance staff move like pale ants in caverns, tending the machines which keep this artificial world airborne. And further below is the unstable cargo which will explode novalike when the Flying Bomb reaches its target.

He plans to establish the ship’s position and then leave in one of the lifeboats. Then they meet another flying bomb. . . . This brief story left much, much more of the iceberg hidden than I liked, but it was one of the titles that was repeatedly mentioned when I asked one of my Facebook groups what their favourite Redd stories were.6
The Wounded Dragon is one of Redd’s later stories which, like a couple of others, is set in Wales. This one begins after a battle, when three sons take a wounded dragon, their father, to an island of healers. The last time the dragon was there he learned how to change from a man into a dragon. This time the maidens tell him he will die before the next morning, so he goes into the castle to see the healer. The latter lets the dragon go through three magic doors: on each occasion these offer experiences of the normal life he missed while fighting (something accentuated by the fact that every time he returns through the door to the castle he finds one of his three remains sons has gone). The end of the story has him revert to a man and cross to the land where he meets a woman who asks him to stay with her. He decides to sleep for a while under the hill instead. . . . The ending rather lost me but I enjoyed the mythic feel of the story.
There is also, among the remaining stories, the first publication of The World of Arthur English, a post-apocalyptic tale which proved unfathomable to me.

I’ve already mentioned that Redd provides and introduction and notes for his collection: the story afterwords are not encouraging reading for would-be writers, as the notes for Nancy, published in 1971 (his fifth year of publication) illustrate:

By the time it appeared in print I had produced over a quarter of a million words in failed novel manuscripts plus several novel beginnings which all petered out around page 93. I was to make such attempts again and again, always without success.

Matters didn’t much improve for Redd, with years sometimes going by without any acceptances. And yet he kept on plugging away at it and, now and then, a story or two would break into print. Eventually there were the thirty pieces assembled here.
I started this review talking about the mini-Golden Age experienced by British SF in the mid-1960s, but what I didn’t mention was that it came to a precipitous end when Roberts & Vinter’s distributor went bankrupt at the end of 1966, and the decision was made to retrench and cancel the magazines. Moorcock subsequently funded and launched New Worlds as a large size and more progressive magazine in 1967, but Science Fantasy/SF Impulse remained dead. Writers were then faced with a single editor/single magazine market in the UK,7 a situation that would largely persist in Britain from that point on (and at some points during the 1970s there wasn’t even a magazine market).
You rather wonder what Redd’s writing career (not to mention many other Brit writers over the years) would have looked like if there had been a couple of supportive monthly British SF magazines during those decades. Perhaps he would have managed to stretch those long novelettes into novellas and then to novels; perhaps there would have been a couple of series that could have been fixed up into books. From the evidence here, it’s not hard not to come to the conclusion that there could have been many more good stories from this talented writer, someone capable of vivid, fast-paced and inventive adventure, to more dream-like8 literary material (and several types in between). Sadly we will never know—but what we do have is this volume and, for less than four quid from Amazon, it is a bargain.  ●

David Redd, Collected Stories (Gostak Publishing, 2018, 444 pp.). The book is available in hardback (£25+p&p) or paperback (£15+p&p) from Lulu.com, and in electronic format from Lulu.com (£4), Amazon.co.uk (£3.66)/Amazon.com ($4.78), and iBooks.

_____________________

1. I don’t mean to be deliberately controversial, but I’ve limited the period to 1964-1966 because, after that period, the large-size New Worlds, for all the superior stories it published, seemed more of a transatlantic affair (notable work appeared from many Americans, including Disch, Sladek, Spinrad, Ellison, Delany, etc.). It was also more exclusive than inclusive,* and several semi-regular writers dropped by the wayside. In any event, after eighteen months or so it started disappearing into its own navel and finally ceased publication.
* Understandably enough Moorcock wanted to publish the magazine he had always wanted to produce, and he was, after all, the one paying the bills.

2. I’m concerned about original magazines here, not the UK reprints of Analog, Galaxy, F&SF and the like.

3. Pickersgill contributes an illuminating afterword where he tells us about the (considerable) birth pains of the book (I hope this hasn’t put him off future projects), and that he and Redd both live in the same Welsh town. We also learn that Redd apparently has the patience of a saint:

In our meetings back in the late 1960s David rather indulged my ideas of Being a Writer, though now I am sure he instinctively knew I lacked the right stuff. At that time my fantasies of writing had not met the impenetrable barrier of talentless inability to carry a plot in a bucket or create a character not stolen wholesale from anything by M John Harrison. He passed me two novel manuscripts to ‘try something with’. One was a roman a clef of his student days, a simply told observational narrative which I was taken with enough to read complete, though I felt it was short of dazzlement and enchantment. I rewrote a few sections in the style of an explosion in an adjective factory, with collateral damage in the pronoun and adverb plants along the way. A simple sequence of someone entering a room and being told to sit down by someone behind a desk positively whirled with artificial energy that would have been as tiring to enact as it was to read. And it was at least half as long again as the original. I remember David nodding in his rather mild-mannered way and saying “Well, it’s certainly different . . .”

4. There is an unpublished 15,000 word novelette, Solus, in the ‘Senechi’ sequence. Had Redd written one more story in this series he would have probably had enough material for a fix-up novel and a collection. Oh, and Redd used the money from the first ‘Senechi’ story, The Frozen Summer, to buy, fittingly enough, a sheepskin jacket.

5. There are actually four stories in the ‘Green England’ series. One, Doctor Sam, was omitted for some reason. A pity, it’s short and quite good and fits in well with the other series stories—a bonus for future electronic editions maybe? Another one, England’s Green and Pleasant Land, has only appeared in German (England, schönes grünes Land, 1996). This story (which I’ve read) has a good start and reasonable finish, but the (satirical) middle, which is about the Scientology based genesis of the Eco movement (against a background of a Thatcherite Britain), and a subsequent nuclear war, is very dated (something the writer has acknowledged himself).

6. Redd mentions in his notes that On the Deck of the Flying Bomb was originally bought and paid for by Hilary Bailey for New Worlds but, when that anthology series folded, he donated it to the new magazine Interzone (and it was subsequently reprinted in the first Interzone anthology).

7. New Writings in SF was still around throughout the sixties and seventies but reduced its publication frequency to one or two volumes a year.

8. I recently learned that the formal term for “dreamlike” is “oneiric”. The subject being discussed was van Vogt. Not a comparison being made here.  ●

rssrss

Astounding Science-Fiction v32n01, September 1943

ISFDB link
Archive.org link

_____________________

Editor, John W. Campbell Jr.; Assistant Editor, Catherine Tarrant

Fiction:
Attitude • novella by Hal Clement ∗∗∗
Doodad • short story by Ray Bradbury
Robinc • short story by Anthony Boucher [as by H. H. Holmes]
Concealment • short story by A. E. van Vogt ∗∗
Judgment Night (Part 2 of 2) • serial by C. L. Moore ∗∗∗+
Probability Zero:
Der Fuehrer’s Base
• short story by George O. Smith –
You Said It! • short story by Charles Ben Davis
Finance • short story by David Charles –
Y = Sin X • short story by Harold Wooster –
Universal Solvent • short story by Clayton James MacBeth
And Watch the Fountains • short story by Ray Bradbury

Non-fiction:
Cover • by William Timmins
Interior artwork • by William Kolliker (x4), Paul Orban (x2), Frank Kramer (x2), Elton Fax (x2), A. Williams (x5),
Minute and Mighty • by John W. Campbell, Jr.
In Times to Come
The Analytical Laboratory: June & July 1943
The End of the Rocket Society
(Part 2 of 2) • essay by Willy Ley
Brass Tacks • letters

_____________________

I’m not a huge fan of what I would call “enigmatic awakening” beginnings in stories, those which involve a narrator who has no memory of who they are and/or what has happened to them and/or where they are. Why?—because this is usually followed by pages of tedious observation and deduction that eventually lead to a reveal which is, more often than not, something that involves aliens. That said, Attitude by Hal Clement is one of the better examples of the type, possibly because the story relatively quickly resolves the enigma and moves on to become a different type of story.
The protagonist in this one is a spaceship doctor called Little, who wakes up in free fall inside a strange hexagonal room with copper coloured walls. After examining his surroundings he deduces he is probably a prisoner on a spaceship. He confirms the latter is correct when he is later fed, or rather watered, by means of floating spheres of lime juice delivered regularly at four-hour intervals. This continues over several days, long enough for Little to start becoming sick of the lime juice, until there are gravity changes and manoeuvring which culminate in a landing.
Little then hears humans walking in the corridors, but his calls are ignored until a ladder drops into his cell. When he finally climbs out of his cell five silent starfish-like aliens (four in the illustration) take him to a chamber where he is reunited with the rest of his crew from his ship, the Gomeisa.

At this point the story switches to become essentially a prison break story, starting with the ship’s captain explaining to Little how they were boarded after stopping to survey a giant asteroid (a related explanation about Little’s survival in a space vacuum—which involves a gas used in suspended animation that turns up again later in the story—is not convincing). The situation is further developed when a Vegan translator from another captive ship appears and tells them that their attempts to build weapons have been pre-empted by their continually watchful captors.

The rest of the story involves: (a) a partially successful escape attempt by the human crew; (b) an attempt by the remaining human prisoners to fix their stellar position using a Heath Robinson contraption of various lenses and a diffraction grating; (c) the construction of a video transmitter; and (d) the human’s intentional loss of the transmitter to the aliens. This latter occurs after a realisation by Little about how the starfish-aliens communicate:

“They think and talk immeasurably faster than we do; and their thoughts are not in arbitrary word or picture symbols, but in attitudes. Watching them, I have come to the conclusion that they don’t have a language as we understand it at all; the motions and patterns of the spines, which convey thought from one to another, are as unconscious and natural as expressions on our faces. The difference being that their ‘faces’ cover most of their bodies, and have a far greater capacity for expression. The result is that they have as easy a time learning to interpret expressions and bodily attitudes of other creatures, as we would have learning a simple verbal tongue. What the psychologists call attitude—or expression, to us—is the key to their whole mental activity. Until we understood that, we had no chance of using their own methods to defeat them, or even of understanding the methods.”  p. 44

The story climaxes with (spoiler) the use of the suspended animation gas, which enables the humans to break into the aliens’ control room and use their confiscated transmitter (which the aliens have by now patched into their own more powerful systems). The explanation at the end of the story, after the aliens flee, reveals that the prisoners were allowed a considerable degree of freedom to do as they wished so the aliens could learn from them.

Although some of this isn’t entirely convincing (I’m not sure how a suspended animation gas would help you survive a space vacuum), the story gets off to a pretty good start, and Clement’s clear, readable style makes the story seem shorter than its 24,000 words (Campbell’s 30,000 word estimate in the last issue appears inaccurate). It shows some promise for what was only Clement’s third story.
Doodad by Ray Bradbury starts with a journalist pursued by gangsters taking refuge is a superscience version of a magic shop. After the proprietor shows him the various items he has for sale (“Thimgumabobs, Doodads, Watchamacallits, Hinkies”, etc.) Crowell leaves with a “doohingey”:

It may have been a crankshaft, and yet it resembled a kitchen shelf with several earrings dangling along a metal edge which supported three horn-shaped attachments and six mechanisms Crowell couldn’t recognize, and a thatch of tentacles resembling shoelaces poured out of the top.  p. 50

When Crowell gets back home the gangster boss turns up to kill him, but is (spoiler) killed by the doohingey, which also takes his body and puts it in the car. After Crowell disposes of the body, he gets a call from the shop owner to offer him a replacement model doohingey. When Crowell goes back to the shop he interviews the owner for the radio (“audio”) program he works for, and learns more about the shop’s items. The last scene has Crowell leaving with a box of various knickknacks which he then uses to stop two cars of gangsters that pursue him. There is a lame twist ending.

This is a beginning writer’s gimmick story, and not a particularly good one: it is rather dispiriting that this is one of the few pieces of Bradbury’s that Campbell accepted for Astounding (while presumably rejecting other contemporary stories such as the superior R for Rocket, which doesn’t seem any further from the magazine’s norms than, say, the Moore serial).1
Robinc by Anthony Boucher is a sequel to March’s Q. U. R., and is the second of his ‘Usuform Robot’ stories. This one starts with a change in the law to allow usuform—single function—robot production (previously only multifunction robots that looked like humans, i.e. androids, were allowed).
Grew, the owner of Robinc, the monopoly android producer then begins a dirty tricks campaign against Quinby and his usuform robots to put him out of business. This starts with a usuform dowsing robot blowing up during a public demonstration, and progresses through the kidnap of Quinby and the narrator, to a resolution (spoiler) where they modify one of Robinc’s robots to become a “converter”—an android which will convert others of its kind to the efficiency of usuformity. When an ever-increasing number of Grew’s Robinc androids turn up at Quinby’s for modification, he concedes.

I didn’t much like the previous story, which was unlikely and contrived, and this is pretty much more of the same.
Concealment by A. E. van Vogt is the first of his ‘Mixed Men’ stories about a planet of robots who, thousands of years previously, fled human persecution to set up their own society. One day, a human ship finds one of their ouposts:

The Earth ship came so swiftly around the planetless Gisser sun that the alarm system in the meteorite weather station had no time to react. The great machine was already visible when Watcher grew aware of it.
Alarms must have blared in the ship, too, for it slowed noticeably and, still braking, disappeared. Now it was coming back, creeping along, obviously trying to locate the small object that had affected its energy screens.
It loomed vast in the glare of the distant yellow-white sun, bigger even at this distance than anything ever seen by the Fifty Suns, a very hell ship out of remote space, a monster from a semimythical world, instantly recognizable from the descriptions in the history books as a battleship of Imperial Earth.
Dire had been the warnings in the histories of what would happen someday—and here it was.
He knew his duty. There was a warning, the age-long dreaded warning, to send to the Fifty Suns by the nondirectional subspace radio; and he had to make sure nothing telltale remained of the station.
There was no fire. As the overloaded atomic engines dissolved, the massive building that had been a weather substation simply fell into its component elements.
Watcher made no attempt to escape.
His brain, with its knowledge, must not be tapped. He felt a brief, blinding spasm of pain as the energy tore him to atoms.  p. 88

The Watcher’s sacrifice proves to be in vain as the Earth ship’s female commander, Grand Captain, the Right Honorable Gloria Cecily, the Lady Laurr of Noble Laurr,2 orders her scientists to reconstruct the station and the man. When this is completed Laurr introduces herself to the Watcher, and commands him to provide a course to his planet (she explains that Earth’s Empire allows no independent states). When he refuses he is forcibly interrogated by Laurr’s officers, at which point his IQ jumps to 800. Grand Captain Laurr then interrogates the Watcher herself, at which point (spoiler) he tries to attack her, and is cut down by energy beams. This reveals that he is a robot.
This starts well but has a rather inconclusive ending. I enjoyed it nonetheless as it provides background information to next month’s sequel The Storm, which I recently read in The Great SF Stories Volume 5, 1943.
Judgment Night by C. L. Moore continues in this second part with Juille, the daughter of the Emperor, being led down into the levels under the city by Egide, the leader of the insurgents, and Helia, her treacherous Andarean servant. The group eventually reaches a cavern where the ancient superweapons are kept, and Juille is left alone while they examine rest of the arsenal: this gives her a chance to hide one of the advanced guns in her clothing. When the others return, Juille hears a few of the weapons echo the sounds they make, at which point Egide plays his harp:

[His] calloused fingers swept the strings into a sudden, wild, wailing chord, and another, and then a third. The underground room rang with it, and on the wall a quiver of life leaped into shining motion as here and there a thin blade shrilled response. Egide laughed, a deep, full-throated sound, and shouted out what must have been a line or two of some old H’vani battle song.
His voice was startlingly sweet and strong and true.
The arsenal boomed with the deep, rolling echoes of it. Somewhere hidden under tons of dust, a forgotten drum boomed back, distant and softly muffled. Some metal cylinder of forgotten purpose took up the echo and replied with a clear, metallic reverberation, and down the hall an aeons-dead warrior’s helmet rang with its hollow mouth like a clapperless bell, and fell clanging to the floor and the silencing dust.
Egide laughed again, with a timbre of sudden intoxication, and smote his harp to a last wild, shrilling wail, sent one more phrase of the song booming down the room. And all the room replied. The muffled drum boomed back, and the clear ringing twang of the hidden cylinder, and the little blades shrilled like tongues upon the wall, shivering and twinkling with tiny motion.
Echoes rolled and rolled again. Egide’s voice sang on for a moment or two without him, diminishing against the walls. And this was no longer a thin, hopeless protest of the voiceless past against intrusion as the arsenal replied. Egide’s was a warrior’s voice, promising battle again, strong and savage with the savagery of a barbarous young race. These weapons had rung before, in the unfathomable past, to the voices of such men. Arsenal and weapons roared an answer to that promise of blood again, and the echoes died slowly among the blades and the drums and the hollow, hanging shields that might never echo any more to the sounds they were made to echo.
Juille, meeting the unashamed melodrama of his blue eyes and his laughter as he turned away, was appalled by a surge of genuine warmth and feeling. This was naked sentiment again, like the deliberate romance of Cyrille, but to her amazement, she found herself responding, and with an unexpected overwhelming response she did not understand.  p. 113-114

The next part of the plan is for Egide and his band to leave the planet with Juille as their hostage, but on the way back to the ship he goes to consult the enigmatic Ancients. While the rest of the group wait for him to return, Juille’s llar arrives and undoes her bonds. It slips a note and two items into her hand: the message is from Dunnar, and says that one of the items is the secret “photographic” weapon and gives instructions its use. The llar then leads her to the same place in the forest where Egide went to speak to the Ancients and, after some agonising, she follows him.

Juille penetrates deep into the forest, but the Ancient’s temple only slowly appears from the darkness of the trees. Inside the building there is a disorienting blackness:

Far, far away through the crystal on which she stood, a lazy motion stirred. Too far to make out clearly. It moved like smoke, but she did not think it was smoke. In a leisurely, expanding column it moved toward her, whether swiftly or slowly she did not even think, for awareness of time had ceased. And she could not tell if it were rising from fathoms underfoot or coiling down out of the sky toward her as she stood upside down on a crystal ceiling.
Nearer and nearer it came twisting, intangible as smoke and moving with the beautiful, lazy billowing of smoke—but it was not smoke at all.
When it had come almost to her feet it expanded into a great, slow ring and came drifting toward her and around her and up past her through the solid substance on which she stood. And as the ring like a wide, hazy, yawning mouth swept upward a voice that she thought she knew, said quietly in her ears:
“You may speak.”  p. 121

Juille asks how she can save her people from the H’vani, but the answer is enigmatic. She exits the temple with a vertiginous feeling, and then finds Egide telling her to open her eyes, whereupon she finds herself back in the forest, with the temple vanished. They struggle, but she cannot best him. When she stops struggling they discuss their experiences in the temple, and then talk about what happened on Cyrille and their feelings for each other. They kiss, but Juille is still very conflicted, and they end up fighting again until she is knocked unconscious.
Juille awakes later on Cyrille, imprisoned in one of its worlds. She eventually discovers by means of the communication screens that Egide and Jain have a huge laser beam pointed at the surface of Ericon, and they mean to burn the capital to the ground when they pass overhead. She uses her hidden weapon to blow a hole through the wall and escapes, later finding a palm gun. She then contacts the men, luring Jair away from the control room, which then leads to an extensive chase sequence that takes her and Jair through many of Cyrille’s virtual realities, including one particularly nightmarish one:

Below was a dim-green twilight forest of wavering weeds. Not too far below. Juille took a tight grip on both her guns and jumped. She was in midair before she saw the terrible pale face peering up at her through the reeds, its dark mouth squared in a perfectly silent scream.
It was a madman’s face.
Juille’s throat closed up and her heart contracted to a cold stop as she met that mindless glare. She was falling as if in a nightmare, with leisurely slowness, through air like green water that darkened as she sank. And the face swam upward toward her among the swaying weeds, its mouth opening and closing with voiceless cries.
The floor was much farther than it had seemed, but her slow fall discounted the height. And the creature came toward her as slowly, undulating with boneless ease among the weeds. Juille sank helpless through wavering green currents, struggling in vain to push against the empty air and lever herself away. The room was a submarine illusion of retarded motion and subdued gravity, and the dweller in it, swimming forward with practiced ease against the leverage of the tangled weeds, had a mad underwater face whose human attributes were curiously overlaid with the attributes of the reptile.
Juille’s reason told her that she had stumbled into one of the darker levels of Cyrille, where perversions as exotic as the mind can conceive are bought and practiced to the point of dementia and beyond. This undulating reptilian horror must be one of the hopeless addicts, wealthy enough to indulge his madness even when civilization was crumbling outside the walls of Cyrille.  p. 133-134

Juille and Jair fight their way through many more worlds until she manages, on her third or so attempt, to hit him with her palm gun. She seizes his weapon and starts trying to destroy her way towards the control room. Eventually, she causes so much damage (she blows lots of holes in things) Cyrille starts collapsing, and she is washed away in a huge wave of water, the mini-climax of a pretty impressive action/image sequence—which, perhaps, goes on for slightly too long. Eventually (spoiler) Juille finds Egide, and threatens to kill him with the secret weapon unless he stops the attack on the planet. They make their way back to the control room to find the capital is burning. Jair turns up, revealing himself as an android, before he leaves to meet the H’vani fleet to complete the conquest of Ericon. Juille takes Egide to the surface, and goes to see her father.

The H’vani space fleet attacks and lands its forces: the two sides clash and, during this, Juille recognises the envoy from Dunnar as one of the Ancients. He tells Juille and Egide that neither side will win, that humankind’s day is over, and that another race will surpass them. He and the llar ride off into the wood, while Juille and Egide go down to the battle.
The story closes with the llar reflecting on the communal nature of his own race, and that they should not trust the Ancients.
When I finished reading this novel I felt that, for all its many accomplishments, the various parts don’t entirely fit together. Perhaps this is because, ultimately, it isn’t really much more than a relationship novel mixed in with a fairly basic Empire vs, resistance plot. I also found that some of the motivation and plotting didn’t entirely make sense to me. That said, parts of it are particularly accomplished (the characterisation, the descriptive writing, the action sequences, the idea of virtual realties, etc.) and it is still a notable piece of work, even if it’s not of the same level as, say, Leiber’s Gather Darkness.
One final thing I found unusual about this work is its “doomed mankind” ending, which presents a strangely elegiac view of humanity that doesn’t entirely square with Campbell’s supposed human exceptionalism bias. Perhaps everyone was feeling pessimistic because of the ongoing World War.3

This issue also has, unfortunately, half a dozen Probability Zero items: Der Fuehrer’s Base by George O. Smith is some voodoo doll nonsense about Hitler with an ending I didn’t get/understand; You Said It! by Charles Ben Davis has a scientist develop a cliché actualiser; Finance by David Charles has a time-traveller play the stock market in 1929 and (spoiler) cause the Crash; Y = Sin X by Harold Wooster has radio sensitive pigeons and a dumb ending; Universal Solvent by Clayton James MacBeth is self-explanatory, and has a vaguely clever thiotimolineish-like ending; And Watch the Fountains by Ray Bradbury has two intensely competitive liars meet—one says he has a time machine and will use it to kill the other in the future—the other prepares: this has a nonsensical setup and a lame ending.
The Davis, MacBeth and Bradbury are mediocre; the others aren’t even that good.

The Cover is an average effort by William Timmins for Clement’s story. The Interior artwork in this issue is almost uniformly mediocre: the one saving grace is the illustration by A. Williams on p. 126, where Juille goes through the forest to speak with the Ancients: I’d have liked it even more if she wasn’t wandering about in what appears to be stockings and high heels. The magazine needs more striking full-page illustrations like this: the spot and half page illustrations provided by the other artists just seem half-baked by comparison.
Minute and Mighty by John W. Campbell, Jr. is a snippet about the amplification and stabilisation of radio signals that feels like it would be more at home in Radio Ham Monthly.
In Times to Come is part blurb for A. E. van Vogt’s The Storm, and part Campbell’s maunderings about stars and night bombers.
The scores for The Analytical Laboratory: June & July 1943 were commented on in the reviews of those issues.4 I note in passing Campbell’s observation about trying to compare the results for stories in different issues:

The June issue carried seven stories besides the article; this means that point-score votes ranged from one to seven—and made point scores tend to run high. That’s somewhat unfair, in a way—a third-place story or fourth-place story in such an issue has met and surpassed more competition, yet gets a tougher point score than the rear-guard item in a five-story issue. Some day all things will be perfect—and a completely fair system of reporting may be worked out.  p. 48

The End of the Rocket Society by Willy Ley continues this issue, and starts with a description of the boom times in German rocketry at the beginning of the 1930s:

To an outside observer during the years 1930 and 1931 it must have looked as if the “rocket people” were in all the rooms—at least in all the rooms in Berlin. For weeks we had an exhibit of the Oberth rocket, the Mirak and a lot of apparatus right in the middle of Potsdamer Platz. Then the exhibit was moved for two weeks to Wertheiin’s—Berlin’s equivalent of Macy’s—and could have been moved to the equivalent of Gimbel’s after that, if the equipment had not been needed. We got more newspaper space than ever before and every magazine in existence ran at least one article about our activities. I overheard fishermen mending their nets at the shores of the Baltic talk about the VfR; I had to explain the principles of rocket propulsion to innumerable street-car conductors, gasoline-station operators and bookkeepers, in addition to the normal complement of engineers and newspapermen. One morning I received a letter with government stamps on it—philatelists will know what I mean, the Dienstmarken that go on “official business”—asking me to come to the Reich Post Ministry to see Postal Counselor So-and-So. It turned out that the counselor was the editor in chief of a biweekly official magazine, “must” reading for all postal employees. He wanted me to write a comprehensive report about the VfR for immediate publication, to be followed up by supplementary articles once every second month. Thereafter all postal employees knew as much about rockets and the VfR as most of the members.
[. . .]
The intensity of the interest can be judged by the following: Around the middle of December, 1931, I knew that I would have about a week in January or February to visit my parents living in Konigsberg in East Prussia. I also informed one of our few Konigsberg members about it and he wrote back asking whether I would be willing to lecture.
My week then looked as follows: Sunday, radio; Monday, Engineering Society; Tuesday: free; Wednesday, University, Geographical Seminary; Thursday, Merchant’s League; Friday: University, Department of Physics; Saturday: free; Sunday: radio again. I did not speak a word without being paid for it, and the VfR got half of the gross proceeds. When I got back to Berlin I slept for a full day: six lectures in eight days, plus an eight-hundred-mile round trip, is work.  p. 58-59

The rest of the article describes further rocket tests against a deteriorating political background and the eventual involvement of the military. Ley concludes with this:

It is my estimate that a quick rehash of the work done and to forge on to the meteorological rocket from there would require some thirty thousand dollars per year for the first three years, more later.
At present the problem has to rest until Hitler is dead—after the war we’ll see. At any event I believe as firmly as ever in the feasibility of the first practical step, the instrument-carrying high altitude rocket. And I have never for a moment stopped believing in the ultimate goal: the spaceship.

Ley doesn’t seem have foreseen the first offensive use of the V2 rocket a year later.5
Brass Tacks has letters by two writers, the yet to debut A. Bertram Chandler, and Malcolm Jameson. It also has this from Karl K. Webber, from Flora, IL:

“Final Blackout”—Who cares whether it’s science fiction or history or what? Everyone who reads it is on the lieutenant’s side when the U. S. comes to call.
Hubbard is no small potatoes as a writer. Next (these aren’t in order of preference—they’re all equal) is: “The Weapon Makers,” a story which has as great a sweep as Smith’s series, but doesn’t get you bogged down by breathlessness caused from too much space—a form of spacesickness, I guess. Last is a short story and it needs no explanation—“Mimsy Were the Borogoves.” Padgett may be a pen name, but he reads Carroll and loves him—even as I (and maybe you). Every adult ought to read Lewis Carroll’s works once a year.
Over in another group are all of Bob Heinlein’s historical patterns waiting for this war to end so Bob can finish the design. To my notion when you’ve got the stories I’ve named hid away in a comer of your library, brother, you’ve got something. Rogers for covers is A-1; Orban inside; Isip—both of ’em—are good, but fit Unknown a little better; Cartier can’t be beat for Unknown.  p. 109

He finishes with this pre-emptive, if ungrammatical, rejoinder:

You edit the two best mags—bar none—in the science-fiction and fantasy fields, and I know a few things about removing the teeth suddenly for any guy who disagrees.  p. 109

Charming.

A middling issue, and one let down by lacklustre artwork.  ●

_____________________

1. The only other Astounding appearances I’ve noticed from Bradbury are a couple of Probability Zero pieces, including the one above. Here is Bradbury’s ISFDB page for those that want to check.

2. Atypically for the time, van Vogt’s Imperial Battleship Star Cluster is not only commanded by a woman (Grand Captain Laurr), but the crew is mixed sex too (Lieutenant Nesslor is also a woman).

3. Campbell’s supposed insistence that humanity always gets the upper hand seems to have a had a few exceptions: from 1943 there is P. Schuyler Miller’s The Cave (January) and Moore’s novel in this issue. Even as late as 1953 we have Philip K. Dick’s Imposter (June).

4. The Analytical Laboratory results for this issue appeared in the November issue:

I’m surprised the Clement wasn’t further ahead of the van Vogt: longer stories usually do better than shorter ones.

5. The Wikipedia page for the V2 rocket.  ●

rssrss

Astounding Science-Fiction v31n06, August 1943

ISFDB link
Archive.org link

_____________________

Editor, John W. Campbell Jr.; Assistant Editor, Catherine Tarrant

Fiction:
Judgment Night (Part 1 of 2) • serial by C. L. Moore ∗∗∗+
The Mutant’s Brother • short story by Fritz Leiber
One-Way Trip • novella by Anthony Boucher –
Endowment Policy • short story by Henry Kuttner and C. L. Moore [as by Lewis Padgett]
M 33 in Andromeda • short story by A. E. van Vogt
When Is When? • short story by Malcolm Jameson

Non-fiction:
Cover • by William Timmins
Interior artwork • by A. Williams (x6), Frank Kramer (x4), William Kolliker (x3), Hall (x2)
Noncommunication Radio • editorial by John W. Campbell, Jr.
The End of the Rocket Society (Part 1 of 2) • essay by Willy Ley
In Times to Come
Brass Tacks
• letters
Book Review • by Anthony Boucher

_____________________

This issue leads off with the first part of Judgment Night by C. L. Moore. Her debut novel is set on the planet of Ericon, not only the seat of the Lyonese galactic empire but also the home of an enigmatic race of aliens called the Ancients. The opening scene introduces us to Juille, the Amazonian daughter of the Emperor, and one of the novel’s two main characters. She and her father discuss the H’vani insurgency at the periphery of their empire before she leaves for Cyrille, an orbiting pleasure planetoid. She is accompanied by her personal servant Helia, and a strange alien pet called a llar.

Arriving incognito on Cyrille she meets and becomes involved with the novel’s other main character, a young man called Egide. He, unknown to her, is the leader of the H’vani rebellion, knows who she is, and is there to kill her. However, after several days together their relationship develops and, even though at one point he has his hands gently round her throat, he refrains from killing her, and later tells his companion Jair that she is not the Emperor’s daughter but someone else. Juille does not learn of Egide’s identity at this point but she knows something is not quite right.
When Juille returns to the palace on Egide she goes to a council meeting where recent losses to the H’vani are discussed. She learns that one of the scientists on the recently overrun planet of Dunnar has developed a weapon that will turn the tide of the war, and is en route to the palace. When his ship arrives shortly afterwards it is pursued by three H’vani ships—the latter fly over the forbidden territory of the Ancients, and they are destroyed in a flash of light, the first defensive action seen in living memory.

The Dunnarian, a strange-looking man, arrives and tells them the weapon takes a “photograph” of an enemy, which can be used to kill them at any point afterwards.
The final part of this instalment has Juille organising assassins to kill the H’vani envoys invited to a peace conference by the Emperor. When they arrive Juille is shocked to see that Egide is their leader.
The assassins fail to strike, and Egide arrives safely at the palace where, at the meeting, Juille tries to kill him with a needle gun but fails (he is wearing a new type of body armour). Egide and Jair capture her and escape into a secret passageway. As Juille is taken down into the remains of the ancient city below the modern one, she learns that her servant Helia is part of an ancient Andarean resistance and has betrayed her, and that the latter organisation has also promised ancient advanced weapons to the H’vani to help them in their war against the Empire. They descend deep into the underground levels.
Synoptically, this may all seem like a standard Planet Stories type potboiler, but it is atypical for its time in a number of ways. First of all, the main protagonist is a strong woman (unusual if not unknown for Astounding):

There had been many tremendous changes in the Lyonese culture even in her own lifetime, but perhaps none greater than the one which made it possible for her to take the part a son might have taken, had the emperor produced a son. Women for the past several generations had been turning more and more to men’s professions, but Juille did not think of herself as filling a prince’s shoes, playing a substitute role because no man of the proper heritage was available. In her the cool, unswerving principles of the amazon had fallen upon fertile ground, and she knew her self better fitted and better trained for the part she played than any man was likely to be.
Juille had earned her military dress as a man might have earned it, through lifelong training in warfare. To her mind, indeed, a woman was much more suited to uniform than a man, so easily can she throw off all hampering civilian ideas once she gives her full loyalty to a cause. She can discard virtues as well as vices and live faithfully by a new set of laws in which ruthless devotion to duty leads all the rest.
For those women who still clung to the old standards, Juille felt a sort of tolerant contempt. But they made her uneasy, too. They lived their own lives, full of subtle nuances she had never let herself recognize until lately. Particularly, their relationship with men. More and more often of late, she had been wondering about certain aspects of life that her training had made her miss. The sureness and the subtlety with which other women behaved in matters not associated with war or politics both annoyed and fascinated Juille. She was, after all, a woman, and the uniform can be discarded as well as donned. Whether the state of mind can be discarded, too—what lay beneath that—was a matter that had been goading her for a long while.  p. 11-12

Secondly, the story is told in a lush visual style that would not be out of place in a work from the 1960s, and it has some startling images—here Juille first sees Egide on Cyrille:

Presently a flash of scarlet seen through the leaves of a passing platform caught her eye. She remembered then that she had noticed that same shocking cloak upon a young man on the stairs.
It was a garment so startling that she felt more than a passing wonder about the personality of the man who would wear it. The garment had been deliberately designed to look like a waterfall of gushing blood, bright arterial scarlet that rippled from the shoulders in a cascading deluge, its colors constantly moving and changing so that one instinctively looked downward to see the scarlet stream go pouring away behind its wearer down the stairs.  p. 20

She nodded the newcomer to a crystal chair across from her, studying him coolly from under the cobwebby veil. He was smiling at her out of very blue eyes, his teeth flashing in the short curly beard. He looked foppish, but he was a big young man, and she noticed that the cloak of running blood swung from very fine shoulders indeed. She felt a faint contempt for him— music, composing, when the man had shoulders like that! Lolling here in that outrageous cape, his beard combed to the last careful curl, oblivious to the holocaust that was rising all through the Galaxy.
She had a moment’s vision of that holocaust breaking upon Cyrille, as it was sure to break very soon even this close to the sacred world of Ericon. She thought of H’vani bombs crashing through this twilight sphere in which she floated. She saw the vast tree trunk crumbling on its foundation, crashing down in ruins, its great arms combing all these drifting crystal bowers out of the green perfumed air. She thought of the power failing, the lights going out, the cries of the suddenly stricken echoing among the shattered Edens. She saw the darkness of outer space with cold stars twinkling, and the vast luminous bulk of Ericon looming up outside through the riven walls of Cyrille.  p. 21

Third, there is subject matter that, one presumes, may not have been of peak interest for the typical teenage male reader of the 1940s—not only is there a leisurely development of the romantic relationship between Juille and Egide, but there are scenes that are even more atypical:

“With permission, I shall compose that gown,” the soft voice drawled, and Juille nodded coldly.
The dresser laid both hands on a section of wall near the alcove and slid back a long panel to disclose her working apparatus. Juille stared in frank enchantment and even Helia’s feminine instincts, smothered behind a military lifetime, made her eyes gleam as she looked. The dresser’s equipment had evidently been moved into place behind the sliding panel just before her entrance, for the tall rack at one end of the opening still presented what must have been the color-selection of the last patron.
Through a series of level slits the ends, of almost countless fabrics in every conceivable shade of pink showed untidily. Shelves and drawers spilled more untidiness. Obviously this artist was great enough to indulge her whims even at the expense of neatness.
She pressed a button now and the pink rainbow slid sidewise and vanished. Into its place snapped a panel exuding ends of blackness in level parallels—satin that gleamed like dark water, the black smoke of gauzes, velvet so soft it looked charred, like black ash.
The dresser moved so swiftly and deftly that her work looked like child’s play, or magic. She chose an end of dull silk and reeled out yard after billowing yard through the slot, slashed it off recklessly with a razor-sharp blade, and like a sculptor modeling in clay, molded the soft, thick stuff directly upon Juille’s body, fitting it with quick, nervous snips of her scissors and sealing the edges into one another. In less than a minute Juille was sheathed from shoulder to ankle in a gown that fitted perfectly and elastically as her skin, outlining every curve of her body and falling in soft, rich folds about her feet. The dresser kicked away the fragments of discarded silk and was pulling out now such clouds and billows of pure shadow as seemed to engulf her in fog.
Juille almost gasped as the cloud descended upon herself. It was something too sheer for cloth, certainly not a woven fabric. The dresser’s deft hands touched lightly here and there, sealing the folds of cloud in place. In a moment or two she stepped back and gestured toward the mirror.
Juille turned. This tall unknown was certainly not herself. The hard, impersonal, perfect body had suddenly taken on soft, velvety curves beneath the thick soft fabric. All about her, floating out when she moved, the shadowy billows of dimness smoked away in drapery so adroitly composed that it seemed an arrogance in itself.
“And now, one thing more,” smiled the dresser, pulling open an untidy drawer. “This—” She brought out a double handful of sequins like flashing silver dust and strewed them lavishly in the folds of floating gauze. “Turn,” she said, and Juille was enchanted to see the tiny star points cling magnetically to the cloth except for a thin, fine film of them that floated out behind her and twinkled away to nothing in midair whenever she moved.  p. 18

One suspects that any 1940’s reader experiencing a sense-of-wonder buzz from the above may also have been suffering a degree of cognitive dissonance as well!
There are other plus points too, such as the innovative use of virtual reality in Cyrille’s many rooms, something else that makes it seem ahead of its time. On the other hand, the novel is rather too slow-moving to start with, possibly a structural inevitability given the need to have the relationship section at the beginning of the story. Overall though, this is a promising beginning, and I’ll be interested to see if Moore can maintain this high standard in the second half.

If Moore’s story feels like something from the sixties, then The Mutant’s Brother by Fritz Leiber is like a claustrophobic and paranoid story from a 1950’s issue of Galaxy. It is set in a near future world that has Greer Canarvon on a flight to see a twin brother who he has never met. We learn a number if things during the journey: (a) the pair are probably mutants; (b) they were separated at birth, and Greer has only recently found out where his brother lives.
When Greer lands at Steelton, he buys cigarettes and sees a newscast which refers to the “Carstairs business” he heard other passengers discussing on the plane. He learns that this refers to Robert Carstairs—a dangerous criminal who the police are looking for—and then sees a photograph of himself or, more accurately, someone who looks like him on the huge screen in the terminal. He is recognised, and there then follows an exciting sequence where Greer has to mentally control several people to effect his escape.

After commandeering a taxi, and with the driver under his control, Greer learns about the nefarious deeds committed by the man on the screen—his twin brother—and sets out to track him down. The story comes to an exciting climax inside a police station.
This is quite a good piece, and was better than I had expected (it hasn’t been much collected or anthologized since it first appeared).1

Most of the rest of the fiction is not up to the standard of the previous two entries, and that is particularly the case with One-Way Trip by Anthony Boucher. It is the worst thing I have seen from this writer so far, and it reads like one of Cleve Cartmill’s poorer efforts (i.e., an unlikely story unbearably padded). It is not helped by its confusing two page prologue which is about an artist, an accidental invention, and the artist’s subsequent murder.
The main story starts with the protagonist of the piece, a WBI (World instead of Federal) agent called Gan Garrett, who is on a rocket flight to Sollywood to investigate the increased use of a material called lovestoneite (one of the story’s gimmicks, previously touched on in the prologue). He is going undercover as a historian to advise a film project on the life of Depavura, a prophet who is responsible for this peaceful future world which emerged from the War of the Twentieth Century. Some of this information comes from a conversation he has on the flight with a woman passenger. After they land and disembark someone throws a knife at Garrett, but misses.

He goes to his new job and has five minutes with the boss S. B. (Sacheverell Breakstone) before meeting the scriptwriter of the Depavura epic, Hesketh Uranov. We learn more about this future Sollywood:

A red light glowed in front of one of the studios. Their plaques admitted them to the soundproof observers’ gallery. “This is an interior, of course,” Uranov explained. “Exteriors are all shot outside under dome, some of them here at the main plant, most of them on the various locations. You probably saw them from the ship?”
Garrett nodded.
“California’s amazing enough naturally, and after our landscaper’s went to work— It’s really extraordinary. We can shoot any possible aspect of the world’s surface, and we have a condensed replica of every city of any importance, from Novosibirsk to Luna City. Southern California is the world in miniature; destroy the rest of civilization, and an archaeologist could re-create it all from our locations.” There was a certain possessive pride in his voice, despite his avowed contempt for Sollywood.  p. 89

Cue Alfred Bester’s The Flowered Thundermug.

The rest of the story meanders endlessly through various events: Garrett is attacked again in a nightclub when out drinking with Uranov; the agent gets a lecture from a Dr Wojeck about lovestoneite’s optical properties (it can release absorbed light at varying rates); Garrett and Uranov go to see the painter mentioned in the prologue, where Garrett is ambushed yet again; finally, he is then framed for the murder of one of the ambushers and send on a one-way rocket trip (this peaceful society’s replacement for capital punishment).
All of this is not in the slightest bit convincing and it takes forever to get to this point (all this is about twenty pages worth). Worse, we then get a data dump about how this world’s society evolved on the rocket trip out.

Garrett then ends up landing (unknown to him) on the Moon. Here (spoiler) we find out that the lovestonite is being used by S. B. to make weapons to take over the world. Puzzlingly, the story morphs at this point into what can only be described as a farcical piece on megalomania:

“All Sollywood,” Sacheverell Breakstone began, “acknowledged my creative-executive supremacy. The Little Hitler, they called me. And I remember reading in a biography of that great man how he could have been a magnificent painter had he chosen to follow that line instead of creating in terms of meters and men. Even so, I could have been a great musician, but I instinctively turned away from the sterility of such purely artistic creation. I found my metier in Sollywood; but even there I was cramped, strangled by the limitations of peace. The man who would create with men needs weapons. The man who would create life must be able to mete out death.”  p. 110

The story finishes with Garrett managing to divert these violent extremist to Mars to colonise the planet.
A bizarre piece, and not in a good way.2
Endowment Policy by Henry Kuttner and C. L. Moore has a taxi driver called Holt sent to pick up a fare that has asked for him by name. After picking up a man called Smith, Holt is asked if he would like to make a thousand bucks. When Holt accepts, Smith then explains that he wants Holt to take him to the home of a particular physicist. At eleven o’clock they will be an explosion at the scientist’s lab, and Holt’s job will be to take a formula out of the safe and give it to the War department.

The bulk of the rest of the piece is a chase story that involves Holt and his (obviously time-traveller) passenger avoiding a group of men looking for them. When they finally arrive at the house, Holt (spoiler) attempts to retrieve the formula but fails.
There is a coda set in 2016 where Smith (his pursuers catch him and take him back to the future) is tried for attempted time-crime, and the story has a clever twist where we find out that Smith is the older Holt, and had gone back in time to deliver himself from his humdrum life. There is a pleasingly ironic last paragraph where the 1943 Holt contemplates the bright future that his thousand dollars will provide. . . .

M 33 in Andromeda by A. E. van Vogt is the second ‘Space Beagle/Nexialist’ series, and starts with a spaceship picking up vibrations and murmurings as it transits a volume of space. When a voice tells the captain the ship should turn back it becomes apparent that no-one else in the crew has heard it. The captain then asks them whether they should continue. Near the end of this process, metal-like beasts appear in the control room and a firefight breaks out. During the skirmish a Nexialist called Grosvenor (a generalist who has not really been accepted by the ship’s crew of specialists) saves the captain’s life.

After further discussion among the crew the ship continues exploring, eventually finding a buried city on one of several primeval planets they discover: the populations of these planets have been wiped out by an unknown attacker.

Grosvenor eventually discovers (spoiler) that this has been caused by a galaxy spanning creature that feeds on the energy given off by dying creatures. We get some back story about the evolution of this creature before the humans shoot iron projectiles into space to injure the creature and force it to a distant Galaxy. It ends with the Nexialist’s acceptance by the rest of the crew.
This is all very unconvincing, verging on ridiculous, and reads like something from the thirties. It is also written in similar quality prose. Here are a few random sentences:

But he found himself waiting for others of the score of men in the control room, to echo the empirical statement of him who had already spoken. p. 129

There was no reply; and, after a little, that was astounding.  p. 130

“I am glad to see that no one is even looking as if we ought to turn back.”  p. 130

“That’s a large order, commander.” [this last in reply to what the speaker thinks of the environment that they are headed into] p. 130

And so on. It reads like an badly written and uncorrected first draft.
When Is When? by Malcolm Jameson is the third and last of the ‘Anachron’ time travel series. This one starts off with Kilmer finding out that several of his time teams have gone missing. Barry turns up shortly afterwards, having emerged unscathed from a just completed disciplinary hearing. He looks at the dates the teams are in, and says he can sort the problem. He sets off for the America of Phillip I of Spain’s time.

Once he arrives he arranges a deal with a developed American nation (time travellers have altered the history of this timeline) to provide him an Armada of advanced warships. The (eventually revealed) reason for this is that Barry wants to (spoiler) apply pressure on the Pope, who changed the Gregorian calendar at this point. The Pope’s alteration of the calendar during this period caused missing dates, and some of the changes occurred at different times across the planet—this is what has caused the missing time teams.

This is a completely unconvincing ending: the idea that mankind’s artificial system of measuring time would lead to crews getting lost in “time holes” or whatever is completely nonsensical. Best read for its semi-historical adventure story.3

The Cover is, as usual, by William Timmins (I can stop saying repeating this sometime late in 1944 if I recall correctly). My favourites among this issue’s Interior artwork are probably by Williams (although the lizard illustration on p. 136 is rather amateurish). Kolliker’s are okay, and Kramer and Hall are a mixed bag (Kramer’s illustrations for the Jameson are okay but his first one for the Leiber features one of his standard “1940’s man in hat and raincoat”).
Noncommunication Radio by John W. Campbell, Jr. is an editorial that speculates on the amount of scientific knowledge that will become known to the public after the war before it spirals off into prediction—some accurate, some not.
The End of the Rocket Society by Willy Ley is the first part of a fascinating article about the beginnings and history of the German Rocket Society (it started in 1927) and their early publications and experiments. Ley was a founder member and, in his account, the organisation sometimes appears like something out of a farce:

So Oberth had to build a rocket in a hurry. He knew that he was no engineer and that he needed one. He could have asked any one of innumerable people he knew for an able assistant, he could have phoned one of the specialized employment agencies—but he put a classified ad into one or several newspapers. Several men responded, capable men, no doubt, and Oberth had to make a choice. There was one of the applicants whose appearance struck him like lightning. This was the man he had seen in that meteorite-inspired vision. He even bore that scar on his forehead, Oberth did not know that it was a result of reckless driving.
That individual was a small man with a hard face, a Hitler-voiced unemployed engineer, carefully dressed and with military posture. “Name is Rudolf Nebel, diploma-ed engineer, member of the oldest Bavarian student corps, World War combat pilot, with pilot’s license and rank of lieutenant, with eleven enemy planes to my credit.”
He was hired immediately.
I may add right here that Nebel told me himself later on that he had been graduated in a hurry during the war because he had volunteered for the air force and that after the war he had never worked as an engineer but as a kind of salesman for mechanical kitchen gadgets. Since jobs were almost impossible to find, all this was probably not his fault, but I often discovered later that I knew more about problems in his field than he did.
Oberth found himself another assistant whose name had come to his attention because it had been the by-line to a brilliant article in an aviation magazine. Via the editor of the magazine Oberth got hold of the writer, a Russian aviation student by the name of Alexander Borissovitch Shershevsky. Shershevsky had been sent to Germany to study gliders, but overstayed his kommandirovka and dared not go home again. But he was genuinely in favour of the Soviet government, not a “White Russian”—he was a refugee by accident.
Those three, the theorist who longed for the fresh mountain air of Mediash, the professed militarist Nebel and the Bolshevist Shershevsky worked together, or tried to. Shershevsky did not adore work overly much, Nebel was willing to work and waited for orders, and Oberth was not quite certain where he should start.  p. 73

Then I met Nebel accidentally one day. He knew me and, assuming that I did not know him, told me who he was and what he was going to do. It was: He was going to found a society in order to continue the rocket experiments, he was going to get somebody to write a book to attract public attention. After he had lectured for half an hour I managed to tell him that there were at last half a dozen books and that there was a society which would be able to do something if it could only get hold of its president. Who? Hermann Oberth! It is still hard to believe, but Oberth had never informed his assistant either about the society nor about the literature on the subject, save for his own book which Nebel had not read, after finding it too highfalutin. (He used an equivalent Bavarian term.) After this revelation Nebel said that he would do something with the society that existed. He did.  p. 75

In Times to Come Campbell trails Hal Clement’s 30,000 word novella, Attitude, and has this to say about the rest of Moore’s Judgement Night:

When I read it first myself, I felt the last half was the best of it—and the last single page carries an impact equal to all the rest of the story! It’ll stay with you for several days—I’ll guarantee.  p. 128

Brass Tacks has a letter from Hugh R. Wahlin of Madison, WI, that gives his opinions on the new size and artwork:

I have just seen a copy of the beloved mag in its “new” size, and believe me, nothing has done my poor old soul so much good for many a month. I never did like the large size because it was too clumsy for reading in bed, and besides the covers always got torn around the edges, and who wants to file away a messy copy? Seems to me that if you want to break into the slick field, the way to do it is by printing the mag on slick paper, not by making it of such size that it won’t fit into the racks reserved for pulps.
I’ve got some opinions on the new cover, too: Why, if you are going back to the old size, don’t you bleed the cover pic on three sides again? It makes the mag seem about five percent smaller as it is now. Another thing, why don’t you get rid of that obnoxious square box sticking up into the cover? It may be a good idea to have the story connected with the cover, but I ‘d rather have it up at the top where it used to be, and not
depriving me of any of the pleasure I get out of a really top-notch cover. This Timmins is turning out some stuff that stacks up pretty well beside Rogers’.
Why, oh, why, do you insist on letting Kramer illustrate your lead story? Maybe he gives you two for the price of one or something, but I certainly can’t see anything in his work. He is weak on composition, his interpretations are indefinite, and every face he draws looks like it needed a shave. I don’t mind it on the men so much, but even his heroines— or am I being too romantic for STF?—look like the bearded lady.  p. 156

Elsewhere, there are (as well as a letter from Chad Oliver) positive mentions for Mimsy Were the Borogoves and Timmins’ covers. The column ends with a long letter that uses Smith’s ‘Venus Equilateral’ stories as a springboard for a mini-lecture on how scientific development really works. This latter is from a “Caleb Northrup”—is this Campbell?4
The issue closes with a Book Review by Anthony Boucher of Moon Up—Moon Down by John Alden Knight. This latter is about solunar theory, the idea that the position of  the sun, moon and tides affect fish feeding times, etc.5
There is no Analytical Laboratory in this issue.6  ●

It is worth getting this issue for the Moore, Leiber, Moore & Kuttner, and for Ley’s article.

_____________________

1. The ISFDB page for The Mutant’s Brother by Fritz Leiber shows one 1953 anthologisation before it appeared in a Leiber collection in 2002.

2. The ISFDB page for One-Way Trip by Anthony Boucher unsurprisingly shows it has only ever been reprinted in The Compleat Boucher, 1999. No surprise there.

3. From the University of Nottingham Manuscripts and Special Collections website:

In 1582 Pope Gregory ruled that this new calendar – thereafter called the Gregorian Calendar—should be brought into use. By that stage, the Julian Calendar had added ten days too many to the calendar, so Pope Gregory decreed that the day after the 4th of October 1582 should be the 15th of October 1582, thus correcting the error.
[. . .]
In Great Britain, the new calendar was adopted in September 1752. In order to deal with the discrepancy of days, which by now had grown to eleven, it was ordered that 2nd September 1752 would be immediately followed by 14th September 1752. This led to crowds of people on the streets demanding, ‘Give us back our 11 days!’ It also explains why our financial year begins on 6th April. The official start of the year used to be Lady Day (25th March), but the loss of eleven days in 1752 pushed this back to 5th April. Another skipped day in 1800 pushed it back again to 6th April.

It’s worth reading the whole page.

4. The Northrup letter sounds like Campbell’s “McCann” missives, and has no address. By the by, there is a “Sara Northrup Hubbard” mentioned in Alec Nevala-Lee’s Astounding.

5. Wikipedia’s page on Solunar Theory is here.

6. The Analytical Laboratory results for this issue appeared in the October issue:

Putting the Boucher in second place is just ridiculous, and once again shows that the readership is essentially ordering the stories by length, not quality.  ●

This magazine is still being published (as Analog Science Fiction and Fact)! Subscribe: Kindle UK, Kindle USA or physical & digital copies.

rssrss

The Great SF Stories Volume 4, 1942, edited by Isaac Asimov & Martin H. Greenberg

ISFDB link

Other reviews:1
Algis Budrys, F&SF, March 1981
Theodore Sturgeon, The Twilight Zone, June 1981
George Kelley, GeorgeKelley.org
Various, Goodreads

_____________________

Editors, Isaac Asimov and Martin H. Greenberg

Fiction:
The Star Mouse • novelette by Fredric Brown ∗∗∗∗
The Wings of Night • short story by Lester del Rey ∗∗∗
Cooperate—Or Else! • novelette by A. E. van Vogt
Foundation • novelette by Isaac Asimov ∗∗
The Push of a Finger • novella by Alfred Bester
Asylum • novella by A. E. van Vogt ∗∗∗
Proof • short story by Hal Clement ∗∗∗
Nerves • novella by Lester del Rey ∗∗∗
Barrier • novella by Anthony Boucher ∗∗∗
The Twonky • novelette by Henry Kuttner and C. L. Moore [as by Lewis Padgett] ∗∗
QRM—Interplanetary • novelette by George O. Smith ∗∗
The Weapon Shop • novelette by A. E. van Vogt ∗∗∗∗
Mimic • short story by Donald A. Wollheim ∗∗∗

Non-fiction:
Introduction • by Martin H. Greenberg
Story introductions • by Martin H. Greenberg and Isaac Asimov

_____________________

I’d read most of this volume for last year’s Retro Hugo Awards so I thought, as with my last review, I might as well finish it off and write a relatively brief review here. Some of the stories have already been discussed at longer length in earlier posts.2

The fiction opens with The Star Mouse by Fredric Brown, which will be a pleasant discovery for those that like Reginald Bretnor’s ‘Papa Schimmelhorn’ stories. In this one Professor Oberburger, an Austrian scientist mit der funny accent (well, funny if you are not a German speaker), sends Mitkey the mouse on a rocket test flight. Mitkey lands on Prxl, an asteroid where there is an alien race observing humankind. The aliens increase Mitkey’s intelligence to more easily examine his memories and then, after deciding that humanity is a threat, send him back to Earth with a plan to increase the intelligence of all mice to hinder mankind’s development. A humorous gem.
The Wings of Night by Lester del Rey is an interesting piece for its time in that it is, ultimately, a story about tolerance of other races (although it was probably written before Pearl Harbour).
The story starts on a two-man spacecraft where one of the characters (“Slim” Lane) is an idealist and the other (“Fats” Welch) is greedy and racist (both stereotypically). The pair’s spaceship develops mechanical problems (caused by a hasty Martian repair) and they need to set down on the Moon. There they meet Lhin, the last surviving member of an ancient alien race whose people created the crater hundreds of millions of years ago. Lhin is a plant-like being, and cannot raise any new members of his nearly extinct race from seed for a lack of the element copper. The characters subsequently behave as you would expect them to, but the story ends on a suitably uplifting note.
This is written in a cruder pulp voice than some of the other del Rey stories I’ve read from this period (which read like more mainstream pieces) but I liked it well enough.
Cooperate—Or Else! by A. E. van Vogt is the second of the ‘Rull’ series and appears to be a rerun of the first. That earlier story had two humans fighting off inimical wildlife on an alien planet; this one has a human and an alien called an ewal trying to survive on yet another. As if that isn’t enough of a challenge the inimical Rull arrive later on.
I found it a bit of a struggle to get through this kitchen sink potboiler as my attention kept wandering, probably due to the fact it is little more than a collection of action sequences. It also reads like a clumsily written first draft and I don’t see why it is in the collection—it is not one of van Vogt’s best.
Foundation by Isaac Asimov is the opening story in the series of the same name, and begins with Hari Seldon at the last meeting of a group which has set up the Foundation, an organisation designed to use the science of psychohistory to guide humanity through the fall of the First Galactic Empire to the rise of the Second centuries later.
The story then moves forward to Terminus City fifty years later, where the city’s mayor, Salvor Hardin, is involved in a dispute with Pirenne, the Chairman of the Foundation board. Their disagreement is about how to deal with Anacreon, a solar system that has broken away from the Empire, and now threatens to occupy and annexe Terminus.
The rest of the story presents a good picture of the political infighting likely to occur in a declining Empire, but the story has real no ending.3 Instead, a hologram of Hari Seldon appears, Wizard of Oz-like, on the fiftieth anniversary of the founding of the Foundation and explains a few things.
The next story in the series, Bridle and Saddle, is a better story and would have been a superior choice for this volume.
The Push of a Finger by Alfred Bester starts with a newspaperman in a future society that has strict stability laws being briefed by government officials. During one of these briefings the narrator manages to snoop around and he finds out that the building houses a huge prognostication machine that can see into the future. He also discovers that the Chief of Stability and his scientists have discovered that the Universe ends a thousand years from now, after a secret experiment is initiated on a spaceship. The rest of the story has the Chief of Stability, narrator and others viewing events as they work back in time from the end of the Universe: they hope to find a key event they can alter to stop that sequence of events.
Although this story occasionally demonstrates several of the traits that would mark Bester’s work—such as the beginning where, unusually for the time, he directly addresses the reader—it takes ages to get going, and you are a quarter of the way through the story before you find out what it is going on. It is also badly written and is hugely padded. An inventive but contrived ending does not save it.
Asylum by A. E. van Vogt Asylum by A. E. van Vogt opens on a spaceship with a male Dreegh reviving a female. They are approaching Earth, which is apparently watched by a Galactic Observer, and they are hoping to slip past undetected to get the human blood and life force they need to survive. After landing the pair attack a passing couple and feed on them.
The point of view then switches to a reporter called Leigh, who is covering the murder of the couple for his paper. He examines the bodies of the couple at the morgue, and notes the marks on the neck and their burnt lips (where their life force was extracted).
The rest of this is essentially a space-vampire potboiler where the Dreegh try to find and eliminate the Observer so their race can invade the solar system. After the half-way point this begins to make less and less sense but the ending reveals Leigh (spoiler) is a personality overlay for a Galactic Observer superman with an IQ of 1200 and Dreegh killing superpowers.
This transcendent boot-strap ending doesn’t make it a great story but it will, for readers like me, perhaps make it a fairly good one.
Proof by Hal Clement is a hard SF story about aliens who dwell in our sun. On a trip to the core from the floating cities in the photosphere, Captain Kron finds that one of the passengers is a scientist who is gathering data to prove that there is no such thing as a “solid.” Kron then tells him a story about his space-faring days in the solar system when a sister ship crashed into something that shouldn’t have been there.
Later we find out that the unknown object is Earth, and the story switches to the point of view of a prospector in the outback who witnesses Kron’s sister ship crash and then explode with catastrophic results.
Unlike most stories with exotic aliens, Clement underpins his debut with a lot of science.
Nerves by Lester del Rey is a well-known and perhaps prescient, if outdated, account of a nuclear power-plant accident that is eerily similar to those that occurred at Three Mile Island, etc.
The story starts with an accident at two of the reactors, and it later becomes apparent that a new process was being tested which could lead to an even more catastrophic disaster. The one man who knows what this process involved is trapped under the wreckage. Throughout all this del Rey creates a remarkably convincing and tense narrative, drip feeding bits of his made up nuclear physics in between the medical procedures that are taking place, all against a background of escalating danger.
This tale is pre-atomic bomb, of course, as can perhaps be gathered from early scenes that involve Doc Ferrel, the main character of the story, treating his workers with “salve” for their radiation burns before they go back to work. There is also, more generally, a fairly cavalier attitude to the possible catastrophic results of atomic power—something explained as a quid pro quo for the benefits. Some of the characters’ behaviour is very much of its time, too: the two doctors, Ferrel and Blake, have a snifter of brandy after several hours of work to pep themselves up, and later resort to shooting up morphine to keep awake!
The story is longer than it should be and has a padded and rather potboiler-ish middle section. Nevertheless, you can see why it was so popular at the time.
Barrier by Anthony Boucher is an overcomplicated story that involves a future world with a Barrier which is supposed to prevent time travellers from other ages disrupting their static society. Nevertheless, the protagonist of the story, Brent, manages to end up there. Part of the rest of the story concerns a small group repairing his time travel machine and returning to the past, where they hope to regroup and return to the future to prevent the activation of a second Barrier—Bent has apparently destroyed the first one. This is all rather confusing to be honest, and becomes even more so when they return to the future to stop the Second Barrier, only to be caught in an attack of future time-travellers.
Perhaps it is best not to worry too much about all the time travel shenanigans but enjoy the considerable fun that Boucher has with the linguistic drift exhibited by travellers from different time periods.
The Twonky by Henry Kuttner and C. L. Moore also starts with a time traveller, this one with partial amnesia, who unintentionally arrives in a radio-phonograph factory. His job in the future is building ‘Twonkies’ so he uses the material at hand to build one, and then has a nap. His amnesia clears shortly after he wakes up, and he disappears on his time machine, leaving behind a modified phonogram/twonky behind.
The phonogram is bought by a university lecturer and his wife and, after the latter leaves to visit her sister, things start to get weird. The phonograph/twonky starts acting like a robot, lighting the man’s cigarettes, doing the dishes, etc. However, (spoiler) matters take an ominous turn when it stops him reading certain books and listening to certain music, and generally prevents him from doing things it does not approve of. It does not end well.
Despite it winning the 1943 Retro Hugo Award, I found this, at best, an okay gimmick story, and thought it a lightweight run through of some of the ideas used in the much superior Mimsy Were the Borogroves (Astounding, February 1943, and in volume 5 of this series).
QRM—Interplanetary by George O. Smith is the first of the ‘Venus Equilateral’ series of stories about a relay station in space which is responsible for the solar system’s communication traffic. It starts with Don Channing, the station’s acting boss, being relieved by a political appointee who intends to make the operation more commercial.
The rest of the story focuses on the new boss’s increasingly disastrous decisions (men are laid off and replaced with automatics that can’t do the job, and the messaging system breaks down). Channing rides to the rescue but later finds a bigger problem with the air recycling system—purifying grasses in the centre of the station have been thrown out by the new boss (“weeds”), and the increasing carbon dioxide level may threaten their survival. The moral of the story is obviously that engineers and scientists should be left to get on with their jobs without management interference.
The story makes a good effort at trying to show a realistic future but it feels very dated indeed—modern unmanned communications satellites do what Venus Equilateral does, and there is a lot of heavy drinking and cheesy relationship stuff between Channing and Arden, his secretary.
The Weapon Shop by A. E. van Vogt is the second in his ‘Weapon Shops of Isher’ series, and it begins with the arrival of a Weapon Shop in a quiet neighbourhood where Fara, the protagonist and loyal subject of the Empress of Isher, and his wife are walking one evening. By the end of the story Fara goes from being a loyal citizen (he attempts to force entry to the treasonous Weapon Shop and arrest the owners), through the bankruptcy of his business, to finally returning to the Weapon Shops to use their parallel justice system.
During this he learns about how corrupt the Empire is and experiences the near-magical technology of the Weapon Shops (he encounters an abnormal doorknob on a Weapon Shop door which withdraws through his hand to prevent him entering; later, he stands in front of a huge Weapon Shop computer that appears to be tracking the status of the billions of people in the Empire).
I liked this a lot, in particular its almost dreamlike progression. It is probably van Vogt’s best story, and should have won the 1943 Retro Hugo.
Oh, a quick PS for other reviewers: just because it has one line that says “The right to buy weapons is the right to be free” doesn’t, I would suggest, necessarily make it “an NRA SF novel”, “anti-gun control”, or “libertarian”.4
Mimic by Donald A. Wollheim starts with reference to a strange man from the narrator’s childhood. Years pass and we learn that the narrator has grown up to become the curator in a museum where he spends his days mounting insects, etc. There follows a short section about mimicry in nature before the story swings back to the strange man and an incident at his lodgings. The narrator ends up going into his room with a policeman and the building’s janitor, where they find out (spoiler) that he is not human but a strange insect like being. The policeman then disturbs a nest in the room and hundreds of small beetle like insects escape. There is a twist ending where a predator that looks like part of the roof goes after the flying beetle like creatures the man has given birth to.
This isn’t entirely convincing but it’s not bad, and has an interesting weird science vibe.

There is the usual historical Introduction by Martin H. Greenberg, which ends with a useful summary of what was happening in the field that year:

In the real world it was another good year, even though most of the top writers (and many fans) would soon be soldiers or working in war-related industries and/or research.
No new science fiction magazines were born, but all of the existing American ones made it through the year with the exception of Stirring Science Stories, which expired in March.
In the real world, more important people made their maiden voyages into reality: Hal Clement with “Proof” and Robert Abernathy with “Heritage” in June; in October, George O. Smith with “QRM-Interplanetary,” and in December, E(dna) Mayne Hull with “The Flight That Failed.”
More wondrous things happened in the real world: Robert A. Heinlein (as Anson MacDonald) published “Beyond This Horizon” and “Waldo,” Jack Williamson (as Will Stewart) published “Collision Orbit,” the first of his excellent Seetee stories and Isaac Asimov began his classic Foundation series.
Death took Alexander Belyaev, one of the pioneer Russian science fiction writers.
But distant wings were beating as C. J. Cherryh, Samuel R. Delany, Langdon Jones, David Ketterer, Franz Rottensteiner, Douglas Trumbull, William Joe Watkins and Chelsea Quinn Yarbro were born.  p. 8-9

There are also the usual Story introductions by Martin H. Greenberg and Isaac Asimov.

I thought this was a weaker volume than the last one I read (volume 5, for 1943). Judging by the introduction the editors would have liked to include Waldo, and perhaps Jack Williamson’s Collision Orbit. (They previously stated they couldn’t get the rights for five Heinlein stories they wanted for volumes 2 and 3.)
I note in passing the publication dates of the stories (from Spring to December 1942) determine the order they appear in this volume, which gives it a peculiar progression: I’m not sure I’d open with a humorous piece—they can be hit or miss—and a more fitting end would have been van Vogt’s The Weapon Shop and not the relatively slight and minor Mimic.
For my own Best of 1942 volume, I think I’d carry out some radical surgery on this list. I’d definitely keep the Brown (The Star Mouse) and one van Vogt (The Weapon Shop), and definitely get rid of the Bester, the other two van Vogt stories, the Kuttner/Moore (The Twonky), the Smith (QRM—Interplanetary), and the Asimov (Foundation, which I’d replace with the sequel Bridle and Saddle). I’d probably keep del Rey’s Nerves but maybe lose his other story (The Wings of Night), and keep the Boucher (Barrier). I’m not sure about the Clement (Proof), but probably not. You don’t, I think, have to include writer’s first stories in these volumes, or the first stories in significant series.
What would I add? Well, look at my choices in the table below—note that this is not a final list as there is a lot from 1942 I still have not read.5  ●

_____________________

1. Algis Budry’s review (F&SF, March 1981, p. 51) of this volume follows a long review of George O. Smith’s The Complete Venus Equilateral. He says of Asimov and Greenberg’s volume, “The Boucher and the Bester aren’t very good, although everyone cites the Boucher as a seminal work and the Bester shows great promise. The rest are at worst exciting and propulsive, at best beautifully worked out examples of what the Golden Age could do.”
He says at the end of his review that, “Marty Greenberg tells me for sure that Isaac does indeed do a hell of a lot more than just lend his name, which means he’s losing money on every minute he spends at it.”

Sturgeon’s very short review (The Twilight Zone, June 1981, p. 10) says the book has an “interesting introduction”, that all of the stories are “very well selected”, and that the series “will be a landmark when it is done.”

2. Here are the links to the full reviews of stories I’ve covered before, for both the Greenberg/Asimov anthology, and for my own ‘Best of’ picks:

The Star Mouse • novelette by Fredric Brown (Planet Stories, Spring 1942)
The Wings of Night • short story by Lester del Rey (Astounding, March 1942)
Cooperate—Or Else! • novelette by A. E. van Vogt (Astounding, April 1942)
Foundation • novelette by Isaac Asimov (Astounding, May 1942)
The Push of a Finger • novella by Alfred Bester (Astounding, May 1942)
Asylum • novella by A. E. van Vogt (Astounding, May 1942)
Proof • short story by Hal Clement (Astounding, June 1942)
Nerves • novella by Lester del Rey (Astounding, September 1942)
Barrier • novella by Anthony Boucher (Astounding, September 1942)
The Twonky • novelette by Henry Kuttner and C. L. Moore [as by Lewis Padgett] (Astounding, September 1942)
QRM—Interplanetary • novelette by George O. Smith (Astounding, October 1942)
The Weapon Shop • novelette by A. E. van Vogt (Astounding, December 1942)
Mimic • short story by Donald A. Wollheim (Astonishing Stories, December 1942)

Waldo • novella by Robert A. Heinlein (Astounding, August 1942)
The Compleat Werewolf • novella by Anthony Boucher (Unknown Worlds, April 1942)
Goldfish Bowl • novelette by Robert A. Heinlein (Astounding, March 1942)
The Unpleasant Profession of Jonathan Hoag • novella by Robert A. Heinlein (Unknown Worlds, October 1942)
The New One • short story by Fredric Brown (Unknown Worlds, October 1942)
The Goddess’ Legacy • short story by Malcolm Jameson (Unknown Worlds, October 1942)
Magician’s Dinner • novelette by Jane Rice (Unknown Worlds, October 1942)
The Elixir
 • novelette by Jane Rice (Unknown Worlds, December 1942)  ●

3. Asimov’s introduction to Foundation mentions the ending:

Naturally, I had no idea when I wrote the story what the future would hold for it. It began on August 1, 1941, when I presented John Campbell with the idea for a story involving the fall of the Galactic Empire written as a historical novel.
Campbell loved the idea so much that he wouldn’t dream of letting me write a single story about it. He insisted on an open-ended series after the fashion of Heinlein’s “Future History” series.
Campbell dazzled me into agreeing (I was always being dazzled by him) and on August 11, I began the story. It took me three weeks to write (I only wrote in my spare time for I was working toward my doctorate at Columbia at the time) and, uncertain whether Campbell might not change his mind about letting me do more stories in the series, I deliberately didn’t reveal the ending but let it hang. This made it certain that Campbell would either reject the story or demand a sequel.
He demanded a sequel.  p. 77

4. Ian Moore says this about a sequel, The Weapon Makers (which it “appears” he hasn’t read), in his blog post about the 2019 Retro Hugos:

The Weapon Makers meanwhile was serialised in 1943 and later revised. It appears to peddle some kind of libertarian political philosophy and explicitly supports the right of individuals to bear arms, making it an interesting example of NRA SF.

Yeah, that’s what the novel’s about. This viewpoint presumably comes from a quick skim of Jayme Lynn Blaschke’s online review of The Empire of Isher, which starts with this:

The National Rifle Association should give out a copy of The Empire of Isher with every new membership. Seriously. They’re fools if they don’t. I have never come across anything that more closely resembles an NRA-envisioned utopia than van Vogt’s The Weapon Makers and The Weapon Shops of Isher, collected here in an omnibus volume. Before you roll your eyes and scoff at the absurdity of a future crafted by Charleton Heston and his inner circle, consider the backdrop of van Vogt’s Isher universe. Even the Weapon Shops’ credo could be adopted by the gun lobby today without much fuss: The right to buy weapons is the right to be free.

The Wikipedia entry on The Weapon Shops of Isher is better informed and more balanced:

Van Vogt’s guns have virtually magical properties, and can only be used in self-defense (or for suicide).
The political philosophy of the Weapon Shops is minimalist. They will not interfere with the corrupt imperial monarchy of the Isher government, on the grounds that men always have a government of the type they deserve: no government, however bad, exists without at least the tacit consent of the governed. The mission of the Weapon Shops therefore is merely to offer single individuals the right to protect themselves with a firearm, or, in cases of fraud, access to a “Robin Hood” alternative court system that judges and awards compensation from large, imperial merchant combines to cheated individuals.

Wikipedia could also have mentioned the Weapon Shops’ explicit instructions to Fara, after their court judgement in his favour at the end of The Weapon Shop, to undertake no political action or activity against the Empire. Or that all this gun stuff is a tiny, tiny part of the entire series, which is essentially an evil empire versus the resistance story, with an immortal and aliens thrown in.
Wikipedia’s article on Libertarianism in the United States is here (the form of libertarianism I presume is being referenced in the above comments). Good luck with matching that up against the Weapon Shops’ philosophy and actions.

5. If you want a better idea of how this book measures up against what I might pick, and what other anthologists and the Retro Hugo voters chose, look at the table below.
The third column (G) lists Asimov and Greenberg’s choices with an ‘x’.
The fourth column (H) shows the story’s 1943 Retro Hugo award placing.
The fifth column (C) shows how many of the anthologies and/or polls used in the Classics of Science Fiction list included the story in their collections (note that this list is SF only and skews against fantasy)—minus the Asimov/Greenberg anthology and Retro Hugo Awards citations which have their own column.
The sixth column (O) shows inclusions in other major anthologies which are not on the COSF list (e. g., The Compleat Werewolf by Anthony Boucher appears in Unknown Worlds, ed. John W. Campbell, 1948, and The Fantasy Hall of Fame, ed. Robert Silverberg, 1998). These are worked out by me and I have not yet looked into this for all the stories.
The seventh column (S) shows my likely choices for a ‘Best of the Year’ with an ‘x’.
The last column (T) shows the total points that each story gets (they get a point for being in Asimov/Greenberg’s anthology, a point for the COSF anthologies/polls they are in, a point for any other major anthology they are in, a point for being a Retro Hugo finalist, and a point if they are one of my choices).
The table is initially sorted so the stories with the highest total are at the top. A good way to efficiently read the year’s short fiction may be to start at the top and work down until you get to the end of the 2-point stories.  Enjoy.  ●

rssrss

The Great SF Stories Volume 5, 1943, edited by Isaac Asimov & Martin H. Greenberg

ISFDB link

Other reviews:
Admiral Ironbombs, Battered, Tattered, Yellowed, & Creased
George Kelley, GeorgeKelley.org
MPorcius, MPorcius Fiction Log
Tom Staicar, Amazing Stories, November 1981
Various, Goodreads

_____________________

Editors, Isaac Asimov and Martin H. Greenberg

Fiction:
The Cave • novelette by P. Schuyler Miller ∗∗∗+
The Halfling • novelette by Leigh Brackett ∗∗∗+
Mimsy Were the Borogoves • novelette by Henry Kuttner and C. L. Moore [as by Lewis Padgett] ∗∗∗∗
Q. U. R. • short story by Anthony Boucher ∗∗
Clash by Night • novella by Henry Kuttner and C. L. Moore [as by Lawrence O’Donnell] ∗∗∗∗
Exile • short story by Edmond Hamilton ∗∗∗
Daymare • novelette by Fredric Brown ∗∗
Doorway Into Time • short story by C. L. Moore ∗∗
The Storm • novelette by A. E. van Vogt ∗∗∗+
The Proud Robot • novelette by Henry Kuttner [as by Lewis Padgett] ∗∗∗+
Symbiotica • novelette by Eric Frank Russell ∗∗
The Iron Standard • short story by Henry Kuttner and C. L. Moore [as by Lewis Padgett] ∗∗∗

Non-fiction:
Introduction • by Martin H. Greenberg
Story introductions • by Martin H. Greenberg and Isaac Asimov

_____________________

This collection was the fifth volume of a retrospective ‘Best of the Year’ series started in 1979 by Isaac Asimov and Martin H. Greenberg. The series, published by DAW books, would continue for a total of twenty-four volumes and would cover the period from 1939 to 1963. NESFA Press would add a twenty-fifth volume in 2001, Robert Silverberg Presents the Great SF Stories: 1964.
Although this volume isn’t a magazine or original anthology I thought I’d cover it here as it lets me talk about (a) my picks for the 1944 Retro Hugo Awards (nominations for which close at 0700 UTC on Saturday, March 16th, 2019), and (b) what would be in my own hypothetical Best SF of the Year 1944.
As I’ve discussed some of these stories at length elsewhere I’ll try and be brief here (I’ll add links in the footnotes for my longer reviews and, in the cases where I haven’t yet reviewed the magazines containing the stories, I’ll add full reviews when I have time).1

The fiction opens with The Cave by P. Schuyler Miller. This is a story set on an obsolescent version of Mars and opens with a number of Martian creatures taking shelter in a cave from a sandstorm outside. These creatures are a mix of predator and prey, but we discover that all Martian creatures are grekka and abide, on certain occasions, by a law of mutual help against an inimical universe. So they all settle down and prepare to wait out the storm.
The second half of the story has a human prospector called Harrigan stumble upon the cave after his sand car breaks down. He realises the cave is full of Martian animals, and that some are dangerous, but the uneasy truce continues. Later on however Harrigan does something that unintentionally disturbs the equilibrium, and the situation then unravels.
It is interesting that this one (spoiler) does not comply with Campbell’s supposed requirement that humans always outwit the aliens.
Next up is The Halfling by Leigh Brackett, which is a colourful tale set in “Jade Green’s Interplanetary Carnival Show”. Green hires a dancer called Darrow who wants to earn money to pay for her passage back to Venus. As they wander through the circus to her audition on the main stage they see cat-men from Callisto, Moth people from Phobos, and other exotic beings.
The second part of the story involves escaped Martian sand cats, dead immigration agents, and tribal intrigue on Venus, and it concludes with a big action finish that has the various species of men fighting the escaped circus animals.
This is the first of only four stories in the volume that wasn’t published in Astounding Science-Fiction magazine (it originally appeared in Astonishing Stories, February 1943).
Mimsy Were the Borogoves by Henry Kuttner and C. L. Moore is the one story in the volume that readers will probably have heard of, given its multiple reprintings in various anthologies. Its classic status must make it a shoe-in for the 1944 Retro Hugo novelette award.
It starts with a man from millions of years in the future sending two experimental time machines back into the past, both of which use his children’s cast-off educational toys as ballast. They never return to his time so he forgets about them. One of the machines—an odd looking box—is found in 1942 by a seven-year old boy called Scott, who is playing hooky from school.
Scott takes the toys home and he and his sister play with them. The toys start changing the way they think, and how they perceive reality, all of which eventually has far-reaching consequences. While this plays out we are also presented with, among other things, some interesting and atypical (for SF) observations about children (perhaps influenced by the fact that Moore was pregnant around this time).
The story is perhaps more roughly written than you would expect from a classic (I detect Kuttner’s prose in much of the story) but it finishes with an impressively transcendent ending which references Lewis Carroll’s poem Jabberwocky.
Q. U. R. by Anthony Boucher gives an account of how the narrator recruits a roboticist called Quinn to form a company called Quinn’s Usuform Robots (a play on Rossum’s Universal Robots, R.U.R., I guess). The struggles they face in building and selling their robots are rather contrived and unlikely. Although the story tries to be light humour it’s really just a piece of rather clunky pulp. Not bad, but not any better than okay, and it is the first of a handful of stories that I would suggest shouldn’t be in this volume.
Clash by Night by Henry Kuttner and C. L. Moore is the novella prequel to the 1947 novel Fury, and starts in Montana Keep, a domed city under the seas of Venus. Earth has been destroyed in a nuclear conflagration, and the survivors inhabit this and other similar keeps because of the inimical Venusian wildlife on the land. The main character in the story is a Dooneman, Captain Scott, a mercenary in one of the Free Companies that settle disputes between the many cities on the planet. The story tells of one of these wars.
This piece is the first of the Kuttner/Moore collaborations where I’ve definitely noticed another writer involved apart from Kuttner,2 and the prose at the beginning of the story is more complex and fluent than anything I’ve seen in earlier collaborations. The world-building, characterisation, and inter-personal relationships in the first three-quarters or so are also much more complex and realistic than normal. All of this makes me wonder if the story is mostly Moore’s work (apart from, maybe, the battle scenes at the end, which are flatter, more routine fare, and are more typical of what I believe is Kuttner’s work). So, in brief, it starts very well but tails off somewhat towards the end. Given the lack of novellas published in 1943, it will be a strong contender in that Retro Hugo category.
Exile by Edmond Hamilton is another non-Astounding story (it appeared in Super Science Stories, May 1943) and is the shortest piece in the book. It starts with a group of four sf writers talking about protective colouration. Then one of them tells the others how he once ended up in one of his imaginary worlds and had to survive there. . . .
After a while (spoiler) you can guess where the story is going, but is still ends with a satisfying click.
Daymare by Fredric Brown (Thrilling Wonder Stories, Fall 1943) has an intriguing beginning, which involves Lieutenant Rod Caquer of the Callisto Police arriving at a murder scene. He is one of the last to arrive, getting there just before the utility men take the body away, and sees that the man has died from a sword stroke to the head. However, when he questions the policeman who was first on the scene, the latter says he heard a shot and saw a bullet hole in the corpse. Later, the medical examiner says the man was killed by a blaster, and the utility men think his head was cut off—one thinks it was by an axe, and one with a disintegrator.
There are further bizarre occurrences (the dead man is later seen committing suicide by jumping from a skyscraper, etc.) but this all eventually collapses into a routine tale about (spoiler) a baddy trying to grab political power to foment trouble against neighbouring sectors, and using a hypnotic helmet to do so. This latter device ultimately makes the piece a sophisticated “and then I woke up and found it was all a dream” story.
Even though it has a very entertaining first half, this is another story that shouldn’t be here.
The same is true of Doorway Into Time by C. L. Moore (Famous Fantastic Mysteries, September 1944). This moody tale starts with an alien collector examining the exhibits in his museum cum treasure-house. As he examines his collection he experiences an increasing restlessness, and addresses this by going to his space-time portal to view various locations. He sees a couple from Earth and decides that the woman would make a good addition to his collection. The point of view then switches to the man and the rest of their story is about her abduction, and his attempt to rescue her from this strange museum.
This is better written and is more atmospheric than most of the material of this period (it feels like a much later story) but it is rather straightforward, and a number of details don’t convince (why was the portal left open after the woman was abducted, etc.). The ending is confusing too.
The Storm by A. E. van Vogt is the second of his ‘Mixed Men’ series, which appears to be (I haven’t yet read the first) about Dellian and non-Dellian robots who have fled a massacre they suffered at the hands of humanity for the Fifty Suns region of the Lesser Magellanic Cloud. They have now, fifteen thousand years later, been discovered by the human spaceship Discovery, and its Grand Captain Laurr. The Dellians do not want Earth to learn of their location so they put Captain Maltby on the ship to supposedly guide the humans through a nearby galactic storm. However, the Dellians are really planning to put the ship into the storm’s fringes, hoping to disable and then capture it, thus preventing the ship from returning home to reveal their location. Maltby is a Mixed Man, both Dellian and non-Dellian and can switch between his dual minds to evade human probing and interrogation.
The rest of the story centres on Maltby and Laurr, initially as they spar on her ship, and then when they are shipwrecked by the storm on a nearby planet. Of course, by this time, Maltby has been conditioned to love Laurr as a way to break down any resistance while being interrogated, and Laurr is under a legal compulsion to reproduce with Maltby and populate the planet if they are not rescued. Unfortunately, this latter half turns what had been an excellent super science space opera into a boy gets girl story that is not as good—it is rather dated and corny—but overall this is still an impressive piece, and would have been even better in its time.
The Proud Robot by Henry Kuttner is the third and best of the ‘Gallegher’ stories I’ve read so far. In this one the scientist, who can only invent things when drunk—and invariably forgets what they are for when he is sober—has to contend with a disgruntled client whose cinema business is being ruined by pirated material, and a disobedient, narcissistic robot called Joe.
The story gets off to far too rambling a start but improves as it goes along, building to a reveal that is a mini tour de force. In this, Gallegher simultaneously regains control of the robot, and (spoiler) finds out what it is for (it is a can-opener cum content protection device!) I know that this may not seem impressive in summary, but in the context of the story the ending is both amusing and ingenious.
Symbiotica by Eric Frank Russell is the third of the ‘Jay Score/Marathon’ stories about the robot that is part of a space ship crew. Score plays a minor part in this one (I haven’t recently read the others so do not know how prominent he is in those) and the story mostly concerns the kidnap of the crew by the natives of an alien planet. The crew’s problems with the native flora and fauna is initially a pretty good read (Russell writes lucid, fast-paced and absorbing prose) but you need to ignore some idiotic behaviour on the part of the crew (some of whom seem to be practising for the role of short-lived extras in the Alien movies).
Unfortunately the piece goes on for too long, and ultimately descends into one of those humans-slaughter-aliens stories or, more accurately, dumb-humans-who-don’t-get-on-with-each-other-slaughtering-aliens stories—there is an inordinate amount of back-biting among the human crew throughout the story.
Another one to bump from the collection.
The Iron Standard by Henry Kuttner and C. L. Moore is another of their stories that gets off to a rather confused start. This time we have a spaceship crew (which includes an Irishman, and a Native American, etc.) on an inaugural trip to Venus, where they are running short of food due to difficulties with the natives. If they had money (the planet is on the “iron standard”) they could buy what they need but they don’t, so cannot. Moreover, they cannot get jobs as the tarkomars (the native guilds) require a joining fee.
The story tells of the various schemes that undertake to try to make some money, and the many setbacks they experience. Eventually (spoiler) they prevail by disrupting the Venusians’ stable monetary system, and the tarkomars pay them to stop what they are doing.
This is probably one of those stories that is more interesting for the ideas (economic) and attitudes (there is more than a whiff of human exceptionalism and the supremacy of the capitalist system in this, not to mention a generally imperialist outlook about other cultures) than it is for the story, but is entertaining enough for all that.

As well as the stories Martin Greenberg contributes an Introduction, which gives a history of 1943 before covering events in the SF world:

In the real world it was another good year, despite the fact that most of the writers and fans were in the armed forces or otherwise engaged.
The news was not completely good. Astonishing Stories folded in April, and the beloved Unknown Worlds published its last issue in October—it instantly became a legend.
But wonderous things were happening in the real world: Fritz Leiber published Gather Darkness. Donovan’s Brain by Curt Siodmak and The Lost Traveller by Ruthven Todd appeared, as did Judgement Night by C. L. Moore, The Book of Ptath by A. E. van Vogt, and Perelandra by C. L. Lewis. Some of these were magazine serials which would not see book publication for many years. Donald A. Wollheim broke new ground with The Pocket Book of Science Fiction, the first paperback sf anthology. And James H. Schmitz made his maiden voyage into reality in August with “Greenface.”
Death took Stephen Vincent Benet, A. Merritt, and The Spider.
But distant wings were beating as Joe Haldeman, Christopher Priest, James Baen, Mick Farren, Robert M. Philmus, Cecelia Holland, Chris Boyce, and Ian Watson were born.  p. 9

There are also Story introductions by both Martin H. Greenberg and Isaac Asimov. Greenberg’s introductions are informative, but Asimov’s are sometimes more about himself than the writer:

I certainly can’t quarrel with Marty’s view that Kuttner and Moore were the most successful husband-and-wife writing team in science fiction. There have been others, of course; Damon Knight and Kate Wilhelm are perhaps the most prominent contemporary example, although I don’t believe they collaborate. As a personal touch, my wife, Janet Jeppson, has published two science fiction novels and several shorter pieces. If she hadn’t gotten started so late in life (being a psychiatrist and psychoanalyst is time-consuming both in training and the practice) why, who knows, we might have given them all a run for their money.  p. 58

I have somehow developed the notion that I have a patent on robot stories or, at the very least, that no one’s robots, either in reality or fiction, are allowed to deviate from the Three Laws of Robotics. That’s just fantasy on my part but it’s a harmless fantasy, I hope. In any case, my robots are not usuform and I have on occasion argued vehemently against usuformity. However, I always liked Tony Boucher so much (who didn’t?) that I wouldn’t have dreamed of arguing with him. If he wants to infringe on my patent rights, why let him, say I.  p. 91

For some fifteen years after “Clash By Night” appeared, it was still possible to write of Venus’s oceans and I published Lucky Starr and the Oceans of Venus in 1954.  p. 114

[Hamilton’s] The Universe Wreckers was one of the delights of my childhood. It embarrassed me that when I finally met him, I had become better known than he was. It struck me as lèse majesté. He was a gentle, self-possessed soul, though, and he didn’t seem to mind.  p. 172-173

In conclusion this isn’t a bad anthology, and (from what I’ve read so far) it represents the year fairly well. That said, I’d drop the Boucher, Brown, Moore, and Russell stories, and include the following (I’ve currently only read around a quarter of the five hundred or so stories published this year so this selection may change—see the 1944 Retro Hugos tab above for an almost complete list of 1943 stories):

Malcolm Jameson, Blind Alley (Unknown, June)
Ray Bradbury, The Scythe (Weird Tales, July)
Robert Bloch, It Happened Tomorrow (Astonishing Stories, February)
Fritz Leiber, Thieves’ House (Unknown, February)
A. E. van Vogt, The Witch (Unknown, February)
E. Mayne Hull, The Ultimate Wish (Unknown, February)

And possibly/probably:

Fritz Leiber, The Mutant’s Brother (Astounding, August)
Lester del Rey, Whom the Gods Love (Astounding, June)
Robert Bloch, Yours Truly–Jack the Ripper (Weird Tales, July)
Henry Kuttner, Wet Magic (Unknown, February)

You’ll note from the list above that I have included several fantasy stories in my list: one problem that the Asimov/Greenberg volumes have (in common with many, many other reprint “SF” anthologies from the mid-1940s onwards) is that they do not include fantasy, which is then omitted from the body of work that is “remembered” by the field. I think this is a shame as Jameson’s Blind Alley deserves to be as well-known as any of the other stories in this book (except Mimsy, maybe).
Other factors that distort the body of work remembered by the field are: the limited number of anthologists (gatekeepers) collecting short fiction (it sometimes seems like 90% of all reprint anthologies are edited by the same dozen people); story length (novellas are, I would argue, under-represented in anthologies because of their length, whereas short, gimmicky stories are over-represented—I’m looking at your To Serve Man, Damon Knight); whether reprint rights are available (three Heinlein stories were missing from an earlier volume, and in other cases it is difficult to find out/and or contact the deceased writer’s estate, etc.); and myriad other factors, such as how well the anthologies sell or how long they are in print for, etc.
I’m not sure what the answer to this is (or whether it really matters—we are all dust in the end) but perhaps it would be a good thing if more SF readers looked out an old magazine or two now and then, and proselytized about any good but forgotten work they find. There are a lot of old magazines on archive.org nowadays—give it a go, you may be pleasantly surprised.  ●

_____________________

1. Here are the links to the full reviews of stories I’ve covered before, for both the Greenberg/Asimov anthology, and for my own ‘Best of’ picks:

The Cave • novelette by P. Schuyler Miller (Astounding, March 1943)
The Halfling • novelette by Leigh Brackett (Astonishing Stories, February 1943)
Mimsy Were the Borogoves • novelette by Henry Kuttner and C. L. Moore (Astounding, February 1943)
Q. U. R. • short story by Anthony Boucher (Astounding, March 1943)
Clash by Night • novella by Henry Kuttner and C. L. Moore (Astounding, March 1943)
Exile • short story by Edmond Hamilton
Daymare • novelette by Fredric Brown
Doorway Into Time • short story by C. L. Moore
The Storm • novelette by A. E. van Vogt
The Proud Robot • novelette by Henry Kuttner
Symbiotica • novelette by Eric Frank Russell
The Iron Standard • short story by Henry Kuttner and C. L. Moore

Blind Alley • novelette by Malcolm Jameson (Unknown, June 1943)
The Scythe • short story by Ray Bradbury (Weird Tales, July 1943)
It Happened Tomorrow • novelette by Robert Bloch (Astonishing Stories, February)
Thieves’ House • novelette by Fritz Leiber (Unknown, February 1943)
The Witch • novelette by A. E. van Vogt (Unknown, February 1943)
The Ultimate Wish • short story by E. Mayne Hull (Unknown, February 1943)
The Mutant’s Brother • Fritz Leiber,
Whom the Gods Love • short story by Lester del Rey (Astounding, July 1943)
Yours Truly — Jack the Ripper • short story by Robert Bloch (Weird Tales, July 1943)
Wet Magic • novella by Henry Kuttner (Unknown, February 1943)

2. Greenberg starts his introduction to Clash By Night with this:

There is considerable debate about the authorship of this powerful story, with some sources claiming that Kuttner did this one alone, while others claim that it was a collaboration.  p. 113

I doubt that it is a solo Kuttner effort, and Greenberg does not say what his sources are.  ●

rssrss

Unknown Worlds v07n01, June 1943

ISFDB link
Archive.org link

Other reviews:1
Fred Smith, Once There Was A Magazine— p. 44-45 (Beccon Publications, 2002)
Stefan R. Dziemianowicz, p. 144-146, The Annotated Guide to Unknown & Unknown Worlds (Starmont, 1991)

_____________________

Editors, John W. Campbell Jr.; Assistant Editor, Kay Tarrant

Fiction:
Wheesht! • novelette by Cleve Cartmill
The Wishes We Make • short story by E. Mayne Hull
Blind Alley • novelette by Malcolm Jameson +
A Bargain in Bodies • short story by Moses Schere
Sriberdegibit • novelette by Anthony Boucher
The Rabbit and the Rat • short story by Robert Arthur
The Devil Is Not Mocked • short story by Manly Wade Wellman
Eight Ball • short story by John B. Michel [as by Hugh Raymond]
The Green-Eyed Monster • short story by Theodore Sturgeon
The Hounds of Kalimar • novelette by P. Schuyler Miller

Non-fiction:
Interior artwork • by Paul Orban (x6), Hall (x4), Frank Kramer (x5), Manuel Isip (x4), Newton Alfred , William Kolliker
Of Things Beyond: Gremlins Breed Fast • editorial
Book Reviews • by Anthony Boucher

____________________

This issue sees Unknown Worlds, like Astounding, revert to pulp format because of wartime rationing. The Cover design also changes, and probably for the worse with an untidy scroll design.
Wheesht! by Cleve Cartmill gets off to a pretty good start when an American counter-intelligence agent called Mike (who is impersonating a man called Hineman) arrives home with a fifth columnist contact called Gartz to find potatoes on the floor. Mike recognises this as the calling card of a leprechaun called Seag who is bound to the oldest member of his family. Mike also realises that his uncle must have died and, while he is getting a drink for Gartz, he finds the leprechaun asleep, coiled round a bottle of booze. When Hineman returns to the living room, Gartz cross-examines Mike and recruits him as a Nazi spy.
This is a quite involved but economical start, and it demonstrates that Cartmill can write concise and engaging material when he wants to. Unfortunately, the rest of the story eventually turns into one of his standard pulp plots (with Nazi spies rather than mobsters this time around). The tale is also not credible, best illustrated by the fact that, because Mike refuses to tell Seag he is working for the American government, the leprechaun thinks that Mike is a Nazi. This eventually leads to Mike arriving in Hell with a group of co-conspirators thanks to one of the leprechaun’s spells (that said, this scene actually starts off well before descending into bureaucratic shenanigans about Mike’s false identity which secures his—again unlikely—release):

They told me later I was in the Abandon Ye ward. Bokar was a couple of spiked beds away, and beyond him were Brown, Jones, and Professor Gartz: each held flat on the pointed spikes with glowing iron bands, as I was.
Smocked attendants came and went, along the aisles of beds. One was tall and lean, with nothing but a pair of ears where his head ought to be. This one wandered about, the long pointed ears twitching.
I shifted a shoulder blade off the point of a spike, and one of the ears pointed like a hunting dog, though the creature was twenty yards away. It snapped its fingers and a small Thing with fur scurried to my bed with a tray of instruments in one of its sets of hands.
The instruments were curiously shaped and gleaming—save one which was brown with rust. Rust? It jabbed me with a long shining fork and I twitched. That was about all I could do. My vocal cords seemed inoperative, and the bands were so tight that I couldn’t jump. But I twitched.
The Thing, which was mainly a large blue eye mounted on a nightmarish body, took a reading from the dial of the fork and did things to the band across my shoulders.
I shrieked. Not audibly, for I couldn’t make a sound. I shrieked, though. I could tell by the feeling inside that it was a shriek. It jabbed me again, but I didn’t move. I couldn’t. The bands were so tight I couldn’t even flex a muscle. I could roil my eyes across the mirrored surface of the ceiling and thus see the whole ward, but nothing else.
The fact that I could see reflections in that ceiling was somehow, worse than if my eyes had been taped shut. I had to look, and almost cried because I didn’t own enough will power to shut my eyes against the horrors that scurried from bed to bed with sadistic speed.  p. 20

After his release there is a scene where he returns to the restaurant he was in before going to Hell. His dining companions are still in the Bad Place so he has to pay for the meal (he does so using a magic purse that only produces a dime at a time—if you want a stellar example of Cartmill’s padding, this is the scene for you).
Needless to say (spoiler) all ends well: the spy ring is disrupted, and Mike gets the girl (yes, there is one in there at the start).
Noted in passing is the fifth columnist fear-mongering in a scene where Mike has found Gartz’s notebook and a list of names:

I opened the book and skimmed the couple of hundred names and addresses.
No classification indicated that these might be anything but names of personal friends. The addresses were scattered over the entire country, and were innocuous enough. Some were business addresses, others private.
But a surging emotion told me that here was the information the department had been seeking for several years. Here were the innocent-appearing agents, a widespread system of sharp eyes and ears. And clever mouths spreading rumor and dissension here and sending facts to their fatherland, for a highly important part of such an agent’s work is to spread disunity among the people.
America was now solidly all out in the war effort. But war is somewhat undramatic—away from home. For the vast majority of the population, war was a series of daily headlines. And, as time and the war dragged, on, little seeds of doubt, planted by solid citizens such as these agents must appear to be, would grow and propagate. Then, come the day when war was in our own front yards, it would find a less solid defense line than if the seeds had never been sown.  p. 30

The Wishes We Make by E. Mayne Hull starts with a man called Kennijahn on death row inadvertently summoning a demon called Drdr. Kennijahn gets six wishes from the demon, but the latter tells Kennijahn he cannot escape his fate which is to eventually die from hanging.
The rest of the story runs through Kennijahn’s various wishes and (spoiler) their failure to save him. His first wish transports him to South America—but when he sends a telegram to his girlfriend the American police intercept it, and the locals later turn up to arrest him.
The ending could have been relatively ingenious in that Kennijahn plans to inhabit the body of a man who attempts suicide by hanging but erroneously escapes his fate. Kennijahn possesses his body at the point of hanging, but he cannot get himself out of the noose. He then finds he has no wishes left as, apparently, unsaid wishes count as well as expressed ones.
This is, for the most part, an enjoyable enough read but the ending plainly doesn’t work.
Blind Alley by Malcolm Jameson is the highlight of the issue, and it begins with this:

Nothing was further from Mr. Feathersmith’s mind that dealings with streamlined, mid-twentieth-century witches or dickerings with the Devil. But something had to be done. The world was fast going to the bowwows, and he suffered from an overwhelming nostalgia for the days of his youth. His thoughts constantly turned to Cliffordsville and the good old days when men were men and God was in His heaven and all was right with the world. He hated modern women, the blatancy of the radio, That Man in the White House, the war—  p. 48

After this we learn more about Feathersmith’s dissatisfaction with the modern world, and the way he treats those who work for him. Then he has a mini-stroke, which he only just survives (after examining him in his office the doctor says he can go with him to hospital, or go with an undertaker). Feathersmith’s examination results make him realise that he has grown old and unhealthy, so he resolves to contact an acquaintance called Forfin, an unusual character who has alluded to The Fountain of Youth in previous conversations. While Feathersmith waits for Forfin to get in touch, he liquidates all his assets. The pair eventually meet for lunch:

“I want,” Mr. Feathersmith said, baldly, “to turn the hand of the clock back forty years. I want to go to the town of Cliffordsville, where I was born and raised, and find it just as I left it. I propose to start life all over again. Can you contact the right people for the job?”
“Phew!” commented Mr. Forfin, mopping his head. “That’s a big order. It scares me. That’ll involve Old Nick himself—”
He looked uneasily about, as if the utterance of the name was a sort of inverted blasphemy.
“Why not?’’ snapped the financier, bristling. “I always deal with principals. They can act. Skip the hirelings, demons, or whatever they are.”
“I know” said Forfin, shaking his head disapprovingly, “but he’s a slick bargainer. Oh, he keeps his pacts—to the dot. But he’ll slip a fast one over just the same. It’s his habit. He gets a kick out of it—outsmarting people. And it’ll cost. Cost like hell.”
“I’ll be the judge of the cost,” said the old man, stiffly, thinking of the scant term of suffering, circumscribed years that was the best hope the doctor had held out to him, “and as to bargaining, I’m not a pure sucker. How do you think I got where I am?”
“O. K.,” said Forfin, with a shrug. “It’s your funeral. But it’ll take some doing. When do we start?”
“Now.”
“He sees mortals only by appointment, and I can’t make ’em. I’ll arrange for you to meet Madame Hecate. You’ll have to build yourself up with her. After that you’re on your own. You’d better have plenty of ready dough. You’ll need it.”
“I’ve got it,” said Mr. Feathersmith shortly. “And yours?”
“Forget it. I get my cut from them.”  p. 53-54

Feathersmith waits to hear from Forfin, and meanwhile recalls the days of his youth:

He slept. He dreamed. He dreamed of old Cliffordsville, with its tree-lined streets and sturdy houses sitting way back, each in its own yard and behind its own picket, fence. He remembered the soft clay streets and how good the dust felt between the toes when he ran barefoot in the summertime. Memories of good things to eat came to him—the old spring house and watermelons, hung in bags in the well, chickens running the yard, and eggs an hour old. There was Sarah, the cow, and old Aunt Anna, the cook. And then there were the wide open business opportunities of those days. A man could start a bank or float a stock company and there were no snooping inspectors to tell him what he could and couldn’t do. There were no blaring radios, or rumbling, stinking trucks or raucous auto horns. People stayed healthy because they led the good life. Mr. Feathersmith rolled over in bed and smiled. It wouldn’t be long now!  p. 54

Forfin contacts Feathersmith and tells him where to find Madame Hectate. Feathersmith phones for an appointment, and then goes to the 13th floor of a city tower block (initially he can’t find the floor, but eventually a sign and separate elevator appear). He has to see the credit controller first, and then meets Madame Hectate who, unexpectedly, is a vivacious brunette. She gives him a guided tour of the organisation while they wait for the Devil to arrive.
All of this ‘Hell as a modern organisation’ material foreshadows Alfred Bester’s later story Will You Wait? (F&SF, March 1959),2 and it is no surprise that when Satan later appears he doesn’t want Feathersmith’s soul (“Dear me, no. We’ve owned that for years”) but all his money. Madame Hectate rolls up Feathersmith’s sleeve, rubs his arm with an alcohol swab, and uses a syringe to get the blood required for his signature. After the contract is signed, the Devil tells him to catch an evening train at Grand Central Station.
The final section describes Feathersmith’s train journey back to the Cliffordsville of his youth, and telegraphs the arc of the rest of the story:

He had undressed automatically and climbed into his berth. He let his feverish anticipations run on, getting dozier all the time. He suddenly recalled that he really should have seen the doctor before leaving, but dismissed it with a happy smile. By the time he had hit his upper twenties he was done with whooping cough, measles and mumps.
[. . .]
The Limited slid on through the night, silently and jarless. Thanks to its air conditioning, good springs, well turned wheels, smooth traction, rockballasted roadbed and heavy rails, it went like the wind. For hundreds of miles the green lights of block signals flickered by, but now and again another train would thunder by on an eastbound track. Mr. Feathersmith gave no thought to those things as he pillowed deeper into the soft blankets, or worried about the howling blizzard raging outside. The Limited would get there on time and with the minimum of fuss. That particular Limited went fast and far that night—mysteriously it must have covered in excess of a thousand miles and got well off its usual route.
For when Mr. Feathersmith did wake, along toward dawn, things were uncannily different. To begin with, the train was lurching and rocking violently from side to side, and there was a persistent slapping of a flat wheel underneath. The blizzard had abated somewhat, but the car was cold. He lifted the curtain a bit and looked out on a snow-streaked, hilly landscape that strongly suggested Arkansas. Then the train stopped suddenly in the middle of a field and men came running alongside with lanterns. A hotbox, he heard one call, which struck him as odd, for he had not heard of hotboxes for a long time.
After about an hour, and after prolonged whistling, the train slowly gathered way again. By that time Mr. Feathersmith noticed that his berth had changed during the night. It was an old-fashioned fore-and-aft berth with an upper pressing down upon it. He discovered he was wearing a flannel nightgown, too—another item of his past he had failed to remember, it had been so long since he had changed to silk pajamas. But by then the porter was going through the car rousing all the passengers.
“Gooch Junction in half a’ hour, folks,” he was saying. “Gotta get up now—dey drop the sleeper dere.”
Mr. Feather smith groaned and got up. Yes, yes, of course. Through sleepers were the exception, not the rule, forty years ago.  p. 61-62

As the journey progresses his environment becomes more and more primitive. The ablutions on the train are very basic and, as he has not yet been rejuvenated, he cannot eat the rough and ready food. He also notices that the other passengers smell. Matters do not improve when, after completing an uncomfortable two-mile journey by rig from the station to the town, he finds the hotel a “shattering disappointment”.
He then experiences almost permanent dismay—his boyhood house is not a vast mansion he remembered but is a rundown building in the middle of nowhere with no telephone or running water; he visits a girl he was sweet on in his youth but finds her “an empty-headed little doll”; on the way back to town he sees a number of yellow flags hung out of houses, a sign of smallpox.
He has other problems too as nearly all the ideas he has for making money will not work in that time period—the oil field he knows of would require wells six thousand feet deep, beyond the technology of the time; a suggestion to develop and market a starter motor for cars garners little more than a sarcastic comment about inventing perpetual motion from a garage mechanic.
The last part of the story finds Feathersmith still not rejuvenated, and with his health failing: because of the limitations of the time he has not been able to follow the doctor’s instructions as to diet and drugs, etc. Just before he dies a copy of the contract he signed with the Devil flutters down from above—it states he didn’t complain so “that lets us out.” This is an disappointingly weak ending to what is an otherwise superior story about how the past isn’t how we fondly remember it (and, perhaps, that you can never recapture your youth). What makes Jameson’s story even more poignant is that he died less than two years later in April 1945 (he had started writing in 1938 when complications due to throat cancer ruled out a non-writing career).3
A Bargain in Bodies by Moses Schere has quite a complicated setup that begins with two men arriving at a village store, one of whom is in a terrible state:

The man who stumbled into the Paleyville general store was hunched far over, his long lean body a bow of fatigue. Sweat had caked the dust on his face. His lips worked in a gray dirty film. His eyes were slits of hunted agony. Another man, slim, cool and elegantly dressed, came up behind him, waited with an air of amused patience for him to pass through the doorway.
Miss Thomkin, the store’s proprietress stared from her rocking chair in growing horror. For the stooped man obviously carried something—carried it with one hand wrenched around to hold the burden on his back—and it was the burden which stooped him, the burden which had worn illimitable tiredness into his gray-stubbled face.
But the burden was invisible.  p. 72

After the hunched over man has something to drink he identifies himself as Mr Oliver, and organises a wagon to the house the pair are going to. He later discreetly slips the woman who owns the store a note. As the two men leave Mr Oliver’s dapper companion shows off his horns and tail.
After the wagon goes Miss Tomkin reads the note. In it Mr Oliver asks for help to escape from the other man, a demon, and says the only way this can be done is by stealing the silvery half-egg object that it possesses.
The penultimate scene has the demon come down to see the townspeople and explain how Oliver got himself in into his predicament in the first place (a black magic experiment to transfer Oliver’s partner Ames into his body backfired, and Ames is now an invisible load connected to Oliver by ectoplasm, which the latter has to carry around).
Although this is an rather involved setup, the story actually works reasonably well to this point. However, it is more forced going forward when (spoiler) a tom cat the demon has been tormenting knocks the egg out of the latter’s hand. Miss Tomkins gets hold of it and she forces the demon to let Oliver finish his experiment to change Ames back to human form. The demon complies but the twist ending is that Ames now carries an ectoplasmic Oliver around.
There are a couple of good ideas here but it is unconvincing as  well as structurally awkward (the demon’s visit to the town seems to be entirely for data-dump and plot pivot reasons).
Sriberdegibit by Anthony Boucher starts with a drunk lawyer called Gilbert Isles drinking with a magician in bar. After some chit-chat the magician tells him about “wimps,” wish-imps, and how there is one flying round the bar at that moment that can make Isles’ wish come true. Iles unadvisedly says “may I be cursed” and finds his wish granted. When the magician summons the demon in charge of his curse Iles discovers he must commit a sin every day or be strangled by the demon at midnight.
This is a pretty good setup but the rest of the story is bulked out with Isles’ various sins (the first few require little effort as he is, after all, a lawyer). As matters become increasingly problematical his wife becomes involved (more padding).
The last section involves Isles’ “abduction” of a young woman who gets angry when he doesn’t do anything else to her, instead releasing her a few blocks away (it’s hard to believe this wasn’t considered poor taste “humour”at the time of publication, never mind now). She gets her brother to avenge her honour.
The story ends (spoiler) with a piece of legal sophistry that gets Isles off the hook (if he doesn’t sin he’s committing suicide, which is a sin).
After a good beginning this becomes a padded, contrived affair.
The Rabbit and the Rat by Robert Arthur begins with an awkward, info-dump sentence:

Dr. Nicholas Dete, late professor of the psychology of Westate University, recently retired to do research work in his own home following the tragic kidnaping and murder of his only child and the subsequent suicide of his wife, looked up as Jose, his clever Filipino assistant, entered the little office. In his pale-blue watery eyes there was a question which the other answered by nodding.  p. 102

Jose then tells the professor about a man called Banning, and his brutality to a pigeon that flew into his house (wing broken by a thrown book) and a dog that ran up to him (kicked and ribs broken).
The story’s point of view then changes to Banning, and we find him thinking about the professor:

Dr. Nicholas Dete! It had been funny enough to see the little man squawking around after they had snatched the kid. As if anyone could have loved a kid like that! A slobbering, hare-faced nuisance that yelled continually and would have grown up to look exactly like its father. Why, it was practically a public service to put the brat out of its misery.
Not that it had been as dumb as it looked, though. In spite of being only five, it had recognized him the one time he slipped into the hide-out and it had somehow wriggled its blindfold off. Recognized him from just seeing him that once, the day its old man had had it out walking; and Chuck Banning had stopped to talk to Dete. Sometimes kids were bright that way. Anyway, it had recognized him.
So after they’d collected from Dete, Chuck Banning had had to slap it silly with the butt end of a gun. Funny that anybody’s skull, even a kid’s, could be so thin a gun butt would go right in and the brains splash out like so much butter—
Never mind that. It was the kid’s own fault, wasn’t it? Nobody had meant to hurt it But that was how it turned out. Not that he gave a damn. And if the little roach’s mother wanted to go jump in the river afterward, that was her own business.  p. 103

After this unpleasant and brutal start Monk, one of Banning’s men, arrives with the news that another of their gang has disappeared. While they are talking a box arrives in the mail and Banning’s servant is told to go away and open it. Meanwhile, a frog hops into the room and meets the same fate as the pigeon and the dog. The servant returns with the opened box, which has three dead rats inside. Banning checks the postmark and realises that Professor Dete has sent the package.
The rest of this plays out as a mad scientist/mesmerism/soul transfer story (the three animals killed so far contained the souls of the missing gang members), and it all reads like a not particularly good Weird Tales story.
Another tale that could join Arthur’s piece in Weird Tales is The Devil Is Not Mocked by Manly Wade Wellman. This has a German general and a detachment of soldiers travelling to a castle in Transylvania with entirely predictable and bitey consequences.
Eight Ball by John B. Michel4 begins with a drunk American professor taken home by a colleague. When the pair enters the professor’s home, the colleague sees a rubber ball come bouncing towards him as if it is alive. The professor then recounts a story about visit to China where he saw a demonstration of how they put carved balls inside other carved balls. This leads on to a related anecdote about how a Russo-Chinese acquaintance learning how to do this accidentally turned himself into a rubber ball.
This has some good local colour but it doesn’t hold up as a story.
The Green-Eyed Monster by Theodore Sturgeon starts with Gus trying to help a white-haired woman pursued by somebody (or something). When Gus catches her she slaps his face. He sees her again a few days later in a bar, and this time it all goes wrong when he drags her out from under a giant sunflower, which then breaks and falls on a waiter with a tray full of drinks. Gus gets thrown out of the bar.
Gus later talks about both these events to Henry Gade, a psychologist friend who turns out to have treated the woman, called Iona; Gade later gives Gus her address (so much for patient confidentiality!)
When Gus goes to see Iona she invites him in, and the story’s gimmick is revealed:

“It started about two years ago. I had a slight crush on a fellow at a summer camp. He took me to a dance one night—one of those country square dances. It was a lot of fun and we danced ourselves tired. Then we went out onto the lakeshore—and he—well, the moon and all, you, know—he put his arms around me. And just then, a voice spoke to me. It said, ‘If you know what’s good for you, you’ll keep away from this fellow.’ I started back and asked the boy if he had said something. He hadn’t.’ I was scared and ran all the way home. He tried to catch me, but he couldn’t. I saw him the next day and I tried to apologize, but there wasn’t very much I could say. I tried to be nice to him, but as time went on he got more and more irritable. And he lost weight. He wound up in the hospital. Almost—died. You see, he couldn’t sleep. He was afraid to sleep. He had the most terrible dreams. I heard about one of them. It was awful.”  p. 130

She adds that, as soon as she stopped seeing him, he recovered, and she tells Gus about other men who have had similar experiences. She points at the cloves of garlic around the window and door, and concludes with the revelation that she is haunted by a jealous ghost.
Gus then suffers the same persecution as all the other men, and writes to a gossip columnist for advice: he learns that the ghost will only stop tormenting him when it is no longer attracted to Iona or finds someone else. Meanwhile, Iona decides not to see Gus to spare him the terrible ordeal the ghost is putting him through. Gus goes on a ten-day drinking binge.
For the first half or so this is a pretty good piece of quirky light fantasy, but it starts to fade after the midway point and has an exceptionally lame ending (spoiler): Gus takes her to get her white hair dyed as it, and her pale skin and dark eyes, make her look like a ghost—hence the real ghost’s attraction to her!
The Hounds of Kalimar by P. Schuyler Miller opens with the narrator and his Indian friend out on a hunting trip. They discover an unexplored valley and later make camp there:

We had an hour or two of daylight left, but our camp site was a good one and we stayed there. We sat with our backs against a huge fallen hemlock, a good four feet through the trunk. I had my pipe and Jim, who doesn’t smoke, was repairing the rim of his pack basket. His fingers were busy with the splints, but his eyes were on the forest, and pretty soon I found myself watching too.
His face gave no sign, but I knew he had seen something. I followed the direction of his gaze, and began methodically to study the face of the forest. Finally I saw it: a blue jay, its crested head cocked a little, one black eye fixed on us. It might have been carved out of painted wood, so still it was. A flick of motion caught the corner of my eye, and I saw a fox crouching in the shadows. And then I began to see them all. A lump near the top of a small balsam was a porcupine. A dead leaf caught in a fork was another squirrel. Little round shadows among the higher branches were chickadees and kinglets. The sinuous shadow of a hemlock root on the stream bank became a weasel. And their eyes were on us.  p. 139

A short time later two strange-looking (“monkey”) men turn up and force them to go to see the ruler of the valley, another odd-looking man called Kallimar, who seems to be some sort of human missing link. The animals that were watching them follow the narrator and his friend into the hall and, after some back and forth, Kallimar tells the pair that they will compete in a hunt against an otter, wolf, and eagle. They will have to win if they want to survive.
The rest of the story is pretty much an unpleasant slaughter-fest, with the pair eventually killing more than the other three animals, and capturing a couple of them as well. An albino puma helps them out in the latter stages.
This is readable enough stuff but it’s all a bit arbitrary and pointless (and as for Kallimar’s amphibious aircraft parked on the lake, completely anachronistic).

I’ve spoken briefly about the change of Cover design above. The Interior artwork in this issue is by Paul Orban, Hall, Frank Kramer, Manuel Isip, Newton Alfred , and William Kolliker, and I’ll withhold comment at the moment as I’m reading this one from an Unz.org scan, and some of the art work is very badly reproduced.
Of Things Beyond: Gremlins Breed Fast is a short editorial about gremlins that ends with this:

It looks as though the spread of gremlins was not only unopposed, but in some manner greatly aided by a universal, highly effective fifth column organization. As a matter of fact, there is every indication that the Ancient and Universal Order of Buck Passers is the organization behind their wide and rapid spread. It is a well-established fact that this truly Ancient and Universal Order assisted the spread and nurtured the growth of the brownie, the troll, leprechaun, goblin, cobald, nickel, jinx, and unnumbered other species of such invisible and omnipresent trouble causers. The equally Ancient and Honorable Order of Tall Tale Tellers has assisted in this work as innocent and unconscious agents in the spread of the trouble-makers, but has to some extent modified them under an uplift program designed to make them useful and-helpful citizens.
But the real reason for their wide and rapid conquest is the wholly conscious and malevolent fifth column work of the Buck Passers, beyond question. The Order can well claim to be Ancient and Universal, if not honorable. They claim, and rightly, we understand, that Adam was the originator of the Order, as well as of other things.  p. 6

Book Reviews by Anthony Boucher starts off with an examination of three books on prophecy. One these books, Prophets and Portents, Seven Seers Foretell Hitler’s Doom by Rolf Boswell (Thomas Y. Crowell Co., 1942) has an interesting account of one seer’s predictions:

Boriska Silbiger, a Hungarian, who employed none of the paraphernalia of occultism but simply issued a forecast each year from 1933 until 1939, when she was imprisoned in a concentration camp. One sample of her work will indicate her quality; in 1935 she said: “In January of the ensuing year, the king of a great empire will die suddenly. He will be succeeded by his eldest son, but the reign of his successor will not last twelve months, whereafter he will renounce the throne.”
The ensuing year, 1936, brought the death of George V and the brief reign and abdication of Edward VIII.
This is not an isolated example. There are a half dozen others as good. And the last Silbiger utterance, the prophecy that brought down upon her the wrath of the Gestapo, reads: “The war will end with Hitler’s death and the collapse of Nazism. The world after the peace comes will be so different and-there will be such national and social upheavals that it impossible to describe it.”
Unfortunately in this, his most, impressive subject, Mr. Boswell’s documentation is even scantier than usual.
He mentions only that her forecasts were printed “in thirty-odd newspapers in various parts of the globe.” The New York Times Index, The Official Index to the London Times, The International Index to Periodicals, and The Reader’s Guide to Periodical Literature have never heard of her.  p. 159

The actual prophecy she made was, “The war will end in 1942 with Hitler’s death and the collapse of Nazism. But the belligerent Powers will be so exhausted that there will be no victor and no defeated in the common sense of the word. Whoever survives it will live to see a new and better world.”5
The last part of the column discusses The Magus by Comte de L’Avre, an encyclopaedia of magic—more mumbo-jumbo. I don’t understand why editors of fantasy magazines assume that readers of such material are interested in this kind of thing.

With the singular exception of the Jameson this is a very poor issue.  ●

____________________

1. Fred Smith, Once There Was A Magazine— p. 44-45 (Beccon Publications, 2002), notes the changes to the magazine and the front cover design before commenting on the fiction. “Best of the lot, by a narrow margin,” he says, “was Anthony Boucher’s novelette Sriberdegibit.” He notes that the story reintroduces the magician Ozymandias the Great from The Compleat Werewolf.
Blind Alley “was another winner for Jameson”, and he notes the same could be said for Cartmill’s Wheesht! Miller’s The Hounds of Kalimar was “a fairly average adventure story which would not have been out of place in the old Argosy.”
He thought the short stories a “mixed bag”, with Sturgeon’s the best, followed by Hull’s and Arthur’s.
Smith finishes by noting new artists Alfred and Hall, the latter “producing a couple of excellent full page illustrations for Sriberdegibit.”

Stefan R. Dziemianowicz, p. 144-146, The Annotated Guide to Unknown & Unknown Worlds (Starmont, 1991) says that Cartmill’s Wheest! is “a quaint story, with some subtle digs at Hitler and the myth of Aryanism.”
He found the Arthur story “dreadful”, and the Miller story “terrible”. He adds that both of these pieces were in inventory for almost two years, and that “stories like this, combined with the lack of long fiction in this issue, give the impression he was trying to get rid of a lot of material from the inventory backlog in one fell swoop.”
He notes that A Bargain in Bodies by Moses Schere “was the only [Unknown story] that was ever optioned for a light opera”, and that Sriberdegibit by Anthony Boucher “is one of the few Unknown stories in which a man wins out against his demon through a loophole that is a natural part of the curse.”

2. One wonders to what extent Jameson’s story influenced Alfred Bester. Will You Wait? also has a ‘Hell as a modern business’ theme (that said, this may have been a relatively common trope in the magazine, but Jameson’s version is the first I can remember having come across). The other Bester story that was perhaps influenced by Jameson’s story is Hobson’s Choice (F&SF, August 1952), which has as its theme the pointlessness of yearning for other times.
Bester mentions Jameson in his Hell’s Catographers (Weidenfeld & Nicolson, 1975) essay, My Affair with Science Fiction:

Mort Weisinger introduced me to the informal luncheon gatherings of the working science fiction authors of the late thirties. I met Henry Kuttner (who later became Lewis Padgett), Ed Hamilton, and Otto Binder, the writing half of Eando Binder. Eando was a sort of acronym of the brothers Earl and Otto Binder. E. and O. Earl died but Otto continued to use the well-known nom de plume. Malcolm Jameson, author of navy-orientated space stories, was there, tall, gaunt, prematurely grey, speaking in slow, heavy tones. Now and then he brought along his pretty daughter who turned everybody’s head.
The vivacious compere of those luncheons was Manley Wade Wellman, a professional Southerner full of regional anecdotes. It’s my recollection that one of his hands was slightly shrivelled, which may have been why he came on so strong for the Confederate cause. We were all very patient with that; after all, our side won the war. Wellman was quite the man-of-the-world for the innocent thirties; he always ordered wine with his lunch.
Henry Kuttner and Otto Binder were medium sized young men, very quiet and courteous, and entirely without out­standing features. Once I broke Kuttner up quite un­intentionally. I said to Weisinger, ‘I’ve just finished a wild story that takes place in a spaceless, timeless locale where there’s no objective reality. It’s awfully long, 20,000 words, but I can cut the first 5,000.’ Kuttner burst out laughing. I do too when I think of the dumb kid I was. Once I said most earnestly to Jameson, ‘I’ve discovered a remarkable thing. If you combine two story-lines into one the result can be tremendously exciting.’ He stared at me with incredulity. ‘Haven’t you ever heard of plot and counterplot?’ he growled. I hadn’t. I discovered it all by myself.  p. 50-51

3. Jameson’s great-granddaughter Wendy McClure has a website about him that provides a short biography.
Blind Alley became a Twilight Zone episode, Of Late I Think of Cliffordville, which aired in April 1963.

4. This was one of John B. Michel’s last stories. Only three more would appear before his death in 1968 according to ISFDB.

5. The Silbiger prophecies appear in a couple of wartime papers, such as this New Zealand one. ●

rssrss

Astounding Science-Fiction v31n05, July 1943

ISFDB link
Archive.org link

_____________________

Editor, John W. Campbell Jr.; Assistant Editor, Catherine Tarrant

Fiction:
Hunch • novelette by Clifford D. Simak –
Unthinking Cap • short story by John R. Pierce
The Great Engine • novelette by A. E. van Vogt
The Renegade • short story by Lester del Rey [as by Marion Henry]
Gleeps • short story by P. Schuyler Miller –
Gather, Darkness! (Part 3 of 3) • serial by Fritz Leiber

Non-fiction:
Cover • by William Timmins
Interior artwork • by A. Williams (x3), Paul Orban (x3), Elton Fax (x3), Frank Kramer (x5)
So It’s Impossible— • editorial by John W. Campbell, Jr.
The Analytical Laboratory: May 1943 • story ratings
In Times to Come
The World of 61 Cygni C
• science essay by R. S. Richardson
Brass Tacks • letters

_____________________

Hunch by Clifford D. Simak has as its protagonist a man called Chambers, chairman of the Solar Control Board. He is blind and “sees” by telepathically sharing the sight of Hannibal, an enigmatic alien—although only when the latter isn’t dreaming of home.

Chambers meets Allen, head of the Solar Secret Service, and they discuss the developing problem of men going mad (or “batty” as this unsophisticated story occasionally describes it) in the various colonies of the solar system:

For years now there had been a breakdown of human efficiency. It had started gradually, a few incidents here, a few there. But it had spread, had progressed almost geometrically; had reached a point now where, unless something could be done about it, the Solar System’s economic and industrial fabric would go to pot for lack of men to run it and the power plants and laboratories, the mills, the domed cities, the communication system men had built on all the planets encircling the Sun would crumble into dust.
Men were better trained, better equipped mentally, more brilliant than ever before. Of that there was no question. They had to be. Hundreds of jobs demanded geniuses. And there were geniuses, thousands of them, more than ever before. Trouble was they didn’t stay geniuses. They went insane.  p. 11

The two men then speak about an asylum on one of the system’s asteroids, the Sanctuary, free of charge to those that need treatment. Little is known about this shadowy organisation, and Allen’s agents have not been able to gather any intelligence.
At this point the story cuts to various scenes that set up elements that appear later in the story: a socialite loses her alien jewels at a party but, after screaming about it, seems to ignore the matter; a Plutonian scientist called Kemp walks in on Johnny Gardner and finds he has gone insane—the man goes to Sanctuary; an archaeologist called Monk is thinking about a Martian translation he has completed and the information it reveals about a fifth planet when he gets a delivery. This latter package is the stolen asteroid jewels. He hears a screeching violin play when he opens the box and dashes the jewels against a cabinet. He gets a glimpse of something like a crippled fairy before it vanishes.
At this point in the story none of this makes any sense, but matters become clearer as the story plods on. It eventually becomes (spoiler) a tale about an alien threat to Earth from the former inhabitants of the fifth planet, who the Martians (a dead race of whom Hannibal is one) destroy, turning their planet into the asteroid belt. Some of the natives survive as jewels however, their “encysted” form, and later find their way to Sanctuary, using it as a front to brainwash Earthmen. This threat is later revealed by Kemp who is sent there along with Hannibal by Chambers.

The last part of the story (Kemp escapes from Sanctuary and raises the alarm but goes mad) involves a message to Chalmers saying that some people have accurate hunches, and that this is a new or returning instinct that is developing in the human race. What this has to do with the madness and alien jewels, etc., I have no idea, and it sounds like one of Campbell’s hobby horses randomly stuffed into the story.
In conclusion, this is a terrible, clunky piece that has too many ideas, all ploddingly explained, and which Simak struggles to marshal efficiently. It reads like a poor story from 1938, and what is perplexing is that other writers who were producing similar material (Bond, Cummings, Williams, Rocklynne, etc.) are mostly or entirely gone from the pages of Astounding. Was Campbell short of material? Was Simak a friend? All I know is that, based on this and an earlier story, Simak was a pretty poor writer at this point in his career.1
I note in passing that the prose is as clunky as the story, and that there are two clumsy/ungrammatical sentences on the first page: “. . . brought about by Hannibal’s frequent thinking of the place” and “Visual communication the picturing of actualities, yes—”. Should this be “frequent thoughts” and “Visually communicating”? On the next page there is “Geniuses is our trouble” followed at the end of the same paragraph with “And geniuses are screwy”. Only one of these can be right. I know this is dialogue, but still. . . .
Unthinking Cap by John R. Pierce is a forgettable squib about a man extracted from the present and used as a test subject in the future. To reward him for his service in that time the liaison man allows him to take an artefact back with him. The item he chooses is a cap that, when you press the attached button, makes the wearer forget a remembered memory or current thought.

Once back in his own time he experiments with the device and, (spoiler) while thinking about the machine, he accidentally presses the button and forgets what it does. He presses the button again and forgets everything. This latter step (multiple memory loss) doesn’t make much sense.
There is a coda that implies that the liaison man knew this would be the outcome (and there is a “borogove” reference in the last line, which presumably means something).
There is the kernel of a good story here—what would you forget if you could, and would you?—but this version just doesn’t work.
The Great Engine by A. E. van Vogt is the first of the ‘Pendrake’ series and starts with him finding a strange engine that has fallen out of the sky in into the countryside. Pendrake examines the machine, and nearly loses his one remaining arm when he pokes a branch into the maw of the machine and is thrown up into the air by the force of the branch’s subsequent rotation. The branch remains in the machine spinning rapidly.

Pendrake subsequently recovers the machine to his house, and we get some backstory: it is 1948, there are no stories in the paper about its loss of the machine, and there is mention of a failed relationship with a neighbour (we find out later that this is his estranged wife).
The rest of the story runs along two tracks: the first details Pendrake’s attempt to use the machine, which involves replacing the branch with a metal rod and then commissioning a machine shop to build a clutch so he can use the machine to power an aircraft; the second involves his rapprochement with his wife, something that begins when he goes to the bank for a loan to build the clutch and discovers that she secretly transferred most of their properties and money to him after they separated.
Matters become more complicated when, after flying his aircraft for the first time (how he does this with one arm is not explained) he is held up by four men on landing, and who give him money to cover his expenses before flying the plane away. Pendrake goes to the police but gets nowhere, so he contacts an old friend. By the time the latter and an Air Force contact turn up at Pendrake’s house, he has had threats about his wife’s safety, so he says nothing. Pendrake then goes to her and explains what has happened; she suggests that, as the machine is obviously an atomic engine, they research the whereabouts of current atomic scientists.

At this point what has been a relatively intriguing story turns into something much less convincing. Pendrake burgles a scientist’s office and, acting on information found there, and equipped with a flesh mask and an artificial arm, he and his wife infiltrate an organisation looking for farm settlers. They are drugged during the application process and put on a spaceship to Venus. Pendrake, however, is injected in his artificial arm so he recovers quickly after the launch. As he looks around he sees several engines, and realises they are acting as anti-gravity drives. He soon has control of the ship.

This story is an enjoyable and intriguing read until the last part with its far-fetched idea of press-ganging people to Venus.
Possibly of note is the emotional state that Pendrake exhibits throughout the story (his estrangement from his wife is on his mind throughout, and he tries on more than one occasion to reconcile with her before being successful). This particular theme is something I haven’t noticed in van Vogt’s fiction so far, and I believe it is also a feature of a forthcoming story, The Storm (October 1943).
Lester del Rey’s impressive debut story The Faithful (Astounding, April 1938) was an ‘Uplift’ story2 about intelligent dogs and gorillas in a post-apocalypse Earth: The Renegade revisits this theme:

Harvey Lane squatted just inside the door of the chief’s thatched hut, his outward attention divided between the chief’s laborious attempts to sew on a button belonging to Lane’s only pair of shorts and the life in the village itself. Outwardly, it was little different from that of any other inland African community, though the cleanliness and the absence of a constant confused babble were strange, as was the lack of yapping cur dogs underfoot. But to anyone else, the huge females busy at their gardening or making the crude artifacts possible with the material at hand, the playing young, and the bulky guards squatting in the lower branches around would have been distinctly not normal.
Lane was used to it. In eight years a man can become completely accustomed to anything, even the sight of some hundreds of gorillas busy at work that would normally be men’s. He knew every one of the hairy, heavily muscled apes out there, so well that he no longer saw their faces as ugly things, but as the individual countenances of friends and students.
Now he leaned further back, brushing against a muscular shoulder while one of the bulls in the hut flicked a fan back and forth to keep the flies off his hairless hide until the chief finished the sewing and he could put on his tattered shorts again.
Ajub, the chief, had been thinking; now he picked up the conversation again, his voice thick and slow, and the consonants sometimes distorted; but his speech in the English for which they had so gladly exchanged their own primitive, [inexpressive] tongue was no worse than could be found in parts of the larger man-cities. “It was about fifty years ago, I think, when we decided to come here and build a village away from all the blacks; we’d been trying to learn from them before that for maybe a hundred years, but all they showed for us was hatred, fear, and a desire to kill us and eat us, so we gave it up as hopeless; the harder we tried, the more afraid of us they became. And the one white man we’d seen before you came, hadn’t been exactly friendly; he killed several of our tribe before we were forced to eliminate him and his group. Beyond that, our memory and our poor speech give no clue.”  p. 87-88

There is then some backstory about Lane’s history, his dissolute life in civilisation, and how he was lost in the jungle until he stumbled upon the uplifted apes. They took him back to their village and nursed him back to health. Little Tama, one of the younger apes, interupts his reverie and comes with news of books he has found in a drifting canoe. Lane goes to inspect the canoe and finds various items including a woman’s shoe. This disturbs Lane’s equilibrium, and memories of human life crash down on him. He gets in the canoe and leaves, much to Little Tama’s anguish.

The subsequent trip downriver is fraught with danger and, even though Lane avoids various hazards, he is almost killed when pursued by three canoes full of spear throwing black men. Only the intervention of an unseen group saves him, but during the battle he is knocked unconscious.
He eventually comes around to find himself in civilization, where an elderly white woman is nursing him. She tells him that he has had a fever for a week. Later, he overhears the woman and a man speaking about him, and that he has been missing for eight years and has been declared legally dead. At the end of their discussion Lane discovers he has revealed the secret of the apes’ village during his fever, and that an expedition is setting off to hunt and trap the apes. Lane dresses and leaves with the intention of warning the tribe, but soon realises he will find it difficult to get back unaided. Just as he is beginning to despair, Ajub appears from the undergrowth. The ape knows all about the expedition, and has sent one of the other gorillas home with a warning. He also reveals that apes from the tribe have watched over him since he left, and that they were the ones that saved him in the canoe attack.

Ajub offers to take Lane back home—the ape’s intention is to take him to his sick quarters—only to have Lane tell him that his home is to the north, where the tribe live.
This has a relatively slight plot but it is a smartly put together one and, if you like animal stories, or uplift stories where animals manifest humanity’s better virtues, then you’ll like this.
Gleeps by P. Schuyler Miller starts with a couple of pages of waffle where the narrator describes (at over much length) an alien called Gleeps:

It seems there were two Martians, Xnpqrdt and Tdrqpnx. Or maybe it was two Venusians—or even two Irishmen. You know how the thing goes as well as I do.
So these two Martians meet on a street somewhere—let’s say it was on Main Street in Plnth—and Tdrqpnx says to Xnpqrdt: “Who was that cysystk I seen you with last night?”
And Xnpqrdt—if it was Xnpqrdt—turns bright pea-green and answers: “That was no cysystk—that was Gleeps.”  p. 99

The rest of the story involves the narrator, who is an astrogator joining a tramp liner/spaceship for a cruise. He meets an old Martian friend on his arrival at the ship and promptly gets drunk with him (as you would when you are away to take off). He then gets in to trouble when he appears drunk in front of the captain with the calculations for the warp jump.

When the captain eventually engages the warp drive it causes a series of incomprehensible events, naked blondes, gun fights, etc., which the narrator then spends the last two or three pages explaining (apparently this is all caused by Gleeps, who can change shape).
This is all told in an irritatingly juvenile voice, and is structurally a mess. It is absolutely awful, and if I could give it negative stars I would.
Gather, Darkness! by Fritz Leiber ended last issue with the Goniface, the Archpriest of the fake religion that rules a future Earth, planning a Revival to quell the rioting fomented by the Witchcraft, a resistance movement dedicated to the church’s overthrow. This instalment begins with a restive crowd, pacified with parasympathetic rays, watching the churchmen arrive. For the first time in the novel we get a detailed idea of the extent and structures of the church:

The high doors of the Cathedral swung outward, and there issued forth, four abreast, a procession which incarnated the pomp and power of the Hierarchy. First two high-ranking priests, bearing censers. Then a contingent of black-robed deacons. Next, a column of First Circle priests, whose scarlet robes were without emblazonment. Tall, young men, and handsome. Their shaven heads imparted a strange unearthliness to their beauty. It was easy for their relatives in the crowd to forget—or almost forget—that these young demigods had ever been Commoners.
Following them, the higher circles. The crowd recognized them by their emblazonments, although they did not know the true significance of those emblazonments, thinking them mystic symbols confirming the frightening supernatural powers of their wearers.
Hand giving a blessing and at the same time grasping a stylus—emblazonment of the Second Circle. The circle of pastoral priests, clerks, minor confessors, minor technicians, minor everything else.
Diagram in silver and gold of the intertwined nervous and circulatory system—“the little bush,” the Commoners called it—emblazonment of the Third Circle of doctors, confessors, hypnotists and psychiatrists.
Lightning-and-coil—the insignia of the Fourth Circle. Very competent looking, clear-eyed priests, these. They were the technicians, engineers, and lesser managers who kept the scientific heart of the Hierarchy ticking. From this circle the ranks of the Seventh and the Apex were largely recruited.
And all the while, as they marched in stateliness and dignity from the Cathedral, circling the space the deacons had kept clear, before drawing up in ranks around the reviewing stand, the music strengthened and swelled, the original somberness brightened with the skirling of flutes and the clash of cymbals, enriched with the throaty tones of woodwinds and strings, as if the Great God were proceeding with the creation, and sun and stars and lush green grass were showing forth.
Atomic probe entwined by a reading tape—the Commoners thought it a rod and serpent— the Fifth Circle of research scientists, scholars, historians and professional artists. At this point the size of the contingents decreased sharply.
Human brain encircled by stylized equations in psycho-sociology—the Sixth Circle. These were the shrewd ones, the knowing ones. Experts in propaganda and social control. Research psychologists and psychiatrists.
Clenched fist with lines of force radiating from it—and that meant the same thing in any symbols. Power. The Seventh Circle of supervisors, major executives, general managers.
And as the priests marched, as the music grew ever more rich and warm and dazzling—as if it were climbing like the sun to the top of the sky—they seemed to tread under their feet all evil, all darkness, all rebellion, any and everything that presumed to lift its head against the Hierarchy.  p. 121-122

After this impressive arrival matters start to spiral out of control. First, there is the puzzling smell of goat and then, when the Great God bends over the crowd to bestow his manna upon the masses:

Slowly the Gargantuan hands stretched out over the Square, palms upward, in a gesture of tital generosity.
Then, from the right hand, ten thousand tiny fountains suddenly sprayed, while from the left cascaded down a rain of crusty flakes and tiny cubes.
A greedy, happy, excited, quite involuntary cry rose from the crowd, as the food and drink began to sprinkle them.
One second. Two. Three. And then the cry changed abruptly to a strangled spewing, and there swept through the massed ranks of the priests and across the reviewing stand a hideous stench that seemed compounded equally of putrid meat, rancid butter, moldy bread, vinegar and embalming fluid.
As from one giant throat, the crowd gargled, retched and spat. And still the noisome rain and noxious snow continued irrevocably to fall, drenching them, plastering them. Hands were ducked, hoods-pulled up. Those who had spread sheets crowded under them, while a few of those who had held up bowls now inverted them and clapped them on their heads. And still the dreadful stuff rained down, so thickly that the farther side of the Square was murkily obscured.
Snarls then, and angry cries. First a few, then more. Here and there the fringes of the crowd surged forward against the double line of deacons.  p. 124-125

After this there is rioting, and the priests who intervene to help the deacons find their repulsion fields have been reversed and they all clump together. Angels take to the sky but one crashes into the crowd, heralding the arrival of their Witchcraft equivalents.

At one point during the turmoil Brother Jarles realises that the voice of the Archpriest Sercival, leader of the Hierarchy’s Fanatic faction, is the same as the one he heard at the Coven—the hard-liner Sercival is Asomodeus, leader of the Witchcraft! Jarles fires his wrath-ray at him.
This chapter is an excellent set piece (albeit one that gets off to a slow start) but is spoiled a little when Goniface interrogates the dying Sercival, his questions more explanations of many of the story’s recent events, the way they spoiled the food, the pain in his hand during a previous interrogation of witches, etc., etc.
At the end of this cross-examination Sercival/Asomodeus dies.
The rest of this instalment (after a semi-comedic chapter where Mother Jujy finds an exhausted Dickon in the tunnels and feeds him) revolves around the (spoiler) telepathic influencing/hypnotising of Jarles and Goniface via their recently born familiars. The first of these is described in another long chapter where Jarles undergoes a mental struggle, sees visions, etc., that cause him to revert to his earlier self.

Later on in the story the same subliminal telepathic contact is used on Goniface while he is at the Web Center supervising operations against the Witchcraft. As the battle ebbs and flows he enters a heightened state of awareness, and comes to the conclusion that the Hierarchy is at its peak and will soon start to fail. He daydreams about his childhood and starts hearing a phrase “Come back, Knowles Satrick” (his former name). He then gets a message from one of his operatives that his voice has been heard in his apartments, so he leaves to investigate.
On his arrival there Goniface finds Naurya—along with the ghosts of all the people he murdered on his journey to the top of the Hierarchy. When he gets another message from the centre about the battle, he tells them to stop all counter attacks until tomorrow—the Witchcraft have finally managed to use these induced visions to manipulate him into making a fatal error in the fight against them.
Apart from moving the story on this chapter provides a convincing description of Goniface’s life, an effective account that creates a portrait of fully realised character. It is quite unlike the usual material you normally find in Astounding.
There are a couple of other points of interest in this last instalment. The first occurs between the chapters where Jarles and Goniface are telepathically manipulated by their familiars, where Jarles and others go to rescue the Black Man and the rest of the witches. This scene has a light-sabre (wrath ray) duel between The Black Man and Cousin Deth:

A door across the corridor opened and through it stepped Cousin Deth. In the next moment he proved Goniface’s wisdom in having chosen him as chief agent in matters requiring quick thinking. With almost incredible swiftness he recognized the situation and directed his wrath rod at the Black Man and Jarles.
But a familiar’s reactions are swifter than a man’s. In a blur of movement Dickon scuttled at him across the floor.
Deth’s sallow face was contorted suddenly with a fear that had only been there once before—when he fled panic-stricken from the haunted house.
“The thing in the hole!” he cried hollowly. “The spider!”
A moment more and he had realized his misapprehension, had regained control of himself, as the violet needle of his wrath ray was swinging down at Dickon.
But the Black Man had gained time to act. His own wrath ray lashed out, swished into that of Cousin Deth’s.
Since the two rays were mutually impenetrable, unable to cross through each other, Deth’s was fended off from Dickon.
Like two ancient swordsmen, then, the warlock and the deacon dueled together. Their weapons were two endless blades of violet incandescence, but their tactics were those of sabreurs—feint, cut, parry, swift riposte. Ceiling, walls, and floor were traced with redly glowing curlicues. Paralyzed deacons, seeming like spectators frozen in amazement, were burned down where they stood or stooped or sat.  p. 140-141

This Star Wars-esque light sabre duel may have been common in the pulps of this time, but it is the first one I have come across, and I wondered if this is where George Lucas got the idea for his movie.
The other thing I found interesting occurs in the last (washup) chapter. I’ve previously mentioned a couple of similarities between Leiber’s novel and van Vogt’s work, and I think that the ending may be another example. In this section Leiber opens out the story onto a much larger canvas: when a space ship arrives from Luciferopolis, the angels it discharges are black, and they are on the side of the Witchcraft. They come from colonies on Venus and Mars, and we learn that it was an interplanetary war that caused the Blasted Heath and almost destroyed the Golden Age. A story that has, until now, mostly played out in the capital of the Hierarchy suddenly spans the Solar System! (cf. “This is the race that will rule the Sevagram!”—the bootstrapping last line from van Vogt’s The Weapon Makers.)

The final scene of the novel describes the destruction of the Great God’s statue, and its head falling into the street (a missed opportunity for a great illustration).
This is a very good novel, and highly entertaining.3 I thought it better than Conjure Wife, and think it’s possibly one of the best things I’ve read in Astounding so far. If you haven’t read this yet I recommend that you do so.

The Cover, as ever in this period, is by William Timmins—one of his average efforts I think (it is a bit muddy for my taste). My favourites among this issue’s Interior artwork are two of the illustrations by A. Williams for the Simak story, and the third of Elton Fax’s illustrations for the van Vogt: this latter looks very much like something John Schoenherr could have produced years later. Paul Orban’s work is okay (I liked the first of his for the del Rey) but I’m beginning to find Kramer’s work lacking—it seems a little crude and is not improving unlike, say, Kolliker, who seems to have upped his game, as shown by recent work here and Unknown.
So It’s Impossible— by John W. Campbell, Jr. is a short science article about the development of a twenty million volt betatron (this produces very high energy electrons that are used in the likes of X-ray machines etc.) by Donald Kerst at the University of Illinois.4
The Analytical Laboratory: May 1943 was discussed in the review of that issue.5
In Times to Come discusses C. L. Moore’s new novel (a two-part serial) at some length:

The World of 61 Cygni C by R. S. Richardson starts off with the news that a planet has been found in the system of 61 Cygni C. There then follows half a dozen pages of material on telescope observations using micrometers that I found impenetrable (I even looked on the web for explanations but didn’t find much help) so I jumped to the section discussing the nature of the newly discovered planet. When I got to the part where its stated density was substantially different to anything then known I checked Wikipedia to find that modern observations have disproved the existence of a planet in that system—so an out of date article as well as a mostly unreadable one.6

Brass Tacks has a number of interesting letters this month. Robert C. Lee-Hanna, Washington, D. C., writes praising Mimsy Were the Borogoves and asking for a sequel based on the third verse of Jabberwocky. Frank Hobby, San Francisco, CA, asks why Campbell is referred to as “Don A. Stuart” in Boucher’s Rocket to the Morgue, and Campbell reveals that it is his pen name (was this the first release of this information to the wider SF public?) C. Hidley (a serviceman, so the magazine doesn’t print an address) says he used to preserve all his magazines with “maniacal care”, but his current footlocker can barely hold four issues—so he removes and keeps only the best material. That said, he finishes with this:

An issue that could remain intact after a sample of this new routine must really be something; “Mimsy Were the Borogoves,” “Man in the Moon,” and the two serials accomplished that feat for their issue—it was really superior with only one blank. The covers are good by this new man and the pix still float along in old, bad fashion. I also saved “No Graven Image,” “The Hat Trick,” Bok’s poem and the editorials, and was rather shocked to omit “Wet Magic” and “The Witch” [all from the February 1943 issue of Unknown Worlds,7 Astounding’s companion magazine] from my new portfolio. Speaking of the master—Bok, of course—I should like to enter one more vote for his recent novel [in the December 1943 issue of Unknown Worlds7], an item not in his usual and best style, but mighty acceptable—even if it did not fit the mood of the mag. And his illustrations should prove to you that here is an artist who works to the meaning of the mag; why not drop the barrier and let Hannes in—and let the majority of the others out.  p. 115

There is also a letter from Harold T. Kay of London, which Campbell prefaces with the comment “Science-fiction under difficulties”:

This letter is taking a lot on trust, I know. Maybe you no longer hold the old office, maybe there is not even a magazine, but still, here is a word of greeting from England for you. That and a request that you would slip in ASF a note that any of the old gang, especially SFA members who get posted in or near Westminster, will be very welcome if they get in touch with me.
When taking part in “the next war,” one finds little time for relaxation, and, in any case, the only new mags that we see are the slashed British editions which Atlas produces now and then. For which much thanks.
“Barrier” I remember as a good idea, but do I miss the serials!
Remember our old squabbles over the “purpose of SF”? Personally l am sure that all that racket, stories, discussions, howls—even the Mitchelists [Michelists?], have had some value. They helped to give me an idea of what the world could be like, and even of how to change society to achieve that state.
You may have noticed that in our own mad way we are starting doing things over here already. As you were so fond of saying in editorials, SF is steadily becoming fact.
Yours for Union Now and damnation to all Huns of all colors.  p. 115

The column ends with a couple of positive comments about the new size from Bill Stoy of New York, and Harold Rogovin, also from New York. Rogovin has this about the format change:

To the improvement in make-up of the large size—which was its only virtue—you have added this extra attraction—small size! I hope you never go back to the old inconvenient large size: it was annoying to carry around, annoying to hold in your hand and read, annoying because of the terrific amount of wasted paper—each letter was a mile away from its neighbor, the borders were enormous, and there was a gigantic amount of blank space. It was also hard to file away in a bookcase or anywhere else, and the pages, being larger, ripped more easily.
This new issue is simply a masterpiece! Swell make-up, convenient small size, good stories, and no paper waste.  p. 117

Rogovin also puts the boot into Raymond F. Jones’ story Pacer:

Why is it that some people, such as the author of this mass of drivel, are permitted to continue living? Perhaps the most nauseating part of it is the ridiculous attempt to depict the father-son relationship, in a most unnatural and inconceivable manner. For eighteen years the son is a human being, in two years of training he becomes a military moron, and becomes human again after two minutes of tension. Believable, yes? NO! Not only that, but it was, to say the least, slightly overdone, and also rather hackneyed.
In addition, the plot itself was as vile a costume western as I ever had the misfortune of glancing over. I couldn’t bear it sufficiently to be able to read it thoroughly; just enough so that I could tell you what I thought of it.  p. 117

Stoy and Rogovin’s letters are almost mirror images of each other: they both like the new format and Leiber’s Gather, Darkness!, and both disliked Jones’ Pacer.

This would be a pretty weak issue if it wasn’t for Leiber’s serial.  ●

_____________________

1. Simak appeared in the March 1943 Astounding with Shadow of Life, another story involving inimical aliens that is mediocre at best. Rim of the Deep appeared in the May 1940 Astounding and is awful. Rule 18 in the July 1938 Astounding is the one good early Simak story I’ve read so far.
Whatever Campbell saw in Simak it would soon pay off: in 1944 the first four ‘City’ stories would appear.

2. Lester del Rey’s The Faithful is reviewed here.

3. Given that Leiber’s novel has a tyranny/resistance story, light sabre duels, a comedy witch, and familiars (house-elves) you rather wonder why Hollywood hasn’t snapped up the rights.

4. The Wikipedia page for the Betatron.

5. The Analytical Laboratory results for this issue appeared in September:

I think the del Rey (Henry) story should have ranked higher than the Simak and van Vogt ones.

6. The Wikipedia page for 61 Cygni C.

7. The February 1943 issue of Unknown Worlds is reviewed here; the December 1942 issue is reviewed here.  ●

rssrss

Future Fantasy and Science Fiction v03n03, February 1943

ISFDB link
Archive.org link

_____________________

Editor, Robert W. Lowndes1

Fiction:
The Second Satellite • novelette by Donald A. Wollheim [as by Martin Pearson] –
Dusk on the Moon • novelette by Hannes Bok
The Hands • short story by Venard McLaughlin
Planet Alone • short story by Walter Kubilius
When You Think That . . . Smile! • short story by Dorothy Les Tina
Too Perfect • short story by Wilbur S. Peacock –
. . . Does Not Imply . . . • short story by Robert A. W. Lowndes [as by Wilfred Owen Morley]
Full Circle • short story by John B. Michel [as by Hugh Raymond] –
Patriotism Plus • short story by Ray Cummings –
The Swift People • short story by Basil Wells –

Non-fiction:
Cover • by Milton Luros
Interior artwork • by Damon Knight (x4), Hannes Bok, Matt Fox (x2), Dorothy Les Tina, John R. Forte, Jr.
Station X • letters

_____________________

It probably isn’t a good idea to start a review by cautioning prospective readers not to read it but this issue is so poor that it is tempting to do just that. It doesn’t help that I find it difficult to write a good review of a decent story, never mind one of a series of unremittingly bad examples. So, if you want the short version of this, I’d confine myself to the comments on the Les Tina, Michel, and Bok stories, and the non-fiction.

The Second Satellite by Donald A. Wollheim gets off to an unnecessarily slow beginning with details about a prize left in a wealthy man’s estate for the first person to complete an interplanetary journey. Various organisations decline to build a ship (even though travel to the Moon satisfies the conditions) as they calculate that the cost of the mission will equal or exceed the prize—as if the only reason you would do this is for the money.
The story proper starts with Sanders Mikkelsen, a garage owner cum amateur astronomer, going to a businessman for money. Mikkelsen explains that an unknown comet is approaching Earth and will come closer than the moon, so a smaller ship will suffice and less money be required. After looking at the plans the business man agrees to fund the trip.
Three months later, Sander goes to the new spaceship:

Sanders Mikkelsen packed his bag, left his garage in charge of an assistant and took a train. This time he did not get off until he reached a certain town in North Dakota. There he got in a car and was driven through rolling farm lands to a fairly deserted section. There an old farmhouse and a huge new barn stood. Mikkelsen got out and shook hands with Currey and several assistants.
Behind the barn rose a long runway like the start of a carnival roller-coaster. Running along the ground a bit, then rising sharply into the air, it ended abruptly pointing straight into the sky. Being rolled onto the tracks at the level was a long gleaming metal shell.
The rocket-craft was like an airplane with short stubby wings, or like a long racing automobile, or like a small submarine out of water. It resembled all three and yet was none of them. It had four wheels on which it rested. It had short wide wings. It had a glassed-in forward section and a flanged wide multi-barreled rear. Mikkelsen inspected it and signified his approval. His watch was checked against a chrone-meter set up in the barn.
An hour later Mikkelsen, togged in flying costume, heavily furred, with an oxygen hood completely covering his head, climbed into the cabin of the thing, closed and sealed the airtight door, buckled himself into the deep, heavily cushioned seat before the controls in the front of the ship. He glanced ahead along the runway, glanced at his dials and at the clock among them.
Then he threw a switch and opened his throttle. There was a roar from behind. Outside observers saw at first a puff of smoke from the tubes behind, then a cataract of blue-green flame roared forth. The rocket leaped forward, shot up the runway and flamed away into the sky with a suddenness and a roar that stunned and amazed everyone.  p. 14

This ‘kick the tyres and light the fires’ approach to spaceflight (there is no mention of training of any sort) does not bode well for the rest of the story, and the section describing the journey to the meteor is (predictably) full of scientific errors.2
After he arrives there, and is exploring the meteor’s surface, Mikkelson sees what he thinks is ice and walks towards that area. When he gets there he realises that the white colouration is actually frozen gas that has come from an open metal door in the cliff face. He then enters a chamber that contains unknown apparatus, and metal plaques with marks that may be an alien language, etc., but before he can explore further he hears a whistling sound and realises the meteor has started entering the Earth’s atmosphere. He quickly returns to his damaged ship.
Later, when the meteor starts breaking up, Mikkelson parachutes from the ship and lands in China. When he eventually finds someone who speaks English, he learns that the war is over—large parts of the meteor landed on Japan, causing catastrophic damage and wiping out three-quarters of that country’s population.
As you can probably guess from the synopsis, this is a terrible story, and possibly the worst thing I have read in months.

Dusk on the Moon by Hannes Bok takes place on a fantasy version of the Moon:

Protected from the wind, sheltered from the sun, a clump of lunar plants were blossoming in a shadowed corner. They were more like earthly cactus than anything else: bulbous grey-green stems equipped with wickedly talon-like thorns, the flowers starshaped and brilliantly red. Unmindful of the thorns a little spiderbeing was standing on the tips of all four feet, his pair of short arms with their delicately long digits—two fingers and a thumb—tugging at a bloom’s spice-laden stamens. Tearing some of them free, he relaxed balancing on two pairs of crossed legs, and crammed the stamens into his short elephant’s-trunk of a mouth, his protruding eyes rolling in ecstasy. Satisfied, he scrubbed his fingers meticulously clean with a little sand, then arose and brushed off the bright-green metallic globe of his torso. He scurried out of the enclosure into the sunlight, paused irresolutely a moment and then made his way to a gigantic squared block of stone—the pedestal of a prodigious statue.

A lifeboat from a spaceship lands nearby containing a couple called Bob and Loretta, who are fleeing a man called Caldwell. Bob notices the statue, and then the spider disappearing down a tunnel. The couple decide to follow it. Meanwhile, another spaceship lands with four of Cadwell’s men, who follow the pair into the sub-lunar depths.
The rest of the novelette mostly details the underground fight between the couple and the four men. Bob uses his entropy gun to kill two of them; the spiders, who become the couple’s allies, dispatch another.
The last of the four is eaten by a giant octopus creature in a huge cavern, the couple later discovering that this creature is under the control of Yssa, a humanoid woman in suspended animation. After they revive her they are vouchsafed a vision which explains that she is the last of a lunar race destroyed in an apocalyptic meteor storm on the moon.
Yssa proves a malevolent host: first she kills one of the spiders, and then takes the couple to the octopus with the intention of feeding Loretta to it. Bob uses his entropy ray to kill the creature, and Yssa then hypnotises the pair. She takes them to the surface, where she also subjects Caldwell and the rest of his men to her will. The couple, momentarily released from her power, make a break for their ship, but Yssa catches them whereupon they see another vision, this time of the three of them ruling New York, with their statues everywhere, etc. Shizek the spider stings Yssa while she is distracted, and the couple escape once again.
As you can tell from the synopsis this is a very pulp story, with writing and characterisation to match. That said, there is evidence of Bok’s exotic and colourful style, and I wondered if this was an early or trunk story (it doesn’t stand up to his recent novel in Unknown, but I haven’t read enough of his other shorter work to make a comparison).

The Hands by Venard McLaughlin3 is a strange fantasy that begins with a man woken up by his brother Kaven to be told that his mother is dead. We then learn that Kaven strangled her, as he did his father, and that the two brothers are the last people alive on Earth, or rather that the narrator is the “Last Beast” left on Earth, and that Karen is the first “Total Man”. The rest of the story details a mythical, perhaps allegorical, conflict between the “Beast” and the “Total Man” (with the Legion of the Banished on the narrator’s side, and the god Ahriman on Kaven’s).
This all gets a bit trippy at points, such as when Kaven’s wrists sprout wings, and his hands fly off—apparently they go to build a city—leaving the rest of his comatose body behind. Later, the narrator visits this city:

I leaped forward, then, and swam through space as the son of Ahriman had taught my father until I came to the turrets of the night-world of Kaven my brother. It was a high, unbelievable world of dark blue and its spires reached far beyond the Golden Cycle where the banished Legion lived and its streets were broad as life and paved with diamonds from the deepest mines and the power of this world was barely a whisper of turbines buried in the living rock, and it was a perfect world for no life was their but the hands of my brother.
Silent, invisible hands, building and building, rock upon rock, metal upon metal, higher and higher. I sat in the great central garden of this world and gazed in awe. Nothing like it had ever before been dreamed. Minarets and spires, lakes and castles, endless arches of marble and gold, flashing surface craft and silent air cars, spears of rainbow light and soft hidden music—all controlled by vast intricate mechanism subject to the lightest touch of the hands of my brother.  p. 45

This is a peculiar piece that compresses perhaps too much into too few pages.

Planet Alone by Walter Kubilius has a promising setup that has the sole remaining Earth spaceship from an earlier war with Venus running guns to that latter planet’s natives—much to the anger of the Earthmen who have colonised the planet.
When the Earth ship’s smuggling is discovered (a dropped container splits open, revealing armaments) fighting starts. The Chairman of the colonists is then told (spoiler) about dynamite charges set up around the field where the ship is berthed—a remnant of previous war defences—and they use the threat of this to try to make the Earth ship to surrender. It doesn’t, and is blown up.
After a competent start there is little development and a contrived ending.

When You Think That . . . Smile! by Dorothy Les Tina begins with a husband suddenly realising he can read his wife’s thoughts. When he later goes out he realises that he can read other people’s minds as well. By the time he returns home, having learnt more than he perhaps wants to about humanity, his wife, unhappy at his new abilities, has left him.
The final scene has him going out for some pipe tobacco. In the shop he learns that the proprietor mistakenly gave him a blend he shouldn’t have. . . .
This is a slight story but its domestic small-scale setting is a welcome change of pace, and it is perhaps notable for the mundane use of telepathic power—there are no megalomaniac scientists here, the entire story plays out in the everyday world. It may be stretching a point, but you could probably draw a very long and thin line between this and Robert Silverberg’s Dying Inside. I’d be interested to know if there are other stories of the period that treat telepathy in a similar way.

Too Perfect by Wilbur S. Peacock starts with Paddy trying to get drunk in his basement when a voice tells him to stop making so much noise. One of the “little people” eventually materialises, and Paddy recalls the folk tales told by his grandfather. He claims his boon:

“I want the power to finish anything I start, and the further power to do it absolutely perfect,” he declared.  p. 63

The little man agrees but limits the boon to a day’s duration. The end of the story (spoiler) has Paddy saving a fellow tenant from suicide and later describing what the man was doing (with gun in hand) to the investigating policeman. Of course, he does this perfectly. . . .
In between the two scenes above there is a lot of flannel: the perfect drunk, perfect night’s sleep, hangover, hangover cure, investment, meal, etc.
Almost as bad as the Wollheim.

. . . Does Not Imply . . . by Robert A. W. Lowndes starts with a magazine editor talking to a slushpile reader called Harold about a story that has been submitted. Harold likes the piece and notes that, while it doesn’t have any story, the editor may want to look at it anyway. After reading the piece the editor then starts having dreams about the presumptive woman writer.
Later he finds out that Harold is also having these dreams, except the latter’s have changed to those where he a monster chases him. This trundles along for a bit longer (we find the editor’s secretary is having dreams about a male author) before it comes to an end where (spoiler) the editor and secretary are prematurely aged, for no particular reason other than, presumably, that Lowndes needed a creepy end to his story (Harold has moved away by this point, so we don’t know what happens to him).
This reads quite well to start with, and it is a pity it goes nowhere.

Full Circle by John B. Michel starts after a bloody, world-wide revolution that has resulted in hundreds of millions of executions—something we learn from an elderly World President who gives a speech before an assembled crowd:

He rubbed his gnarled and toil-worn hands together and smiled a very smug and unctuous smile. “It took us a long time but we did it. The smaller rats we’ve already disposed of, mainly by the firing squad. You don’t blame us, I hope. There were some hundred million or so, but they were garbage and they had to go. Civilization demanded it! What did you expect us to do with them, you buzzards? Feed ’em ice cream and tell ’em they were naughty boys, but we’d forgiven ’em? No!” The old man, trembling with rage, smacked his hand down on the lectern board. “You forced us into war against each other until the planet ran red with our blood, you tortured us until the skies rang with our agonies. You separated child from mother and wife from husband. The human decencies you trampled on and replaced with a law of your own out of the Dark Ages. Why? Was it necessary to drown the planet in ashes so that Mr. Johnson could be taxed for a large Navy instead of Herr Johansohn? You didn’t like peace. You wanted war, war, WAR! Always killing and murder. None of you were happy unless our bones stuck out of our skins.  p. 85

He finishes by telling twenty ultra-rich capitalists assembled in front of him that they are going to be useful for once, and are going into space on an elderly spaceship called The Finger of God for the benefit of science. The group get on the ship and it sets off. When the occupants regain consciousness after the launch, they take stock of their brutal predicament:

Slowly the two men awakened the rest of the crew and tabulated injuries. Mrs. Skeffington, they knew, was dying. Her husband was dead, his whole body crushed into a pulp from the force of the ascent. Curtis had suffered a fractured right humerus which somehow hung together. Spyrus, though badly shaken up, was unhurt. The other dead numbered three, Adele Taylor, daughter of the great British munitions magnate; Samuel Marx, influential newspaper publisher, and old Margaret Moresby, owner of immense sections of Australia and holder of innumerable patents bought up and suppressed before and during the last war. None of the others were badly injured, though both John Barstow and his wife had had their lungs partially torn and breathed with horrible gasping noises.  p. 87

Eventually, and after experiencing more hardship, they work out how to control the ship and make their way to Mercury. On approach they are going too fast to land safely but that doesn’t matter as (spoiler) a giant hand plucks them out of space and puts them down on the surface. We find there are two telepathic giants already on Mercury, exiles from Jupiter, where a similar revolution to Earth’s failed.
The spacesuited survivors leave the ship and, when one of the giants picks the group up, they open fire with their submachine guns (this is the scene on the cover of this issue). The giant promptly crushes them and their spaceship to a bloody pulp, saying “Justice” while he does so.
There is perhaps a fleeting point made in the story about the intersection between capitalism and war, but this would seem to be largely a psychopathic revenge/hate fantasy written by a rabid anti-capitalist.4 As a story it’s pretty bad, but it is perhaps noteworthy for its grimness and political viewpoint, and, who knows, perhaps for giving fellow Futurian Cyril Kornbluth the idea of firing the so-called “Marching Morons” into space in his equally misanthropic story.

Patriotism Plus by Ray Cummings gives you an instant feel for the incontinent chatter that is coming with its opening paragraphs:

On account of what happened to Georgie Peters and me. I’m supposed to be a hero now. The U. S. Army, or the War Department or something, is going to decorate me with a lot of medals, or a citation, or whatever you call it. That’s all right with me if they insist. But maybe it’s my conscience that makes me write this. They may read it, but they won’t believe it, of course. I wouldn’t blame them, but, honestly folks, here’s the real dope on what happened.
It began a hot afternoon last summer when I ran into Georgie Peters on Broadway. I hadn’t seen him in several months. I’m a fight manager— Spike Henessey. That is, I used to be; what with the war taking all my likely boys, my business was more theory than anything else. George Peters wasn’t in my racket at all. He was a thin, delicate little fellow, with pale blond hair and pale blue eyes—one of those mouselike, meek chaps who you never would notice at all, but after you got to know him he was mighty likable. I understand he worked in a department store, bookkeeper or something. But, queerly enough, Georgie was a rabid fight fan, which is how I happened to meet him in the first place.  p. 91-92

I would suggest the “or somethings” is only one example of the egregious padding to be found in the above.
Anyway, fight promoter Spike has a friend called Georgie who can summon objects that he can imagine into reality, and who first demonstrates this by conjuring a pack of cigarettes into existence. This gimmick is developed a little after one of the promoter’s more knowledgeable friends, Red, gets involved (Georgie can vanish the things he brings into existence; the better an idea he has of something, the better the quality of object produced; etc.) . They eventually decide to contact the War department and put Georgie’s gift at the nation’s service.
The story ends when Georgie is told to summon hundreds of soldiers and associated equipment by a government agent at an isolated beach location—the twist is that the agent is really the head of a Nazi spy ring (the copy of Mein Kampf that the narrator discovers is part of the giveaway). Georgie then imagines two hundred G-men into existence.
This is not only padded but very tired work.

The Swift People by Basil Wells may be a Burroughs pastiche (or what I imagine a Burroughs pastiche is):

“I have slept long,” cried Joln Dar,” springing up from his worn blanket of thulkskin. “The wild gelts will have moved from their feeding grounds by now.”
Quickly he flung the doubled blanket upon his nervous green-hided gelt and clinched it in place with two broad straps of purplish hide from the back of a wild thulk. Without a lost motion he flung his lean gray body into the improvised saddle and swung away at a swift gallop down a steep trail that wound ever downward among the weird lifeless maze of barren rocks and sand toward a dry river-bed.  p. 100-101

There then follows a lot of fighting and romantic intrigue. Joln wants the gelts so he can go home and get Yrmo, the bride of his choice (no doubt so desired because of the paucity of vowels in her name). First though, he has to fight one of his tribe who has the same idea (they eventually beat seven shades out of each other before agreeing a truce and agreeing to split the herd). Then they are both taken captive by a wild tribe, and have to fight their way free. During his captivity Joln meets another woman called Aryk.
As if all this random and entirely uninteresting fighting isn’t bad enough, the story takes place in modern-day Earth, but Joln’s people (who crash-landed in 1942) live at a massively speeded up rate compared with humans (forty-five of their generations, or nine hundred years of their time, pass in a single Earth day). This gimmick has little or nothing to do with the so-called story, and sits in the background like some random piece of SFnal furniture.
It would have been a better story if he had dealt with the time acceleration idea and dumped all the fighting.

The striking Cover by Milton Luros (according to the title page credits) is supposedly for The Second Satellite by Martin Pearson (Wollheim) but that story only has one or two characters and no giants. It is actually for John B. Michel’s story Full Circle, and illustrates its climactic scene. Perhaps, he said charitably, they were trying to avoid a spoiler cover.
Damon Knight’s Interior artwork in this issue shows the obvious influence of Bok and Dolgov, and is not a bad emulation of those artists’ style. Hannes Bok and John R. Forte Jr. also contribute good work but Matt Fox and Dorothy Les Tina’s work looks a bit amateurish.

Station X is a letter column that starts off with the ratings for the October issue, before Lowndes offers highlights from a number of letters on various subjects: Bok’s cover for the October issue5 draws a lot of praise, and there are comments about the new layout, and poor printing, etc.
After “generalities have been dispensed with”, Lowndes prints a long solicited letter from Norman L. Knight. I skimmed most of this (it would make more sense to read it after having looked at the issue in question) but Lowndes gives this reply to an adverse comment from Knight about cover background colours “being chosen for the artists” (he criticises the yellow background for Bok’s “Beauty” cover):

This is the sort of thing which used to plague us sadly back when our only connection with stf magazines was through letters to the editor, readers’ departments, etc. We could do lots better on covers, we would remark, were we editor. However, came the break, and we learned of the abyss of ignorance in which we had been living—in regards to cover designs on popular magazines, for one thing. First and foremost, they have to be display posters, things to attract attention, out of all the other titles on the stands, also presumably doing the same thing. They have to attract attention and hold it long enough to make the looker want to pick up a copy of the magazine. Thus, says our art department, the colors must be bright; the backgrounds must be bright, flat color; any human figures on cover should be large and attractive, and the cover positively must tell a story in itself—or a substantial part of a story. We’ve managed to get some things [. . .] which didn’t exactly fit, and, quite frankly, we’ve regretted it; they just didn’t look so hot after being engraved with a three-color process such as we use. And one thing we try to avoid is using the same background color for two issues in a row. Red, yellow, and blue are best—in that order. Which is the why[,] in the case of the cover for your [story, blue] would have been best for the sake of the yarn itself, but red is a better color. We’d experimented a bit on the last one, and wanted this one to be on the safe side.  p. 75

In conclusion, there is some passable artwork in this issue, but the fiction is very weak—perhaps even worse than in a recent issue of Super Science Stories I read. I note in passing the poor proofreading, all which occurs after p. 50 (I clocked at least two repeated lines and half a dozen typos, and I wasn’t even reading that attentively). ●

_____________________

1. “Doc” Lowndes took over the editorship of Future, and a companion magazine Science Fiction (both published by Columbia Publications), in April 1941. This was the first of three issues that would appear in 1943 before wartime paper shortages killed the magazine (the next two issues were, confusingly, titled Science Fiction Stories). Future was later resurrected in 1950.
The magazine has a complicated publication history that is comprehensively described in its Science Fiction Encyclopaedia entry.

2. “Mikkelsen cut the throttle and stopped accelerating. The roar of the rocket died down until only a steady hissing and flare swept from behind, just enough to keep the speed constant.” p. 15
(In space an object will continue at a constant velocity as there is no, or exceptionally little, friction to slow it down—so no thrust is required to keep the “speed” constant. Newton’s First Law.)
“Inside the cabin the temperature was still warm. The friction of the extremely thin air outside was still quite sufficient to keep up heat at that speed. Inside his furs Mikkelsen perspired profusely.” p. 15
(Wollheim seems to think the atmosphere extends further out from the Earth than it does.)
“Mikkelsen cut the engines and the plane dropped.” p. 16
(The meteor would have to be massive to exert this immediate and substantial gravitational effect. If it was this big its later impact on Earth would be an extinction event.)
“He had often descended in elevators in Chicago and New York skyscrapers. Descent in an elevator is also a lessening of gravity.” p. 16
(The force of gravity is—substantially—unchanged throughout an elevator trip. However, if you were to stand on a set of weighing scales throughout the descent you would notice that your “weight”—actually the measure of the force exerted by the scales on the person standing on them (Newton’s Third Law)—would temporarily decrease as you are initially accelerated to your downward velocity, return to normal for the middle part of the journey when you are travelling at a constant velocity, and then increase as you are decelerated to having zero downward velocity again.)

3. ISFDB lists only two stories for Venard McLaughlin. The other one, The Silence (Stirring Science Stories, June 1941), was reprinted by Damon Knight in his anthology The Golden Road (Simon & Schuster, 1974).

4. John B. Michel was a member of the Communist Party during the 1930s and 1940s (he eventually got kicked out for poor attendance), and tried to introduce politics into SF in the form of “Michelism”. Fancyclopedia 3 explains what this idea involved:

Michelism held that “science-fiction should by nature stand for all forces working for a more unified world, a more Utopian existence, the application of science to human happiness, and a saner outlook on life.” In short, Michelism saw science fiction as a form of civic engagement and social criticism, and not merely a means of entertainment. In it, he petitioned fandom to work toward a unified world utopia state. Many fans took this as a synonym for communism, while many others opposed the interjection of politics into fandom.

5. Hannes Bok’s cover for the October issue:

rssrss

Astounding Science-Fiction v31n04, June 1943

ISFDB link
Archive.org link

_____________________

Editor, John W. Campbell Jr.; Assistant Editor, Catherine Tarrant

Fiction:
The World Is Mine • novelette by Henry Kuttner [as by Lewis Padgett] ∗∗∗
Pelagic Spark • short story by Anthony Boucher
Competition • novelette by E. Mayne Hull
Whom the Gods Love • short story by Lester del Rey
Calling the Empress • novelette by George O. Smith
Sanctuary • short story by Anthony Boucher [as by H. H. Holmes]
Gather, Darkness! (Part 2 of 3) • serial by Fritz Leiber +

Non-fiction:
Cover • by William Timmins
Interior artwork • by A. Williams (x8), William Kolliker (x2), Paul Orban (x2), Elton Fax (x2), Frank Kramer (x3)
Long Arm of Solar Law • editorial by John W. Campbell, Jr.
The Analytical Laboratory: March 1943 & April 1943
Sea of Mystery • science essay by Willy Ley
Brass Tacks • letters

_____________________

The World Is Mine by Henry Kuttner is the second of his ‘Gallegher’ stories, and starts with what appears to be three talking rabbits waking the hungover scientist from his sleep. He finds he isn’t imagining them (his visiting grandfather tells him they arrived via a time machine Gallegher built last night while drunk) and soon learns that they are not rabbits but Lybblas. The subsequent exchanges have an enchanting, almost Alice-in-Wonderland feel:1

“You’re not—human? I mean—we’re not going to evolve into you?”
“No,” said the fattest Lybbla complacently, “it would take thousands of years for you to evolve into the dominant species. We’re from Mars.”
“Mars—the future. Oh. You—talk English.”
“There are Earth people on Mars in our day. Why not? We read English, talk the lingo, know everything.”
Gallegher muttered under his breath. “And you’re the dominant species on Mars?”
“Well, not exactly,” a Lybbla hesitated. “Not all Mars.”
“Not even half of Mars,” said another.
“Just Koordy Valley,” the third announced. “But Koordy Valley is the center of the Universe. Very highly civilized. We have books. About Earth and so on. We’re going to conquer Earth, by the way.”
“Are you?” Gallegher said blankly.
“Yes. We couldn’t in our own time, you know, because Earth people wouldn’t let us, but now it’ll be easy. You’ll all be our slaves,” the Lybbla said happily. He was about eleven inches tall.
“You got any weapons?” Grandpa asked.
“We don’t need ’em. We’re clever. We know everything. Our memories are capacious as anything. We can build disintegrator guns, heat rays, spaceships—”
“No, we can’t,” another Lybbla countered. “We haven’t any fingers.” That was true. They had furry mittens, fairly useless, Gallegher thought.
“Well,” said the first Lybbla, “we’ll get Earth people to build us some weapons.”
Grandpa downed a shot of whiskey and shuddered. “Do these things happen all the time around here?” he wanted to know. “I’d heard you were a big-shot scientist, but I figured scientists made atom-smashers and stuff like that. What good’s a time machine?”
“It brought us,” a Lybbla said. “Oh, happy day for Earth.”
“That,” Gallegher told him, “is a matter of opinion. Before you get around to sending an ultimatum to Washington, would you care for a spot of refreshment? A saucer of milk or something?”
“We’re not animals!“ the fattest Lybbla said. “We drink out of cups, we do.”
Gallegher brought three cups, heated some milk, and poured. After a brief hesitation, he put the cups on the floor. The tables were all far too high for the small creatures. The Lybblas, piping, “Thank you,” politely, seized the cups between their hind feet and began to lap up the milk with long pink tongues.
“Good,” one said.
“Don’t talk with your mouth full,” cautioned the fattest Lybbla, who seemed to be the leader.  p. 10-11

Gallegher continues to interrogate the Lybblas, and learns about their world and their advanced technology, and how they are familiar with the technical aspects of their society:

“We read everything. Technical books on science as well as novels. How disintegrators are made and so on. We’ll tell you how to make weapons for us.”
“Thanks. That sort of literature is open to the public?”
“Sure. Why not?”
“I should think it would be dangerous.”
“So should I,” the fat Lybbla said thoughtfully, “but it isn’t, somehow.”
Gallegher pondered. “Could you tell me how to make a heat ray, for example?”
“Yes,” was the excited reply, “and then we’d destroy the big cities and capture—”
“I know. Pretty girls and hold them for ransom. Why?”
“We know what’s what,” a Lybbla said shrewdly. “We read books, we do.” He spilled his cup, looked at the puddle of milk, and let his ears droop disconsolately.
The other two Lybblas hastily patted him on the back. “Don’t cry,” the biggest one urged.
“I gotta,” the Lybbla said. “It’s in the books.”
“You have it backward. You don’t cry over spilt milk.”
“Do. Will,” said the recalcitrant Lybbla, and began to weep.
Gallegher brought him more milk. “About this heat ray,” he said. “Just how—”
“Simple,” the fat Lybbla said, and explained.  p. 12-13

Gallegher promptly builds the device which, when tested, burns a hole in the door. The rabbits note that it can also be used to kill people, like what happened to the corpse in the back garden. Gallegher inwardly digests this information, and then he and the Lybblas go outside and look at the corpse of an elderly bearded man with a heat ray hole in his chest. The police turn up at almost the same time (the neighbours in the surrounding high-rises have noticed the body), and arrest Gallegher. Before this, his attempt to toss the heat ray gun into the bushes is seen by a corrupt cop called Cantrell, who pockets the device, and uses it to blackmail Gallegher into keeping silent about the invention.
Most of the rest of the story details Gallegher’s legal troubles. We eventually find that the body is an older version of Gallegher himself—or rather the bodies are older versions of Gallegher’s, as every time there is a key event in the story one body disappears and a different one appears in the garden (there is a multiple time-lines explanation).
After the first body vanishes, the police release Gallegher but, when a second body turns up, he has to get a lawyer. To get the money to pay for him, Gallegher builds another invention, a device that can transfer knowledge or skills from one person to another.

Cantrell the cop finds out about this invention and, to further his megalomaniacal plans, demands that Gallegher use the device to transfer multiple abilities to him. This last section provides the story’s amusing but logically inconsistent dénouement (and one which conflates skills or knowledge with compulsion—as part of the transfer (spoiler) Cantrell unwittingly learns the skills of a high-dive circus act and subsequently jumps out of a plane to his death).
This story has an excellent start with its back and forth between Gallegher and the Lybblas, but it turns into a more routine albeit inventive story for its remainder. It is a pity about the weak ending but the talking bunnies are a delight (they pop up throughout to demand milk and cookies, and to proclaim “The World is Ours”). Enjoyable but flawed.
Pelagic Spark by Anthony Boucher starts with a clever if contrived scene where fellow SF writer L. Sprague de Camp is talking to his wife Catherine about Nostradamus’s prophecies, and also about McCann (Campbell’s alter-ego) and Boucher’s opinions on that subject. He then writes his own nonsense prophecy to finish off one of his articles:

“Every man his own Nostradamus, that’s my motto,” he went on. “I am, personally, every bit as much a prophet as Mike ever was. And I’m going to prove it. I’ve just thought of the perfect tag for my debunking article.” His wife looked expectant.
“I’m going to close with an original de Camp prophecy, which will make just as much sense as any of Mike’s, with a damned sight better meter and grammar. Listen:
.
“Pelagic young spark of the East
Shall plot to subvert the Blue Beast,
But he’ll dangle on high
When the Ram’s in the sky,
And the Cat shall throw dice at the feast!”  p. 32

He adds, sarcastically, that several hundred years in the future it will no doubt be claimed that it has come true.
The story then skips forward in time to an army sergeant in the jungle tearing the article out of a magazine. When he is later captured Japanese soldiers question him about the prophecy, and it eventually ends up with Hirohito’s astrologer. Next stop for the prophecy is a victorious Hitler in 1951 (who has by this time crushed Japan), before we end up at the main part of the story which takes place in 2045. A plot to assassinate the Hitler XVI during a visit to Java then plays out, and satisfies the predictions.

Although most of the prophecy can ultimately be mapped against various events, the last line has such a convoluted explanation that this can’t be easily done. The conclusion by the story’s narrator, therefore, is that his great-grandfather de Camp must have been a prophet!
This is a clever if somewhat contrived piece, and amusingly in-jokey too.
Competition by E. Mayne Hull is the second of her ‘Artur Blord’ series. In this one a wealthy and powerful businessman blackmails a kidnapped secretary and plants her into Blord’s organisation. She is to help organise Blord’s kidnap, or will die from a seven-day poison whose only antidote belongs to her abductor.
These events all takes place on the planet of Delfi II, in the Ridge Stars system. One other exotic element hinted at early in the story is an alien being that lives on Delfi I:

The dark Castle of Pleasure stood on the Mountain of Eternal Night on the dead moon that was the companion planet of Delfi II. Remnant of a forgotten civilization, its scores of towers pierced the heavens like gigantic swords. No man had ever delved into all its labyrinthian depths, for men entered that antique place only by permission of the one living relict of its long-dead builders, by the permission of the Skal thing.  p. 55

Most of the story concerns the shenanigans involving the planted secretary and Blord’s kidnap (Blord is entirely aware of the intrigue and plotting, and the reason for it—which is a competitive tender for a space drive that his company looks like winning). In the final section he decides he will allow himself to be kidnapped after getting his doctor to do some mental preconditioning that will help him withstand any hostile questioning.

After Blord is drugged by his secretary he is taken to the Castle of Pleasure. There he is briefly mind-probed by the alien Skal but finds, during a discussion with the beast, that he cannot buy its loyalty. He then deals with the men who have abducted him and ultimately agrees to joint ownership of his drive—providing they give him all their inferior spaceship drive patents and designs in return. Needless to say (spoiler) his drive, which doesn’t actually exist, is then developed from all of theirs.
This is the second story in which Blord has shown himself to be too clever by half, and it all feels somewhat contrived. That said, I thought it okay story: it was only a day or two later that I realised that the Ridge Stars, alien planets, the Skal, and all the rest of it is only van Vogtian stage-dressing for a rather slight tale.
Whom the Gods Love by Lester del Rey reads like a mainstream story but starts off with a tantalising hook:

At first glance the plane appeared normal enough, though there was no reason for its presence on the little rocky beach of the islet. But a second inspection would have shown the wreckage that had been an undercarriage and the rows of holes that crisscrossed its sides. Forward, the engine seemed unharmed, but the propeller had shredded itself against a rock in landing, and one wing flopped slowly up and down in the brisk breeze that was blowing, threatening to break completely away with each movement. Except for the creak and groan of the wing, the island was as silent as the dead man inside the plane.
Then the sun crept up a little higher over the horizon, throwing back the shadows that had concealed the figure of a second man who lay sprawled out limply on the sand, still in the position his body had taken when he made the last-second leap. In a few places, ripped sections of his uniform showed the mark of passing bullets, and blood had spilled out of a half-inch crease in his shoulder. But somehow he had escaped all serious injuries except one; centered in his forehead, a small neat hole showed, its edges a mottle of blue and reddish brown, with a trickle of dried blood spilling down over his nose and winding itself into a half mustache over his lip. There was no mark to show that bullet had gone on through the back of his head.
Now, as some warmth crept down to the islet from the rising sun, the seemingly dead figure stirred and groaned softly, one hand groping up toward the hole in his forehead. Uncertainly, he thrust a finger into the hole, then withdrew it at the flood of pain that followed the motion. For minutes he lay there, feeling the ebb and flow of the great forces that were all around him, sensing their ceaseless beat with the shadow of curiosity.  p. 61

These “great forces” that have brought the man to life also give him other powers: later, he partially repairs the skin damage to the plane, removes the engine, and alters the undamaged wing so it too can flap. He then gets into the aircraft and flies away. A striking image.
The rest of story is, on one level, a routine war adventure, but one that involves a powerful alien entity. When he engages a group of enemy aircraft after being attacked (he is, at the time of the attack, floating inside the stationary aircraft asleep), he finds he is out of ammunition, so summons blue light to gather at the tips of his guns. These beads of energy then fly off, acting like particularly destructive bullets. He then finds a Japanese fleet and wreaks havoc with much larger droplets of the blue light.

When he finally comes upon an Allied air base memories and pain overwhelm him—he still has the bullet in his brain, so repairs the cleft it has made and forces the slug out of his head. At this point he becomes his old self again, and bales out of the (by now useless) aircraft.
This isn’t an entirely successful piece—the story pretty much just stops at the end—but it is an interesting one for its mature, mainstream voice and lack of dated dialogue and SF hardware. It is also quite unlike the other stories in the magazine. Taken together with his début piece, it makes me think that if del Rey had wanted to he could have become a crossover writer like John Wyndham or John Christopher.
Calling the Empress by George O. Smith is the second in the ‘Venus Equilateral’ series about the space station/communications centre. In this one Channing, the director of the station, gets an urgent request to try to contact a spaceship that has just launched from Mars to Venus but will be quarantined if it arrives there, which will ruin its perishable cargo. Contacting a spaceship in transit has never been attempted before, and the story tells of their efforts to point the station’s communication beams at it while it is millions of miles away, even though it isn’t equipped to pick up the signals!

They chip away at the problem, which involves building a machine to swing their beam to match the path of the spaceship, etc. Eventually, (spoiler) they send Morse code on the ship’s meteor detection wavelength, causing some very odd changes to its flight path. When the spaceship crew realise it is a signal they find that the only person on board who can understand Morse is one of the passengers, a thirteen year old boy!

This is a very dryly written and sometimes rather dull piece, an archetypal Science Discussions story (i.e. one with rivets). It has too many passages like this:

Jim, the beam-control man, sat down and lighted a cigarette. Freddy let his flitter coast free. And the generators that fed the powerful transmitter came whining to a stop. But there was no sleep for Don and Walt. They kept awake to supervise the work, and to help in hooking up the phase-splitting circuit that would throw out-of-phase radio frequency into the director-elements to swing the beam.
Then once again the circuits were set up. Freddy found the position again and began to hold it. The concentric beam hurled out again, and as the phaseshift passed from element to element, the beam swept through an infinitesimal arc that covered thousands of miles of space by the time the beam reached the position occupied by the Empress of Kolain.
Like a painter, the beam painted in a swipe a few hundred miles wide and swept back and forth, each sweep progressing ahead of the stripe before by less than its width. It reached the end of its arbitrary wall and swept back to the beginning again, covering space as before. Here was no slow, irregular swing of mechanical reflector, this was the electronically controlled wavering of a stable antenna.  p. 81

I found this a bit of a struggle to get through, but if you can persist it’s an okay story I guess.
Sanctuary by Anthony Boucher has an American man in Paris at the start of WWII deciding to make his way out of the country. On his way an undersecretary in the Foreign department asks him to talk to a Dr Palgrave about his time theories.
At the doctor’s villa, surprisingly, he finds himself not only having dinner with Palgrave but with the head of the local Gestapo.

During their meal, the three talk about various things, including a story about a black-faced ghost who appeared at the house in 1937 and stayed for six weeks. The colonel leaves, and the narrator speaks to Palgrave about his time theory work—until, that is, he gets annoyed by Palgrave’s lack of patriotism. The scientist is not interested “in the affairs of men.”
When the pair retire to have coffee they are interrupted by German soldiers looking for an British commando from a group that have landed nearby. Then, after the soldiers have left, they are then interrupted by the commando himself. When the Germans come back Palgrave hides the commando by sending back in time.
There is another wrinkle or two to the story but this is an unlikely and contrived piece (spoiler: the commando is the black-faced ghost but, after six weeks in the past he returns looking completely different, so they tell the Germans he is another American guest).
Boucher’s other story in this issue also mentions the war: did people really want to read about this stuff in their fiction magazines as well as hearing about it everywhere else?
Gather, Darkness! by Fritz Leiber continues the its tale of a future Earth ruled by a fake religion set up by scientists many years before. It starts with Goniface, the leader of the ruling Hierarchy Council, revealing some of his back story in a dream (he is the child of a priest and a fallen sister, and entered the priesthood illegitimately, attempting to kill his half-sister, Sharlson Naurya to keep his secret). When he wakes he thinks he sees a familiar, and later notices a spot of blood on his sheets.

The Black Man meantime tails Brother Jarles, watching him from the roofs as the latter walks towards a rendezvous point: Jarles has decided to join the Witchcraft (who oppose to the ruling Hierarchy). Both are caught, the Black Man ambushed by an “Angel”, a drone like vehicle that is piloted by a priest. Jarles later goes to Brother Dhomas for brain-washing.
While Dhomas works on Jarles, the Black Man is telepathically contacted by his familiar Dickon, who has been searching the Hierarchy building for him. The familiar is almost exhausted, and needs to feed. The Black Man tells it what to do to scare away the two superstitious priests guarding him. After doing so, Dickon joins him:

The Black Man heard Dickon pattering toward the bed. Over the edge appeared a red-furred paw, whose suctorial palm was edged by five sharpclawed fingers. Slowly and laboriously now, for the familiar had suddenly come to the end of its strength—the Black Man could sense dazed exhaustion in the quality of the vague telepathic impulses—the little creature pulled itself up into view.
Like a spider monkey it was, but with a much smaller torso and even skinnier. Downy, reddish fur covered what seemed the merest outline or sketch of an animal—a tracery of pipestem bones and ribbonlike muscles. The incarnation of fragile nimbleness, though at the moment sluggish with exhaustion. The head was more like a lemur’s with large, peering eyes, now filmed and groggy.
A wraithlike, elfish thing.
But for the Black Man, the sight of it woke a pang of deep affection and kinship. He knew why its reddish fur was the same shade as his own hair, why its high-foreheaded, noseless face looked like a caricature or odd simplification of his own. He knew it, loved it, as his brother. More than his brother. Flesh of his flesh.
He welcomed it as it crept feebly to his side and applied its strange mouth to his skin. And as he felt the suction and faint pricking, and knew it was drawing fresh blood from him and simultaneously discharging vitiated blood into his venous capillaries, he experienced a dreamy gratification and relief.
“Drink deep, little brother,” he thought.  p. 128

Dickon then leaves carrying a message from the Black Man to the Witchcraft.
The rest of the story tells of Jarles betrayal of the Witchcraft at a coven meeting, where many witches are arrested; Asomodeus, their leader, only just escapes using an angel-like device next to him.
Goniface then stages a coup at the Apex Council meeting, and a rival priest called Frejeris is excommunicated for his resistance (this involves having all his senses shut off). The captured witches are brought in and questioned, and Goniface experiences the same terrible pain as them. News of rioting reaches the Council, and Goniface suggests a Grand Revival, a religious festival cum proproganda event to appease the masses.

The latter section drags somewhat and so does the next one, which involves a psychobabble discussion between the newly promoted Jarles and his prisoner Naurya, during which her familiar attacks him and is killed.
This instalment ends with the Dickon’s return to the Black Man. The familiar tells him of the raid on the coven and the arrest of the witches, and that he has taken the dispossessed familiars to the Breeding Place to feed. Dickon finishes by mentioning the birth of Jarles’ and Goniface’s familiars. The Black Man tells Dickon to bring them to him.
This instalment isn’t as good as the first, but it still has its moments.

The Cover for this issue is a bit of a comedown from Timmins’ effort last month, and it is also rather uninspired compared with début artist A. Williams’ Interior artwork for Kuttner’s story.2 Williams also provides better than average work for a couple of the other stories: they aren’t great art, but they are interesting and/or dynamic pieces. My favourites among the others are Paul Orban’s first illustration for the Hull story and Elton Fax’s3 second for the del Rey. Kramer’s pieces for the Leiber are okay too, bar the one with the badly drawn wolf.
Long Arm of Solar Law by John W. Campbell, Jr. is not so much an editorial as a short science essay about the extent of the Sun’s gravitational influence, how it spreads out beyond our nearest stellar neighbours, and its effect on comets.
The Analytical Laboratory: March 1943 & April 1943 covers two months, and I discussed these results in the reviews of those issues.4
Sea of Mystery by Willy Ley is an interesting article on the Sargasso Sea, how it features in history and literature, its ecology, and so on. It concludes with an account of the life-cycle of eels, which lay their eggs on the ocean floor in that region.
Brass Tacks only has a few letters this issue. New reader Art Rapp, from Saginaw, MI, notes that, judging by the way copies of Astounding disappear from his newsstand, he doesn’t expect his comments to have any influence. He has this to say about Kramer’s artwork:

Although I don’t usually care for serials, anything of Van Vogt’s is bound to be good—and this promises to be no exception. Alas, however—it is losing much of its effect through poor illustration. Kramer has talent for depicting machinery, but why does the poor guy in the Page 30 cut wear the same costume as his remote ancestors?  p. 160

I think I may have made a similar observation. Rapp later raves about Mimsy Were the Borogroves.
Bill Buhmiller of Eureka, MO, however, doesn’t:

Maybe in my undeveloped stage of adolescence I have not yet developed the necessary imagination that is required for the consumption of some of the stories that are printed in your “sometimes” excellent magazine. I am referring to the stories like “Mimsy Were the Borogoves” and “The Twonky,” neither one which made very much sense. But what’s the idea? I don’t get the drift.  p. 162

Campbell replies (or pre-replies) that he thinks they are “interesting, off-trail ideas, rather neat little horrors.”
The last letter is from Anthony Boucher and comments on his story Pelagic Spark:

I’ve been noticing how often science and fantasy fiction writers use for their setting a future world resulting from an Axis victory; and I’d like to put in a word of defense before the Writers’ War Board or some such jumps on us as defeatists.
We are not, thank God, prophets. We don’t write what we feel sure is going to happen, but what, under certain circumstances, might happen. Our futures are so many possible Worlds-of-If evolving out of this present.
Now we aren’t expecting an Axis victory, any more than we are expecting world-wide tidal waves or planetary collisions or the invasion of little green men from Alpha Centauri. These disasters are all, with varying probabilities, present in one or more of the possible Worlds-of-If.
And the more we write about ingenious ruses by which the Axis secures victory—in this story the development of a race-conscious American appeasement party—the less apt those ruses are to succeed, and the more certain we can be that my sons and your daughter will inherit, in deepest truth, the best of all Possible Worlds.  p. 162

This is quite a good issue. Although there is nothing that particularly stands out (apart from Leiber’s serial), there is a lot of good if minor and/or flawed work.  ●

_____________________

1. Kuttner and Moore based their recent story Mimsy Were the Borogoves (Astounding, February 1943, my review here) on Lewis Carroll’s poem Jabberwocky. Along with the beginning of this story (talking rabbits), you rather wonder if they were on a Charles Dodgson kick at the time.

2. ISFDB seems to have conflated A. Williams with English fan Arthur Williams, who did a couple of covers for the fanzine Futurian War DigestThe difference in style is probably enough to indicate they are not the same person (and the idea that an English artist was doing interior illustrations for Astounding from the other side of a U-boat infested Atlantic isn’t likely either).

3. Elton Fax may be Astounding’s first black contributor. He appeared in the magazine from November 1942 to November 1943, and would reappear briefly in Weird Tales during 1944. He has a page at ISFDB, and there are articles about him at Flying Cars and Food Pills, Pulp Artists, and Black Past.

4. The Analytical Laboratory results for this issue appeared in the September one:

I think that the del Rey story should have been where Smith’s is.  ●

rssrss

Weird Tales v36n12, July 1943

ISFDB link
Archive.org link

Other reviews:
Robert Weinberg, The Weird Tales Story1

_____________________

Editor, Dorothy McIlwraith; Associate Editor, Lamont Buchanan

Fiction:
His Last Appearance • novelette by H. Bedford-Jones ∗∗+
The Street of Faces • short story by Frank Owen
The Unfriendly World • novelette by Allison V. Harding –
Lost • short story by Alice-Mary Schnirring
The Scythe • short story by Ray Bradbury +
Return of the Undead • novelette by Otis Adelbert Kline & Frank Belknap Long
Legacy in Crystal • short story by James Causey
Yours Truly — Jack the Ripper • short story by Robert Bloch
Tamara, the Georgian Queen • short story by Harold Lawlor –

Non-fiction:
Cover • by E. Franklin Wittmack
Interior artwork • by Boris Dolgov (x3), A. R. Tilburne (x2), Fred Humiston (x2), Hannes Bok, Irwin J. Weill, John Giunta, uncredited
The Shape of Thrills to Come
Strange Music
• poem by Dorothy Quick
Desert Dweller • poem by Clark Ashton Smith
Superstitions and Taboos • essay by Irwin J. Weill
The Eyrie • essay by The Editor
Weird Tales Club • letters

_____________________

His Last Appearance by H. Bedford-Jones is labelled as a “Special Feature” and leads off the fiction in this issue. The story takes place in the near future, after the end of WWII, and opens with a man called Gordon, a tourist/passenger on a clipper that is refuelling at a coral island in the Pacific, talking to one of the ship’s officers. The latter mentions that the two gravestones Gordon is looking at belong to the pilots of a B-29 Flying Fortress that crash-landed during the war. He also mentions that their ghosts have been seen, information that Gordon receives with some incredulity. Later though, after the ship’s officer has departed, a man in flying uniform arrives and starts talking: it soon becomes obvious that the man is the ghost of one of the dead pilots. Gordon finds himself merging with the man, Magruder, and he goes back in time to relive the dead man’s final days on the island.
The tale then becomes essentially a war story covering the crew’s crash-landing and the subsequent fight with the Japanese on the island: after the crew have fought and killed the occupiers, and only Magruder and the other pilot Cox are left, they settle in and prepare the island’s meagre defences in case more Japanese attack before they are rescued. There then follows a middle section where the two pilots get on each other’s nerves, in between Cox musing about the island becoming US territory, and whether the ghosts of their comarades will haunt it.
The final section (spoiler) has them shoot down a Japanese spotter plane before sighting a distant battleship and freighter. When the battleship comes closer they open fire and manage to sink it. They die during a beach landing mounted by the troops on the freighter.
The coda has Gordon arranging to have a ton of Oregon soil taken to the island to cover their graves.
Overall, the story is fairly routine and has a perfunctory fantasy set-up, but it is a readable piece, and the last part (related to the part of the story about the island being part of the USA) gives it a bit of a lift.

This wartime vibe continues in The Street of Faces by Frank Owen, which is about a cruel Japanese general who goes to a Chinese doctor for an operation to improve facial disfigurements caused by shrapnel wounds. The doctor, unknown to the general, has been killing “Japs” on the side, and sees an opportunity to do the same to the general when he operates. However, that night the ghosts of his healer ancestors appear and forbid him to do so.
The next day the doctor operates and, days later, after the General has recovered and the bandages have been removed, he looks into a mirror and sees he has been given a Chinese face. When asked to name the price for the operation, the doctor says he wants all the paper in the General’s pockets. The General initially refuses as some of it is classified material, so they compromise and agree to burn it.
When the general then returns to his camp (spoiler) he is not recognised because of his Chinese features (even though he is wearing his uniform), and the guards and their officer bayonet him to death as he cannot prove his identity.
This has a rather slow beginning but a clever and ironic ending in tune with the times.

The Unfriendly World by Allison V. Harding has a psychologist called Dr Manning become involved in a hospital case that involves George Torey, a man who refuses to sleep without drugs. After a couple of pages of padding we finally get to the heart of the matter:

“No, Doctor, I am not troubled with claustrophobia. It’s something else. Something that seems, seems quite incredible. [. . . ] I’m afraid to go to sleep because, because of something that happens to me when I go to sleep. I—I can’t make anybody believe me—but if there is a Hell, I’ve been there—I’ve seen people there with harpoons—” He stopped abruptly. I said nothing.  p. 30

After being told this by the patient, Dr Manning and the hospital’s Dr Cobb then demonstrate their appalling bedside manner while later events unfold (the patient is variously ridiculed, told to “pull himself together,” and called a “drug fiend,” etc.).
One night, while Manning is sleeping beside Torey’s bed, he awakes to see him thrashing about on his bed, and goes for help:

I looked back once over my shoulder at Torey as I started to leave. I didn’t want my patient to strangle himself in the bedclothes. In the dimness of the room Torey was waving both arms now. Then he jerked several times, screwed himself up into a tight ball, his head and arms disappearing underneath the bedding.
And at this moment Torey screamed. At the same time I thought I caught the shadow of a black something over the bed, over Torey. I recalled this later, in the light of what happened, although at the time I dismissed it as preposterous and a figment of my imagination. But I caught a glimpse of a black shaft, a greater blackness against the semi-blackness of the room, shaped almost like . . . a spear!  p. 36

Manning then notices a ragged cut on Torey’s arm and summons help. That night Torey receives a sedative—but after that it’s back to the old regime, with the inevitable consequences (spoiler: the next time Torey sleeps he doesn’t wake up again due to a huge jagged hole through the bed and him).
There is some back story about Torey’s uncle, who is a psychical researcher, but most of the story is about the doctors acting like idiots while the supernatural events unfold. Oh yes: the medical and psychological terminology used in the story has all the verisimilitude available to a writer who has never had a day’s illness.

Lost by Alice-Mary Schnirring is a two page squib about a woman who finds a lost girl called Moira in the marshes and takes her home. The child asks for her friends, and specifically a boy called Tommy. The next day the child has vanished and the woman goes to town for help, only to find a mass of people on the pier (spoiler) looking at a lifeboat with the corpses of four children including Moira.
This is an idea, not a story.

The first of two notable stories in this issue is The Scythe by Ray Bradbury.2 This tells of a destitute family that arrive at an apparently deserted farmhouse. When the father goes to ask for food he finds the owner dead:

He was an old man, lying out on a clean white bed. He hadn’t been dead long; not long enough to lose the last quiet look of peace. He must have known he was going to die, because he wore his grave clothes—an old black suit, brushed and neat, and a clean white shirt and a black tie.
A scythe leaned against the wall beside the bed. Between the old man’s hands there was a blade of wheat, still fresh. A ripe blade, golden and heavy in the tassel.
Joerg went into the bedroom, walking soft. There was a coldness on him. He took off his broken, dusty hat and stood by the bed, looking down.
The paper lay open on the pillow beside the old man’s head. It was meant to be read. Maybe a request for burial, or to call a relative. Joerg scowled over the words, moving his pale, dry lips.
“To him who stands beside me at my death bed: Being of sound mind, and alone in the world as it has been decreed, I, John Buhr, do give and bequeath this farm, with all pertaining to it, to the man who is to come. Whatever his name or origin shall be, it will not matter. The farm is his, and the wheat; the scythe, and the task ordained thereto. Let him take them, freely, and without question—and remember that I, John Buhr, am only the giver, not the ordainer. To which I set my hand and seal this third day of April, 1939.
(Signed)
John Buhr. Kyrie eleison”
  p. 47-48

The family settle into the house and Tom Joerg starts cutting the wheat in the field—he feels compelled to cut it—but finds it is no ordinary crop:

Joerg roused himself at first gray smell of dawn and was out reaping grain each morn, forgetting to point out to Molly how unusual the field was. How it was too big for one man to tend, and yet one man had tended it. How it ripened only in separate clusters, each set off far from others. And, most important how when he cut the wheat it rotted within a few hours, and the next day dug in and come up with roots with green sprouts, born again.
Joerg rubbed his stubbled chin, worried a little, wondered what and why and how it acted that way. A couple of times he walked up to the grave on the far hill just to be sure the old man was there, maybe with some notion he might get an idea there about the field. But the grave was in the sun and wind and silence. The old man said nothing; there were a lot of stones and dirt in his face, now. So that didn’t solve anything. So Joerg went back to reaping, enjoying it because it seemed important. Very important. He didn’t know why, but it was. Very, very important.  p. 48

At one point he tries to give up but is compelled to continue:

He found the cow, milked it, but thought about other things. The wheat. The scythe.
The sun got in his head, wouldn’t leave.
It burned there, with a hot, blinding pain.
His appetite vanished. He sweated. Under his arms, down his back, splotches of perspiration soaked through his denim shirt.
His fingers itched. He couldn’t sit still. His head ached. His eyes stung. His stomach was sick. He couldn’t sit still. . . .
At one o’clock he was a caged animal, pacing in and out of the house, concentrating momentarily on digging an irrigation ditch but all the time thinking about—the scythe—the wheat.
“Damn!” He strode in to the bedroom, took the scythe down from its wall-pegs. His stomach steadied itself. His headache ran away. He felt cool, calm, his fingers didn’t itch.
It was instinct. Pure, illogical instinct. Each day the grain must be cut. It HAD to be cut. It had to be. Why? Well, it just DID, that’s all. Madness. Insanity. Heck, it was just an ordinary wheat-field.
Like hell!  p. 49

Later on in the story he cuts one particular patch and (spoiler) realises his mother has just died, and it then becomes apparent to him that the wheat represents the people of the world. When he cuts it he is reaping their lives.
The rest of the story tells of his unsuccessful efforts to leave the farm and job behind. Then one day he comes upon the ripened stalks of wheat that are his wife and two children. . . .
This story has a good idea that is well-developed, although you get a niggling feeling that Bradbury would have made a more polished piece of it in his prime.

Return of the Undead by Otis Adelbert Kline and Frank Belknap Long gets off to a pretty good, if ghoulish, start with four medical students digging up a body to prank a freshman called Freddy. They think that Freddy needs his spine stiffened, and coming home after a date to find a corpse in his bed will do the trick. After the foursome finish exhuming the body, they go back to the college and set it up in Freddy’s bed, and wait. In due course they hear a scream and a tearing sound, which summons one of the masters. The four follow the master on his investigation until they reach Freddy’s room. The corpse has vanished—and Freddy is lying on the bed with bites on his throat.
The rest of the story doesn’t really live up to its beginning but you get the sense that the writers are trying to have some fun with this old trope, and we get an early sense of that when they go back to the grave after finding Freddy injured in his room. There they find the vampire back in his coffin and decide to rebury the body. This starts a bit of a running gag in the story, as they shortly return to dig him up again after a second attack at the college, this time so they can stake the body, but are caught by an uncompromising sexton halfway through their second disinterral. The uncompromising churchman waves his sawn-off shotgun at them and makes the group fill in the grave again, to much grumbling.
Also involved in the story are two girlfriends, Nancy and Sally, the latter (spoiler) dispatching the monster when she arrives at Nancy’s room while the vampire is attacking. Fortunately Sally was in the process of returning a bow and arrow!
If you can put up with the semi-tongue-in-cheek plot and the unlikely ending, there is some amusement here.

Legacy in Crystal by James Causey starts with a man lying on his deathbed; he gives an old ring to a cousin, a greedy woman who can’t wait to inherit his estate. Shortly after his death the woman tours the house, insensitively telling her hen-pecked husband about the remodelling she will do. He, meanwhile, finds a book in the study about demonology, before a strange man (Satan) turns up at the door, saying the ring, the house, and everything else needs to be returned.
A short while later the house burns down, and the inherited money vanishes from the bank, etc.
Despite her husband’s warnings about what the woman has now found is a wish-granting ring, she eventually gets her comeuppance.
The stereotypical characters and hoary plot make this a weak and woefully unoriginal piece.

Yours Truly — Jack the Ripper by Robert Bloch is, apart from the Bradbury, the other highlight of the issue. This is an entertaining story of an Englishman, Sir Guy Hollis, who goes to America in search of Jack the Ripper, who the Englishman believes is immortal. Hollis’s theory is that the London murders, as well as others he suspects the killer has committed abroad, are sacrifices to a dark power in exchange for extended life (all the murders occur on significant astrological dates). Sir Guy tells all this to a local psychiatrist called John Carmody, and he asks for an introduction to his Bohemian friends—Hollis has deduced that is the kind of company among which Jack would hide.
Hollis later meets Carmody’s friends, but this yields nothing, and the pair later search one of the seedier parts of Chicago.
The ending is (spoiler) probably both predictable and unlikely (how convenient that the psychiatrist he approaches turns out to be the Ripper!) but it is an entertaining and atmospheric journey to get to that point:

I met Sir Guy the following evening as we agreed, on the corner of 29th and South Halsted.
After what had happened the night before, I was prepared for almost anything. But Sir Guy seemed matter-of-fact enough as he stood huddled against a grimy doorway and waited for me to appear.
“Boo!” I said, jumping out suddenly.
He smiled. Only the betraying gesture of his left hand indicated that he’d instinctively reached for his gun when I startled him.
“All ready for our wild goose chase?” I asked.
“Yes.” He nodded. “I’m glad that you agreed to meet me without asking questions,” he told me. “It shows you trust my judgment.” He took my arm and edged me along the street slowly.
“It’s foggy tonight, John,” said Sir Guy Hollis. “Like London.”
I nodded.
“Cold, too, for November.”
I nodded again and half-shivered my agreement.
“Curious,” mused Sir Guy. “London fog and November. The place and the time of the Ripper murders.”
I grinned through darkness. “Let me remind you, Sir Guy, that this isn’t London, but Chicago. And it isn’t November, 1888. It’s over fifty years later.”
Sir Guy returned my grin, but without mirth. “I’m not so sure, at that,” he murmured. “Look about you. These tangled alleys and twisted streets. They’re like the East End. Mitre Square. And surely they are as ancient as fifty years, at least.”
“You’re in the colored neighborhood off South Clark Street,” I said, shortly. “And why you dragged me down here I still don’t know.”
“It’s a hunch,” Sir Guy admitted. “Just a hunch on my part, John. I want to wander around down here. There’s the same geographical conformation in these streets as in those courts where the Ripper roamed and slew. That’s where we’ll find him, John. Not in the bright lights of the Bohemian neighborhood, but down here in the darkness. The darkness where he waits and crouches.”  p. 92

Tamara, the Georgian Queen by Harold Lawlor3 has a successful writer’s wife attend a séance with Madame Salhov, where she discovers she is the reincarnation of Tamara, a Georgian queen who had a different lover every night and who, in the morning, threw them off the castle parapet to their death. Cue a couple of later jumping suicides from the couple’s tower block. After the second suicide, the writer finds a missing button from the second man’s coat in the couple’s apartment, and later disposes of it beside the body after the police ask him downstairs to help identify the corpse. The writer also notes a change in his wife:

Presently Eve was at my side. “Thorne?”
I turned. Her face was washed in the moon’s radiance. Her red lips were parted, smiling, alluring. I caught her to me, and bent to press my mouth to hers. This wasn’t the comfortable love of eight years. This was something new and strange and exciting. We pressed close.
And then the shuttered eyes before mine opened narrowly. Their greenness was a lambent flame. I was looking deep into the eyes of someone—not Eve!
I pushed her away, and at my startled instinctive action her eyes grew strange and smoky, and a half-smile—inexpressibly evil!—played about her lips.
I turned away and covered my face with my shaking hands, as if to press from my vision the fantasies that my sickened thoughts were conjuring.  p. 102

The writer later tries to find Salhov, but fails. When he almost takes a header off the building himself during a scuffle with his wife, he consults a psychiatrist, and when this proves fruitless does some library research.
This is pretty poor stuff, but it is amusing how the psychologist breezily dismisses the wife’s two probable and one attempted murders:

Dr. Hadley shook his head. “It’s perfectly obvious what has happened. Madame Salkov planted a thought-suggestion in your wife’s subconscious mind. Your wife is evidently a woman of a highly impressionable type. The Tamara fixation built itself up until—”
“But why should Madame Salhov tell her such a thing!” I cried.
Again the doctor smiled. “It’s a fortune teller’s stock in trade to give her clients a thrill, you know. The woman, I think, never realized what mischief she was stirring up.”
I wasn’t quite satisfied. “Those two young men—”
The doctor spread his hands. “Coincidence. Purely coincidence, Mr. Wallace. If the truth could be known, you’d find the deaths of those young men had absolutely no connection with your wife.”
“But the button! The button from Perry Waite’s coat.”
Dr. Hadley looked a little annoyed. “You told me you threw it away without looking at it. Could you swear the button came from that particular coat? Of course not. You’ve had friends visiting you on your terrace who wear coats of that type, no doubt. You probably own a couple yourself. The button may have been there for days, weeks.”  p. 104

This one is pretty awful.

The rather lacklustre Cover for this issue is by E. Franklin Wittmack (his one for the March issue is better). This was his second and last cover for the magazine.
The best of the Interior artwork is, again, by Boris Dolgov, in particular his piece for Robert Bloch’s story. There is also a Hannes Bok illustration, and passable work by John Giunta. Some of the rest is rather amateurish looking (A. R. Tilburne and Fred Humiston’s) or comic book-ish (the uncredited piece for Tamara).

The Shape of Thrills to Come is a page of art which advertises next month’s stories.
Strange Music is another slight, rhyming poem by Dorothy Quick; Desert Dweller by Clark Ashton Smith is a more substantial piece:

Superstitions and Taboos by Irwin J. Weill dishes up more superstitious (although well illustrated) nonsense:

The Eyrie has some autobiographical information from Mr Lawlor:

It was during the depression that I once again felt the desire to write. Escape, probably—increasing deafness made jobs hard for me to get. And then, too, writing seemed such an easy way to make some money. (Ah, Youth and its lost illusions!) I didn’t learn any better until I’d written many love stories and confessions, igniting no rivers the while. When I’d been thoroughly humbled I went to work as secretary to Don Wilcox, one of the well-known writers of science and fantasy fiction.
He had faith, when I had little myself, in my future as a writer. It was at his suggestion that I tried a fantasy, and I sold the first one I wrote. Proof perhaps that those midnight hours spent with Weird Tales and Poe and Sax Rohmer, instead of homework, weren’t wasted after all. There have been other sales since then, and I hope some not too distant day to be as good as the top-notchers in the field.  p. 107-108

After the Editor mentions that Robert Bloch’s story in the next issue is a sequel to his Nursemaid to Nightmares in the November issue, they publish a letter from an early contributor to the magazine:

From Phoenix, Arizona, Mr. Richard Tooker, who had a story of his own in one of the first issues of Weird Tales, writes:
I have been a reader of Weird Tales over a period of many years. . . . Personally, I am not a weird story writer, which may be the reason why I like weird stories so well. Anyone who can make the supernatural sound real to me is worth reading.
But I must put in a complaint against the numbers of “humorous” weird stories appearing in Weird Tales. Humor does not belong in a weird story, nor extravaganza, nor the usual brand of satire. . . .
We want the real, unadulterated article in Weird Tales. Let the boys do their playing around in the fantasy magazines; make them give us plenty of blood and mystery and inexplicability in our weird stories on the principle that the supernatural can never be fully explained by mortals.  p. 109

I can’t say I agree: the more of a mix of material there is in the magazine the better.
The Weird Tales Club is somewhat truncated this issue, and there is an apology about not including all new members—pity they didn’t leave out the letter from the writer, V. Edward, which flogs his new book on Egyptology.

An issue worth checking out for the Ray Bradbury and Robert Bloch stories.  ●

_____________________

1. In Weinberg’s comments for 1943 (The Weird Tales Story, p. 45) he mentions Ray Bradbury’s The Wind from the January issue (“a stirring piece of fantasy fiction”) and The Crowd in the May (which is apparently similar to Poe’s The Man in the Crowd), but says nothing of The Scythe.
Bloch’s story is “a classic of horror fiction and one of [his] all-time best stories,” and Weinberg notes it was soon adapted to radio when the writer started scripting such shows.
There is mention elsewhere about Allison V. Harding contributing “a long list of stories to Weird Tales in the 1940s, most of them undistinguished works that filled up space and were soon forgotten.”
Weinberg also states that “one of Dolgov’s most successful drawings was his splendid evocation of Yours Truly, Jack the Ripper.” Elsewhere he says that Dolgov was one of the best artists to work for Weird Tales, and points to his late 1940’s work in particular.

2. Bradbury’s story presumably inspired this lovely painting by Josh Kirby:

3. According to Tellers of Weird Tales this was the second of over two dozen stories that Lawlor wrote for the magazine. I hope they improve.  ●

rssrss

Astounding Science-Fiction v31n03, May 1943

ISFDB link
Archive.org link

_____________________

Editor, John W. Campbell Jr.; Assistant Editor, Catherine Tarrant

Fiction:
Gather, Darkness! (Part 1 of 3) • novel by Fritz Leiber ∗∗∗∗
Ghost • short story by Henry Kuttner +
Pacer • short story by Raymond F. Jones
Fifth Freedom • short story by Lester del Rey [as by John Alvarez] –
Let’s Disappear • novelette by Cleve Cartmill

Non-fiction:
Cover • by William Timmins
Interior artwork • by Frank Kramer (x7), Paul Orban (x6)
“—Wrap It Up—” • editorial by John W. Campbell, Jr.
In Times to Come
The Old Ones • science essay by Willy Ley
Brass Tacks • letters

_____________________

With this issue Astounding reverts to a smaller size due to wartime rationing and other restrictions. The size of the magazine now appears to be, judging from the images of the scan I read, about 6 inches by 9 inches.

The Cover is William Timmins’ best effort for the magazine so far, and illustrates Fritz Leiber’s second novel Gather, Darkness! (this appeared a month after his first, Conjure Wife, in Unknown Worlds, April 1943). The scene depicts the Hierarchy’s archpriests watching Brother Jarles preaching revolution to a crowd in the square while holding up his priests’ robe with the repulsor field activated.
You can probably gather from the aforementioned that this is one of those ‘Science as Religion’ stories, where scientists are fake priests, and their “miracles” are achieved by using advanced science and technology. We soon learn that this “religion” is a result of scientists of a previous Golden Age acting to avoid humanity’s descent into barbarism. Unfortunately, the ruling Hierarchy has turned into a tyranny (the priests not only have robes which have repulsor fields but also have “wrath-rays,” etc.) and they preside over a population reduced to medieval serfdom. A resistance movement called the Witchcraft is growing and the novel is about the struggle between these two sides.
This all gets off to a cracking start (just like Conjure Wife), and begins in the Great Square of Megatheopolis where Brother Chulian and Brother Jarles are handing out work assignments to the masses. We quickly learn a lot about the future world when Mother Jujy passes by to calls of “Witch” from a small boy in the crowd, and Jarles raises his eyes to the buildings of Sanctuary in the middle of the city:

Megatheopolis was magically different. For there rose the gleaming buildings of the Sanctuary, topped by the incredible structure of the Cathedral, which fronted the Great Square.
Jarles looked up at the Great God, and for a moment felt fingering through his anger a touch of the same awe and reverence and pious fear that vast idol had used to awaken in him when he was only a Commoner’s child— long before he had passed the tests and begun to learn the Secrets of the Priests.
Could the Great God see his blasphemous rage, with those huge, searching, slightly frowning eyes? But such a superstitious fancy was unworthy even of a novice in the Hierarchy.
Without the Great God, the Cathedral was still a mighty structure of soaring columns and peaked windows tall as pine trees. But where one might expect a steeple or a pair of towers, began the figure of the Great God—the upper half of a gigantic human form, terrible in its dignity and serenity. It did not clash with the structure below, but was an integral and indisseverable part of it. The heavy folds of its drapery became the columns of the Cathedral, and it was built of the same smooth plastic.
From where it stood, it dominated all Megatheopolis, like some vast sphinx or unbelievable centaur. There was hardly an alley from which one could not glimpse the stern yet benignant face with the glowing nimbus of blue light. And as for the Great Square immediately below, one felt that the Great God was minutely studying every pygmy creature that crossed it, as if he could at any moment reach down and pick one up for a closer scrutiny.
As if? Every Commoner knew there was no “as if” about it!
But that massive figure did not rouse in Jarles one atom of pride at the glory and grandeur of the Hierarchy and his great good fortune in having been chosen to become part of it. Instead, his anger thickened and tightened, becoming an intolerable shell about his emotions—as red and oppressive as the scarlet robe he wore.  p. 12

Jarles’ colleague, Brother Chulian, is in the process of telling a woman called Sharlson Naurya that she will serve in the Sanctuary, but Naurya refuses and, after some back and forth, Chulian loses his temper:

Chulian bounced up from the bench he shared with Jarles. “No Commoner may question the judgments of the Hierarchy, for they are right! I sense more here than simple stubbornness, more even than sinful obstinacy. There is only one sort of Commoner who would fear to enter the Sanctuary when bidden. I sense—Witchcraft,” he announced dramatically, and struck his chest with the flat of his hand. Instantly his scarlet robe ballooned out tautly, until it stood a hand’s breath away from his body at every point. The effect was frighteningly grotesque, like some incredible scarlet pouter pigeon. And above his shaven head a violet halo glowed.
There was a sibilant hiss of terror, and the faces of the Commoners grew more pale. But Naurya only smiled very faintly, and her green eyes seemed to bore into Chulian.
“And that, once sensed, is easily discovered!” the swollen little priest continued triumphantly. He stepped quickly forward. His puffy scarlet glove clutched at her shoulder without seeming quite to touch it, yet Jarles saw her bite her lips against sudden hurt. Then the scarlet glove flirted downward, ripping the heavy smock, so that the shoulder was uncovered.
There were three circular marks on the white skin. Two burned angry red. The other was rapidly becoming so. Jarles thought that Chulian hesitated a moment and stared puzzlingly at them, before gathering himself and shrilling out, “Witchmarks! Witchmarks! Proof!”  p. 12

At this point Jarles activates his own robe and attacks Chulian, knocking him unconscious. After depowering his robe he climbs on a table and proceeds to harangue the crowd, and reveals the Golden Age origin of their world, and that their religion is fake. He tells them there is no God, and that he does not have divine powers as a priest, taking off his robe and holding it up with the repulsor field and halo activated. When he throws it towards the crowd it comes to rest two feet off the ground.

Eventually, his long tirade is interrupted when the huge plastic statue of the Great God leans forward and extends a huge finger towards him. Jarles is saved from the discharge of the crackling blue energy by what appears to be two black hands that materialise out of nowhere and whisk him away. Gales of satanic laughter accompany the rescue.
This huge (albeit cleverly done) data dump is followed by just as much information in the next chapter, where we see inside the Sanctuary, and witness a meeting of the Apex Council’s archpriests. Their leader is Brother Goniface, and we learn about the politics and factions of the Council, and that Goniface himself has fomented the crisis in the town square to flush out a growing unrest in the population, and to seize power for himself.
During this meeting several country priests appear before the council with reports of huge wolves prowling outside their towns and villages (these prove to be solidographs—holograms essentially—projected by the Witchcraft to destabilise the regime). After dealing with this issue the archbishops then view a holographic recording of Brother Jarles in the town square. Goniface recognises the woman accused of witchcraft—Naurya is really Knowes Geryl, a woman from his past. Goniface orders his cousin and chief scientist Deacon Deth to take her prisoner but keep it a secret.

The rest of the novel keeps up this pace of information and invention, and falls into two main threads. The first is from the viewpoint of Goniface and the Apex Council, and their attempts to stamp out Witchcraft; the other involves Brother Jarles (it turns out that the Witchcraft have rescued him, but he refuses to join them, and is hunted by the Heriarchy on his release until Mother Jujy gives him shelter). This latter thread also deals with the activities of the Black Man (so-called because of his radiation absorbent clothing) who, when he is not being a prankster in church upsetting collection trays, runs the Witchcraft’s resistance activities for an unseen leader called Asmodeus; the last main character is Sharlson Naurya.
There are many parts of this I would like to talk about at length but I’ll restrict myself to the section that describes the arrest of Naurya by Brother Chulian. When he and another priest go to her house to apprehend her she seems she seems unconcerned but, before they leave, there is an extraordinary event:

“Run, Puss!” she cried with an almost mischievous urgency. “Tell the Black Man!”
A glittering talon ripped at the waist the gray homespun of her dress—from within. There was a rapid disturbance of the cloth. Then through the slit something wriggled and sprang.
Something furry, big as a cat, but more like a monkey, and incredibly lean.
Like a swift-scuttling spider it was up the wall and across the ceiling, clinging effortlessly.
Chulian’s muscles froze. With a throaty gasp his companion lunged out an arm. From the pointing finger crackled a needle of violet light, scorching a shaky, zigzag track in the crude plaster of wall and ceiling.
The thing paused for a moment in the air hole, looking back. Then it was gone, and the violet beam spat futilely through the air hole toward the black heavens, where one star glittered.
But Chulian continued to stare upward, his slack jaw trembling. He had gotten one look at the tiny face. Not when the thing moved, for then it had been only a rippling blur, but when it paused to glance back.
Not all the features of a face had been there. Some were missing and others seemed somehow telescoped into each other. And the fine fur encroached on them.
Nevertheless, where the features showed through the fur, they were white, and, in spite of all distortions, they were a peering, chinless, hellish, but terribly convincing caricature of the features of Sharlson Naurya.  p. 32

This is the first explicit appearance of a “familiar” in the novel—these are Witchcraft creatures bioengineered from their owners flesh, which feed on the their progenitor’s blood, and stay in telepathic contact with them. They are an inventive and entertaining part of the novel, as indeed are all the other witchy bits and pieces that Leiber introduces as part of the Witchcraft, such as old Mother Jujy, the Covens, etc.
After taking Naurya into custody, Chulian and his brother priest wend their way back through the city streets with their prisoner. They then find their way blocked by an inky blackness (another solidograph projection) that not even their halos can illuminate, and are forced to change their route,  having to pass a “haunted house,” an unsettling building left over from the Golden Age. When the group arrive in front of the house the blackness surrounds them completely and prevents further progress. Naurya escapes through the door but the priests are locked out. The blackness dissipates and Cousin Deth (Brother Goniface’s henchman) arrives—he is not impressed.

The siege of the house that follows is a set-piece that nods towards a similar one in A. E. van Vogt’s story The Weapon Shop. We have, of course, the usual problems with doors:

Then one of the young priests strode with great dignity toward the house, bearing his rod of wrath above his head like a gleaming sword. Heads turned as, breathlessly, every Commoner watched his approach.
“This place is evil!” he cried suddenly in a great voice, “it is offensive to the nostrils of the Great God. Tremble, Sathanas! Cower, ye fiends! For, lo, I inscribe above the door the brand of the Hierarchy.”
He stopped directly in front of the oddly wrinkled doorway or entry-sphincter. A violet brilliance gushed from the extended rod, of the same hue as his halo, which was almost invisible in the sunlight. Slowly he traced a burning circle.
What happened next was not part of the program. He leaned forward suddenly to peer through the irregular orifice in the doorway, leaving the fiery circle unclosed. He must have seen something of exceptional interest, for he thrust in his head. Instantly the doorway puckered and snapped tight around his neck, leaving him frantically kicking and plunging, while his rod, still gushing violet light, set the green weeds smoking.
There were gasps and scattered screams and a few shrieks of hysterical laughter from the crowd. The three other young priests dashed forward to help their companion, one of them snatching up the fallen rod, which instantly ceased to flame. They tugged and pushed at him violently, and pried at the doorway. The wall gave a little, as if semielastic. That was all.
Then the door opened wide of its own accord and they all sprawled backward in the smoking weeds. The young priest who had been trapped sprang up and darted into the house before the others could stop him, even if they had tried to. The door clenched shut behind him. The house began to shake.
Its slack walls tightened, bulged, were crossed by ripples and waves of movement. Its windows all squeezed shut. One wall stretched perceptibly, another contracted. There were other distortions.
An upper window dilated and through it the young priest was ejected, as if the house had tasted him and then spat him out. Halfway down he exerted his Inviolability. so that his fall was slowed and cushioned. He bounced gently.
This time the laughter of the crowd did not sound entirely hysterical.
The house became quiescent.  p. 41-42

Cousin Deth brings forward more advanced weapons (“Unlimber the zero-entropy spray, Brother Sawl!”) to “exorcise” the house, but is initially matched by its Golden Age technology.
All of this gets Leiber’s novel gets off to a hugely entertaining start, and it is probably the most fun I’ve had since reading Jack Williamson’s The Legion of Time.
Ghost by Henry Kuttner is another story that has supernatural references but, unlike the Leiber, all these do is serve to confuse matters. After a talking-heads start about a modern-day ghost in a computing facility in the Antarctic we find that the machine isn’t haunted but has absorbed a case of manic depression from a previous operator who committed suicide. It is now inducing the same madness in its current operator Crockett.

To “cure” the machine a psychologist called Dr Ford goes to the station with a patient who has a similar manic-depressive condition. The plan is to cure the patient, and induce a similar cure in the machine.
While this therapy takes place we get a feel for the oppressive and claustrophobic nature of the station:

There were shadows in the station. After a few days Dr. Ford noticed those intangible, weary shadows that, vampiric, drew the life and the energy from everything. The sphere of influence extended beyond the station itself. Occasionally Crockett went topside and, muffled in his heat-unit parka, went off on dangerous hikes. He drove himself to the limits of exhaustion as though hoping to outpace the monstrous depression that crouched under the ice.
But the shadows darkened invisibly. The gray, leaden sky of the Antarctic had never depressed Crockett before; the distant mountains, gigantic ranges towering like Ymir’s mythical brood, had not seemed sentient till now. They were half alive, too old, too tired to move, dully satisfied to remain stagnantly crouching on the everlasting horizon of the ice fields. As the glaciers ground down, leaden, powerful, infinitely weary, the tide of the downbeat thrust against Crockett. His healthy animal mind shrank back, failed, and was engulfed.  p. 65

At the end of the story the psychologist effects a cure in both patient and machine but, unknown to the former, another problem remains. . . .

The talky start, computer jargon, and outdated psychology theory do not help the story get going but it improves later, there is some effective description, and it also has a neat twist ending.
I think there is a better story in here where the ghost stuff is dumped—this is really about sanity or insanity, and the latter would have been a better title.
Pacer by Raymond F. Jones is an okay piece of space opera that starts with Commodore Ed Ingraham tearing strips off the men in his fleet. Further vexing him are the orders he has to intercept a slow-moving freighter and escort it to Earth.

Before that rendezvous there is some back story about Ingraham’s past with his father on a commercial ship, and how the latter has supposedly retired to Earth. Surprise!—when they meet the freighter it is Ingraham’s old ship, and his father is piloting it. Cue much embarrassment for Ingraham when, in front of his men, his father calls his martinet son “Kid”, etc. Relations further deteriorate when Commodore Ingraham tries to force his father to transfer his valuable cargo of crystallium so the convoy won’t be slowed down by his ship, which would become the “pacer,” or slowest vessel. Needless to say his father refuses and threatens to blow up his ship (as you do when dealing with rebellious children: stop fighting in the back seat or I’ll blow up the car).

The last act is a space battle with the alien Correne, who are currently wiping out humanity as they progress through the solar system. Ingraham’s Dad has a plan to defeat them that involves his mysterious crystallium cargo, and (spoiler) the speed that it can safely be transported.
Fifth Freedom by Lester del Rey starts off with Tommy Dorn in a future American labour camp during a war with “Centralia,” whose forces have pushed forward to the English Channel. He is a conscientious objector, and therefore despised by his bunk mates and estranged from his family.
Part of the beginning is interestingly meta-fictional:

He tried again to cut the blaring radio out, with its news and propaganda that neither interested nor impressed him, hut dinned remorselessly into his ears, and turned back to the latest Astounding; it had arrived for him only today, and as yet he’d only glanced at the cover and readers’ corner. Hopefully, he began on the cover story:
.
Major Elliot glanced up from the papers as the captain entered, nodded, and went on reading through the reports. “Centralia’s moving up; big offensive at midnight tomorrow, Captain Blake. I want you to take six volunteers—”
Damn! The boy’s lips tightened and he threw the magazine under his bunk, his raw nerves whipped by the fresh insult; even there, war! All day, he’d been counting the hours and minutes until his shift went off and he could find release from the horrible reality, only to find science-fiction as filled with it as all else. He jerked the lumpy pillow up, threw his head against it, and tried to drown out the mutter of voices behind him and rest.  p. 109-110

After a promising beginning Dorn’s story turns into a manipulative, by-the-numbers soap opera that involves a bunk mate called Jimmy, who is crippled by polio, and Alice, a girlfriend from the woman’s camp (sensitive Tommy meets her when he is playing his violin up on the hill). When New York is later radiation bombed by Centralia, Jimmy saves Tommy from a beating at the hands of a group of the camp thugs.

Later, an Air Force recruiter tries to get Tommy (a qualified pilot) to fly the new rocket ships, but he refuses. Shortly afterwards the camp is attacked by enemy bombers and Alice is seriously injured. The Air Force man returns with a rescue team and once again tries to convince Tommy to join the military. When he fails he gives Tommy a respectful homily about how the country is a democracy and that people aren’t forced to do things against their conscience. The Air Force man adds that he’ll have him shipped out to a better place in the Mid-West.
The bombers return later, and Tommy watches as three of the new American rocket ships intercept them: two intentionally blow up their ships, destroying the enemy fleet.

The last scene has Tommy at Alice’s deathbed. After she passes away he decides to volunteer. I hope he turned out a better combat pilot than he was a conscientious objector.
I realise that this was written in the middle of a World War but it is a manipulative piece, and irritatingly sanctimonious—as well as an obvious early example of “pushing Campbell’s buttons” (i.e. pandering to that Editor’s beliefs or hobby horses). Avoid like the plague.
Let’s Disappear by Cleve Cartmill has an overly padded beginning that has an investigator called Thorne Raglan (who owns and runs a company called Hunt Inc.) pick up a contract to find a man called Colin Fane. Fane is one of the beneficiaries of a dead man’s estate, but there are parties who do not want him found.

Apart from Raglan having to deal with being followed by persons unknown, he also has to deal with Hubert Davenport (a relative of Fane’s, and not very helpful), his niece Emily, and a rabble-rousing politician called Coffman, who espouses anarchist ideals and, unknown to Raglan, wants to get hold of a force field weapon that he believes Fane possesses.

None of this really matters as it is a typical Cleve Cartmill piece—an excuse for a lot of running around punctuated with the odd fist fight or, on this occasion, a wildly acrobatic flight/chase in an air taxi.

In the last fight of the story (spoiler) a sword belonging to Hitler is used to slash Coffman’s throat, presumably to give the story some contemporary colour. It ends with one of those “this knowledge is too dangerous to survive” endings where they decide to destroy the weapon and burn the plans.
I’m beginning to dread seeing Cartmill’s byline in the magazine.

The Interior artwork continues to be rather lacklustre: I thought that Paul Orban’s work was much better than Frank Kramer’s—some of the latter’s work has a very perfunctory feel to it (look at the first illustration for the Lester del Rey story, “Man sits beside filing cabinet in office”).
“—Wrap It Up—” by John W. Campbell, Jr. is an editorial about the results of war science, focussing particularly on rubber substitutes, elastomers, etc., and their uses.
In Times to Come refers to production problems and the lack of an Analytical Laboratory feature:

This being the first issue in which the new type face and new format are used, our calculations slipped a bit; this space was supposed to be some three times as great. The lack of Analytical Laboratory is not due to lack of space, however—it’s due to lack of letters.
The March issue had been on the stands only a few days when this issue went to press. Trying to offset the inevitable delays of transportation, we are pushing our press dates ahead; this lack of Lab, or a held-over Lab, is apt to be more frequent in the future.  p. 59

I don’t know why Campbell just doesn’t just do the obvious and slip the results by a month.
The last sentence mentions a new ‘Gallagher’ story from Henry Kuttner, “a nice, if slightly cockeyed, yarn—”

The Old Ones by Willy Ley is an article about zoological geography, the distribution of animals around the globe due to historical land mass change. This has some interesting parts but is overlong, and too often descends into endless lists of animals by continent or area—I started skimming before the end. There should also have been an illustration rather than a page of text describing the original three continents (p. 93, etc.)

Brass Tacks has a long and considered letter (see above) from J. V. Lewis which is rather (shallowly) dismissed by Campbell. The letter before this, from Edmond M. Clinton Jr., San Francisco, CA, is about how SF is extrapolation not prophecy. A later letter from Chandler (Chan) Davis,1 Cambridge, MA, has a top ten for 1942 that omits Nerves and The Twonky. I note that there has been little enthusiasm in either the Analytical Laboratory or Brass Tacks for that latter story. One wonders how it became a “classic.”

It is definitely worth getting this issue for the Leiber serial, and Kuttner’s story is worth a look, too.  ●

_____________________

1. Chan Davis would start publishing in Astounding in 1946. He would go on to publish thirteen stories, half a dozen of which Campbell published. He seems to have drifted away from that editor when he returned to writing after a five-year gap (1953 to 1958). See Davis’s page at ISFDB.  ●

rssrss